597788
6
Zoom out
Zoom in
Vorherige Seite
1/96
Nächste Seite
THORN
User Manual
Introduction
Congratulation for the purchasing of the THORN
Player. The high integration reduces the device weight
and the dimensions and the use is comfortable. The
big display with TFT technology oers clear and sharp
information and the USB 2.0 High Speed interface
make easier the data transfer operation from/to the
computer. The EM820 MP3 Player has built-in a
Li-Polymer battery rechargeable by computer USB
port. By the microphone inside it is possible to record
voice messages and play them directly with the device
or by computer.
Before using this product, please read this manual and
retain the instruction for future reference.
Description
Here below you will nd a product description
1. Power ON/OFF
2. Play [] / Pause []
3. Previous [] / Backward []
4. Menu
5. Earphone Connector
6. USB Connector
7. VOL – (Decrease the Volume)
8. Next [] / Forward []
9. VOL +(Increase the Volume)
10. MICRO SD Card Slot
1. Display
Here below you will nd a display description
1. Total Number of Songs
2. Current Song Location
3. Volume
4. File Format
5. Elapsed Time
6. Total Time
7. EQ Animation
8. Song Name
9. Repeat Mode
10. Battery Life
11. EQ Mode
12. Play Rate
2. Use
2.1 Power ON/OFF
The MP3 player has built-in a rechargeable battery. At
the rst use we suggest to recharge the battery for a
long period (around 8 hours). To recharge the battery
please connect the MP3 player to USB computer port.
Powering On:.
1. Turn on On/O button to On position
Powering O:
1. Hold the Play [] / Pause [] key until the
power-o animation begins
2. Then, turn the On/O button to O position.
2.2 Recharge the Player
The player can be recharged by the priveded
USB cable by connecting to the PC. During charging,
an icon on the right will show.
You should rst turn on you
PC, and then connect the
player to the PC throught the
USB cable. The player should
be fully charged in 2 to 3
hours.
3. Main Menu
After powering on the MP3 player, you can see
the main menu with 9 submenus (optional), which
allow you to select dierent functions and options.
By using the [] or [] buttons, you can select
the desire option, and then press M button to conrm
the selection.
To access at the main menu while you are inside
any of these submenus, press and hold MENU [M]
switch for a few seconds. (Short pressing the MENU
[M] switch usually opens the submenu option of each
submenus)
The available options are:
Music: Select this option to play song.
Movie: Select this option to play AMV video.
Record: Select this option to record voice
messages by the microphone inside.
Play: Select this option to play recorded voice
message.
Radio: Select this option to use the FM radio.
Text: Select this option to read text.
Games: Select this option to play game.
Picture: Select this option to browse and see
photos.
Setting: Select this option to access at system
setup.
3.1 Music Mode
The music player option allows playing songs. To
activate this option please follow here below
instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3
Player, the screen will display
the main menu
2. By using [] or []
buttons, select MUSIC PLAY
option then press [M] button.
3. Press PLAY []
button to start to play the
rst song available.
4. Press and hold M key to return to previous
menu.
3.1.1 Key Function at Music Mode
During the song play it is possible to activate the
following controls.
PLAY [Ź]: Press the play [] to start to play
a song. Press the play button again to pause the song.
To restart to play the song press play button again.
Hold the play button for longer time will
eventually turn o the player
REW & FFWD [] Press [] or [] to select the
previous or the next song.
Press and Hold the [] or [] buttons to rewind
or fast forward the song.
Volume (VOL+ and VOL-): Press [VOL+] button to
increase the volume and press [VOL-] button to
decrease the volume.
3.1.2 Music Mode
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
enter into each submenus. Press [] or [] to choose,
and then press MENU [M] key to conrm each
submenus. Use the same technique to navigate inside
each of the submenus.
In both modes (playing mode and stop mode)
you can nd the following submenus:
O Now playing
O All songs
O Album
O Artists
O Genre: Dance Music, Pop, Symphony,
Unknown Genre
O Local folder
O Create playlist
O Setting
- Repeat: Normal, Repeat one, Folder, Repeat
folder, Repeat all, Random, Intro
- Equalizer: Natural, Rock, Pop, Classic, Soft, Jazz,
DBB
- Tempo rate: ASS speed set, FFREV speed set
- Replay mode
- Bookmark: Bookmark select, Bookmark delete,
Bookmark add, Exit
O Delete le
O Delete all
3.2 Movie
The Movie MODE allows to play movies in AMV
Format. To activate this option please follow here
below
instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu.
2. By using [] or [] buttons,
select Movie option then press PLAY
[M] button.
3. Press PLAY [] button to
start to play the rst movie available.
Note:The Movie Player only
plays AMV les, you need conversion
from other le format in order to
watch the movie you like.
3.2.1 Key Function at Movie Mode
During the song play it is possible to activate the
following controls.
PLAY [Ź]: Press the PLAY [] to start to play
a movie. Press the play button again to pause the
movie. To restart to play the movie press play button
again.
Hold the play button for longer time will
eventually turn o the player
REW & FFWD [] Press [] or [] to select
the previous or the next movie.
Press and Hold the [] or [] buttons to rewind
or fast forward the movie.
Volume (VOL+ and VOL-): Press [VOL+] button to
increase the volume and press [VOL-] button to
decrease the volume.
3.2.2 AMV Submenu
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
nd the following AMV submenus. Press [] or []to
choose, and then press MENU [M] key to conrm each
submenus. Use the same technique to navigate inside
each of the submenus.
O Now playing
O Local Folder:
Under this directory, you can choose to go up a
folder level by pressing MENU [M] to conrm. And
then you can choose the folder you want to play
O Repeat
O Delete File:
Delete specic video you want.
O Delete All:
Delete all videos using this option.
3.3 Record (Voice messages recorder)
This option allows to record voice messages by
using the microphone inside. To record voice
message, please follow here below instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu.
2. By using [] or [] buttons, select RECORD
option then press PLAY [M] button.
3. Press PLAY [] button
to start to recording.
4. You can listen to your
wav le under the VOICE
submenu.
During recording, Press the
PLAY [] to start recording.
Press the play button again to
pause recording. Hold the PLAY
[] / M button for longer time will eventually stop
recording.
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
nd the LOCAL FOLDER and REC TYPE. Press [] or
[] to choose, and then press MENU [M] key to
conrm each submenus. Use the same technique to
navigate inside each of the submenus.
1. Under the LOCAL FOLDER submenu, you can
choose to go up a folder level by pressing [M] to
conrm. And then you can choose the folder you want
to play
2. Under the REC format submenu, you can
choose the recording format including
ACT/MP3/WAV/WMA .
3.4 Play (Voice Messages Player)
The play option allows to play the voice
messages recorded by the MP3 Player. To activate this
option, please follow here below instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu.
2. By using [] or [] buttons, select VOICE
option then press PLAY [M] button.
3. Press PLAY [] button to start to play the
rst recording available.
3.4.1 Key Function at PLAY
Mode
During the recording play it is
possible to activate the following
controls.
PLAY [Ź]: Press the PLAY
[] to start to play a recording.
Press the play button again to pause the recording. To
restart to play the recording press play button again.
Hold the play button for longer time will
eventually turn o the player
REW & FFWD [] Press [] or [] to select
the previous or the next recording.
Press and Hold the [] or [] buttons to rewind
or fast forward the recording.
Volume (VOL+ and VOL-): Press [VOL+] button to
increase the volume and press [VOL-] button to
decrease the volume.
3.4.2 PLAY Submenu
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
nd the following music submenus. Press [] and []
to choose, and then press MENU [M] key to conrm
each submenus. Use the same technique to navigate
inside each of the submenus.
O Local Folder:
Under this directory, you can choose to go up a
folder level by pressing MENU [M] to conrm. And
then you can choose the folder you want to play
O Setting:
- Repeat: Normal, Repeat one, Folfer, Repeat
folder, Repeat all, Random, Intro
- Tempo rate: You can alter the Tempo Rate of the
Song.
- Replay
O
Delete File:
D
elete specic voice le you want.
O Delete All:
Delete all voice les using this option.
3.5 FM (FM Radio)
When the FM Radio mode is activated it is
possible to hear radio programs.
This option allows us to enjoy FM radio
programs. To use it, please follow here below
instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu
2. By using [] or [] buttons, select FM option
then press [M] button to conrm.
3. If there are preset channels, press PLAY []
button to play the rst channel, press again for the
next channel.
3.5.1 FM Submenu
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
nd the following FM submenus. Press [] and [] to
choose, and then press MENU [M]key to conrm each
submenus. Use the same technique to navigate inside
each of the submenus.
Here below you will nd the FM radio option list.
SAVE: Select this option to save radio channels
DELETE: Select this option to delete radio
channels.
DELETE ALL: Select this option to delete all radio
channels.
AUTO SEARCH: Select this option to start
auto-searching for radio channels.
NORMAL BAND: Select this option to activate
normal FM band.
3.5.2 Automatic Search
To scan automatically all
the available channels, please
follow here below instruction:
1. When the FM Mode is
activated, press MENU [M]
button to select AUTO SEARCH option.
2. Press [M] button to start the automatic search.
The MP3 Player will store the rst 20 radio programs
available.
3.5.3 Manual Search and Storing Channels
To scan manually the frequencies please follow
here below instruction:
1. When the FM Mode is activated, long pressing
the [] or [] buttons to start auto scanning.
Scanning stops as an available channel is found.
2. By short pressing the [] or [] buttons to
step-up scanning.
3. Press MENU [M] button to select SAVE option.
4. Press PLAY [] and this specic channel will
be saved as the last channel
5. Repeat the step from 1 to 4 for each desired
radio program by keeping in mind that the MP3 Player
has 20 memory positions.
3.5.4 FM Radio Record (REC)
To record FM radio program please follow here
below instruction:
1. When the FM Radio Mode is activated, press
MENU [M] button to select FINE REC option.
2. Press PLAY [] button to start the recording.
3. Press PLAY [] button to pause the
recording and press it again to restart the recording.
4. To stop and save the recording, long press [M]
button, will return to FM mode.
3.6 E-BooK
The Ebook option allows reading text le. To
activate this option please follow here below
instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu.
2. By using the [] or [] buttons select E-book,
and then press [M] button to conrm
3. Use [] or [] buttons to choose the le
4. Press PLAY [] button to start reading the
le
3.6.1 E-Book Submenu
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
nd the following music submenus. Press [] or []
to choose, and then press [M] key to conrm each
submenus. Use the same technique to navigate inside
each of the submenus.
Before you open any le, if you press M, it will
appears the following submenu:
O Local Folder:
Under this directory, you
can choose to go up a folder
level by pressing MENU [M] to
conrm. And then you can
choose to folder you want to
play
O Play Set:
You can choose between manual play and auto
play. For auto play, you can set the playing time from 1
to 10 seconds for each page of the E-book.
O Delete File:
Delete specic text le you want.
O Delete All:
Delete all text les using this option.
While reading, if you press and hold M, you can
select from:
- Bookmark select
- Bookmark delete
- Bookmark add
3.7 PHOTO
The Photo option allows browsing JPG le. To
activate this option please follow here below
instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu.
2. By using the [] or [] buttons select PHOTO,
and then press [M] button to conrm
3. Use [] or [] buttons to choose the le
4. Press PLAY [] button to start browsing the le
3.7.1 PHOTO Submenu
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
nd the following music submenus. Press [] or []
to choose, and then press [M] key to conrm each
submenus. Use the same technique to navigate inside
each of the submenus.
O Local Folder:
Under this directory, you can
choose to go up a folder level by
pressing PLAY [] to conrm.
And then you can choose to
folder you want to play
O Play Set:
You can choose between manual play and auto
play. For auto play, you can set the playing time from 1
to 10 seconds for each picture.
O Delete File:
Delete specic photo le you want.
O Delete All:
Delete all Photos using this option.
3.8 GAMES
The GAMES option allows playing games. To
activate this option please follow here below
instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu.
2. By using the [] or [] buttons to select
GAMES, and then press [M] button to enter the GAME
MENU.
Inside the game menu, there is one game for
you to use Russia Brick .and then press [M] button to
conrm
3.9 Setting
The SETTING option allows to access to MP3
Player setup system. To access at system setup please
follow here below instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 player, button, the screen
will display the main menu.
2. By using the [] or [] select SYSTEM option
then press [M] button to enter the SYSTEM MENU.
3. By using the [] or [] select the system
setup parameter and press MENU [M] button.
The parameters available in the setup system are:
Clock: This option allows setting of the system
date and time.
LCD set: This option allows setting the brightness,
darkly and black screen of the LCD panel.
Language: This option allows setting the
Language of the User Interface.
Power O: This option allows setting the o time
and sleep time.
Replay mode:
Online mode:
Memory Info: This option allows checking the
memory usage.
Firmware Ver: This
option allows checking the
rmware version.
Firmware Upg: This
option allows to upgrade the
rmware.
3.9.1 Clock
This option allows
setting of the system date
and time. The upper case display the date in Year :
Month : Day Format, and the lower case display the
Time in Hour : Minute : Second format. To change the
Date and time, please follow here below instruction:
1. Under the SYSTEM MENU, choose SYSTEM TIME
by pressing [] or [] and press [M] to conrm
2. Press [VOL+] and [VOL-] to choose the
parameter you want to adjust
3. press [] or [] to change the value. Press
MENU [M] to conrm.
3.9.2 Power O Set
This option allows setting the o time and sleep
time. By setting O Time, it is possible to enable (30s,
60s, 90s and 120s) or disable the power management
features to automatically shut down your player if it is
not used. By setting Sleep Time, it is possible to set
power o the unit after a specied time (30s, 60s, 90s,
120s) from the moment you conrm about this
selection.
To modify this parameter please follow here
below instruction:
1. Under the SYSTEM MENU, choose POWER OFF
by pressing [] or [] and press PLAY [].
2. By using the [] or [] buttons, select OFF
TIME or SLEEP TIME and press [M] button.
3. Choose the desired OFF TIME or SLEEP TIME
and press [M] to conrm.
Memory info
The gure presents the total volume of the disc,
the percentage present the percentage between used
space and total space.
Specication
Notice: You will not informed if the production design
and the specication.
THORN
User Manual
Introduction
Congratulation for the purchasing of the THORN
Player. The high integration reduces the device weight
and the dimensions and the use is comfortable. The
big display with TFT technology oers clear and sharp
information and the USB 2.0 High Speed interface
make easier the data transfer operation from/to the
computer. The EM820 MP3 Player has built-in a
Li-Polymer battery rechargeable by computer USB
port. By the microphone inside it is possible to record
voice messages and play them directly with the device
or by computer.
Before using this product, please read this manual and
retain the instruction for future reference.
Description
Here below you will nd a product description
1. Power ON/OFF
2. Play [] / Pause []
3. Previous [] / Backward []
4. Menu
5. Earphone Connector
6. USB Connector
7. VOL – (Decrease the Volume)
8. Next [] / Forward []
9. VOL +(Increase the Volume)
10. MICRO SD Card Slot
1. Display
Here below you will nd a display description
1. Total Number of Songs
2. Current Song Location
3. Volume
4. File Format
5. Elapsed Time
6. Total Time
7. EQ Animation
8. Song Name
9. Repeat Mode
10. Battery Life
11. EQ Mode
12. Play Rate
2. Use
2.1 Power ON/OFF
The MP3 player has built-in a rechargeable battery. At
the rst use we suggest to recharge the battery for a
long period (around 8 hours). To recharge the battery
please connect the MP3 player to USB computer port.
Powering On:.
1. Turn on On/O button to On position
Powering O:
1. Hold the Play [] / Pause [] key until the
power-o animation begins
2. Then, turn the On/O button to O position.
2.2 Recharge the Player
The player can be recharged by the priveded
USB cable by connecting to the PC. During charging,
an icon on the right will show.
You should rst turn on you
PC, and then connect the
player to the PC throught the
USB cable. The player should
be fully charged in 2 to 3
hours.
3. Main Menu
After powering on the MP3 player, you can see
the main menu with 9 submenus (optional), which
allow you to select dierent functions and options.
By using the [] or [] buttons, you can select
the desire option, and then press M button to conrm
the selection.
To access at the main menu while you are inside
any of these submenus, press and hold MENU [M]
switch for a few seconds. (Short pressing the MENU
[M] switch usually opens the submenu option of each
submenus)
The available options are:
Music: Select this option to play song.
Movie: Select this option to play AMV video.
Record: Select this option to record voice
messages by the microphone inside.
Play: Select this option to play recorded voice
message.
Radio: Select this option to use the FM radio.
Text: Select this option to read text.
Games: Select this option to play game.
Picture: Select this option to browse and see
photos.
Setting: Select this option to access at system
setup.
3.1 Music Mode
The music player option allows playing songs. To
activate this option please follow here below
instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3
Player, the screen will display
the main menu
2. By using [] or []
buttons, select MUSIC PLAY
option then press [M] button.
3. Press PLAY []
button to start to play the
rst song available.
4. Press and hold M key to return to previous
menu.
3.1.1 Key Function at Music Mode
During the song play it is possible to activate the
following controls.
PLAY [Ź]: Press the play [] to start to play
a song. Press the play button again to pause the song.
To restart to play the song press play button again.
Hold the play button for longer time will
eventually turn o the player
REW & FFWD [] Press [] or [] to select the
previous or the next song.
Press and Hold the [] or [] buttons to rewind
or fast forward the song.
Volume (VOL+ and VOL-): Press [VOL+] button to
increase the volume and press [VOL-] button to
decrease the volume.
3.1.2 Music Mode
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
enter into each submenus. Press [] or [] to choose,
and then press MENU [M] key to conrm each
submenus. Use the same technique to navigate inside
each of the submenus.
In both modes (playing mode and stop mode)
you can nd the following submenus:
O Now playing
O All songs
O Album
O Artists
O Genre: Dance Music, Pop, Symphony,
Unknown Genre
O Local folder
O Create playlist
O Setting
- Repeat: Normal, Repeat one, Folder, Repeat
folder, Repeat all, Random, Intro
- Equalizer: Natural, Rock, Pop, Classic, Soft, Jazz,
DBB
- Tempo rate: ASS speed set, FFREV speed set
- Replay mode
- Bookmark: Bookmark select, Bookmark delete,
Bookmark add, Exit
O Delete le
O Delete all
3.2 Movie
The Movie MODE allows to play movies in AMV
Format. To activate this option please follow here
below
instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu.
2. By using [] or [] buttons,
select Movie option then press PLAY
[M] button.
3. Press PLAY [] button to
start to play the rst movie available.
Note:The Movie Player only
plays AMV les, you need conversion
from other le format in order to
watch the movie you like.
3.2.1 Key Function at Movie Mode
During the song play it is possible to activate the
following controls.
PLAY [Ź]: Press the PLAY [] to start to play
a movie. Press the play button again to pause the
movie. To restart to play the movie press play button
again.
Hold the play button for longer time will
eventually turn o the player
REW & FFWD [] Press [] or [] to select
the previous or the next movie.
Press and Hold the [] or [] buttons to rewind
or fast forward the movie.
Volume (VOL+ and VOL-): Press [VOL+] button to
increase the volume and press [VOL-] button to
decrease the volume.
3.2.2 AMV Submenu
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
nd the following AMV submenus. Press [] or []to
choose, and then press MENU [M] key to conrm each
submenus. Use the same technique to navigate inside
each of the submenus.
O Now playing
O Local Folder:
Under this directory, you can choose to go up a
folder level by pressing MENU [M] to conrm. And
then you can choose the folder you want to play
O Repeat
O Delete File:
Delete specic video you want.
O Delete All:
Delete all videos using this option.
3.3 Record (Voice messages recorder)
This option allows to record voice messages by
using the microphone inside. To record voice
message, please follow here below instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu.
2. By using [] or [] buttons, select RECORD
option then press PLAY [M] button.
3. Press PLAY [] button
to start to recording.
4. You can listen to your
wav le under the VOICE
submenu.
During recording, Press the
PLAY [] to start recording.
Press the play button again to
pause recording. Hold the PLAY
[] / M button for longer time will eventually stop
recording.
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
nd the LOCAL FOLDER and REC TYPE. Press [] or
[] to choose, and then press MENU [M] key to
conrm each submenus. Use the same technique to
navigate inside each of the submenus.
1. Under the LOCAL FOLDER submenu, you can
choose to go up a folder level by pressing [M] to
conrm. And then you can choose the folder you want
to play
2. Under the REC format submenu, you can
choose the recording format including
ACT/MP3/WAV/WMA .
3.4 Play (Voice Messages Player)
The play option allows to play the voice
messages recorded by the MP3 Player. To activate this
option, please follow here below instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu.
2. By using [] or [] buttons, select VOICE
option then press PLAY [M] button.
3. Press PLAY [] button to start to play the
rst recording available.
3.4.1 Key Function at PLAY
Mode
During the recording play it is
possible to activate the following
controls.
PLAY [Ź]: Press the PLAY
[] to start to play a recording.
Press the play button again to pause the recording. To
restart to play the recording press play button again.
Hold the play button for longer time will
eventually turn o the player
REW & FFWD [] Press [] or [] to select
the previous or the next recording.
Press and Hold the [] or [] buttons to rewind
or fast forward the recording.
Volume (VOL+ and VOL-): Press [VOL+] button to
increase the volume and press [VOL-] button to
decrease the volume.
3.4.2 PLAY Submenu
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
nd the following music submenus. Press [] and []
to choose, and then press MENU [M] key to conrm
each submenus. Use the same technique to navigate
inside each of the submenus.
O Local Folder:
Under this directory, you can choose to go up a
folder level by pressing MENU [M] to conrm. And
then you can choose the folder you want to play
O Setting:
- Repeat: Normal, Repeat one, Folfer, Repeat
folder, Repeat all, Random, Intro
- Tempo rate: You can alter the Tempo Rate of the
Song.
- Replay
O Delete File:
Delete specic voice le you want.
O Delete All:
Delete all voice les using this option.
3.5 FM (FM Radio)
When the FM Radio mode is activated it is
possible to hear radio programs.
This option allows us to enjoy FM radio
programs. To use it, please follow here below
instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu
2. By using [] or [
] buttons, select FM option
then pr
ess [M] button to conrm.
3. If there are preset channels, press PLAY []
button to play the rst channel, press again for the
next channel.
3.5.1 FM Submenu
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
nd the following FM submenus. Press [] and [] to
choose, and then press MENU [M]key to conrm each
submenus. Use the same technique to navigate inside
each of the submenus.
Here below you will nd the FM radio option list.
SAVE: Select this option to save radio channels
DELETE: Select this option to delete radio
channels.
DELETE ALL: Select this option to delete all radio
channels.
AUTO SEARCH: Select this option to start
auto-searching for radio channels.
NORMAL BAND: Select this option to activate
normal FM band.
3.5.2 Automatic Search
To scan automatically all
the available channels, please
follow here below instruction:
1. When the FM Mode is
activated, press MENU [M]
button to select AUTO SEARCH option.
2. Press [M] button to start the automatic search.
The MP3 Player will store the rst 20 radio programs
available.
3.5.3 Manual Search and Storing Channels
To scan manually the frequencies please follow
here below instruction:
1. When the FM Mode is activated, long pressing
the [] or [] buttons to start auto scanning.
Scanning stops as an available channel is found.
2. By short pressing the [] or [] buttons to
step-up scanning.
3. Press MENU [M] button to select SAVE option.
4. Press PLAY [] and this specic channel will
be saved as the last channel
5. Repeat the step from 1 to 4 for each desired
radio program by keeping in mind that the MP3 Player
has 20 memory positions.
3.5.4 FM Radio Record (REC)
To record FM radio program please follow here
below instruction:
1. When the FM Radio Mode is activated, press
MENU [M] button to select FINE REC option.
2. Press PLAY [] button to start the recording.
3. Press PLAY [] button to pause the
recording and press it again to restart the recording.
4. To stop and save the recording, long press [M]
button, will return to FM mode.
3.6 E-BooK
The Ebook option allows reading text le. To
activate this option please follow here below
instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu.
2. By using the [] or [] buttons select E-book,
and then press [M] button to conrm
3. Use [] or [] buttons to choose the le
4. Press PLAY [] button to start reading the
le
3.6.1 E-Book Submenu
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
nd the following music submenus. Press [] or []
to choose, and then press [M] key to conrm each
submenus. Use the same technique to navigate inside
each of the submenus.
Before you open any le, if you press M, it will
appears the following submenu:
O Local Folder:
Under this directory, you
can choose to go up a folder
level by pressing MENU [M] to
conrm. And then you can
choose to folder you want to
play
O Play Set:
You can choose between manual play and auto
play. For auto play, you can set the playing time from 1
to 10 seconds for each page of the E-book.
O Delete File:
Delete specic text le you want.
O Delete All:
Delete all text les using this option.
While reading, if you press and hold M, you can
select from:
- Bookmark select
- Bookmark delete
- Bookmark add
3.7 PHOTO
The Photo option allows browsing JPG le. To
activate this option please follow here below
instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu.
2. By using the [] or [] buttons select PHOTO,
and then press [M] button to conrm
3. Use [] or [] buttons to choose the le
4. Press PLAY [] button to start browsing the le
3.7.1 PHOTO Submenu
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
nd the following music submenus. Press [] or []
to choose, and then press [M] key to conrm each
submenus. Use the same technique to navigate inside
each of the submenus.
O Local Folder:
Under this directory, you can
choose to go up a folder level by
pressing PLAY [] to conrm.
And then you can choose to
folder you want to play
O Play Set:
You can choose between manual play and auto
play. For auto play, you can set the playing time from 1
to 10 seconds for each picture.
O Delete File:
Delete specic photo le you want.
O Delete All:
Delete all Photos using this option.
3.8 GAMES
The GAMES option allows playing games. To
activate this option please follow here below
instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu.
2. By using the [] or [] buttons to select
GAMES, and then press [M] button to enter the GAME
MENU.
Inside the game menu, there is one game for
you to use Russia Brick .and then press [M] button to
conrm
3.9 Setting
The SETTING option allows to access to MP3
Player setup system. To access at system setup please
follow here below instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 player, button, the screen
will display the main menu.
2. By using the [] or [] select SYSTEM option
then press [M] button to enter the SYSTEM MENU.
3. By using the [] or [] select the system
setup parameter and press MENU [M] button.
The parameters available in the setup system are:
Clock: This option allows setting of the system
date and time.
LCD set: This option allows setting the brightness,
darkly and black screen of the LCD panel.
Language: This option allows setting the
Language of the User Interface.
Power O: This option allows setting the o time
and sleep time.
Replay mode:
Online mode:
Memory Info: This option allows checking the
memory usage.
Firmware Ver: This
option allows checking the
rmware version.
Firmware Upg: This
option allows to upgrade the
rmware.
3.9.1 Clock
This option allows
setting of the system date
and time. The upper case display the date in Year :
Month : Day Format, and the lower case display the
Time in Hour : Minute : Second format. To change the
Date and time, please follow here below instruction:
1. Under the SYSTEM MENU, choose SYSTEM TIME
by pressing [] or [] and press [M] to conrm
2. Press [VOL+] and [VOL-] to choose the
parameter you want to adjust
3. press [] or [] to change the value. Press
MENU [M] to conrm.
3.9.2 Power O Set
This option allows setting the o time and sleep
time. By setting O Time, it is possible to enable (30s,
60s, 90s and 120s) or disable the power management
features to automatically shut down your player if it is
not used. By setting Sleep Time, it is possible to set
power o the unit after a specied time (30s, 60s, 90s,
120s) from the moment you conrm about this
selection.
To modify this parameter please follow here
below instruction:
1. Under the SYSTEM MENU, choose POWER OFF
by pressing [] or [] and press PLAY [].
2. By using the [] or [] buttons, select OFF
TIME or SLEEP TIME and press [M] button.
3. Choose the desired OFF TIME or SLEEP TIME
and press [M] to conrm.
Memory info
The gure presents the total volume of the disc,
the percentage present the percentage between used
space and total space.
Specication
Notice: You will not informed if the production design
and the specication.
THORN
User Manual
Introduction
Congratulation for the purchasing of the THORN
Player. The high integration reduces the device weight
and the dimensions and the use is comfortable. The
big display with TFT technology oers clear and sharp
information and the USB 2.0 High Speed interface
make easier the data transfer operation from/to the
computer. The EM820 MP3 Player has built-in a
Li-Polymer battery rechargeable by computer USB
port. By the microphone inside it is possible to record
voice messages and play them directly with the device
or by computer.
Before using this product, please read this manual and
retain the instruction for future reference.
Description
Here below you will nd a product description
1. Power ON/OFF
2. Play [] / Pause []
3. Previous [] / Backward []
4. Menu
5. Earphone Connector
6. USB Connector
7. VOL – (Decrease the Volume)
8. Next [] / Forward []
9. VOL +(Increase the Volume)
10. MICRO SD Card Slot
1. Display
Here below you will nd a display description
1. Total Number of Songs
2. Current Song Location
3. Volume
4. File Format
5. Elapsed Time
6. Total Time
7. EQ Animation
8. Song Name
9. Repeat Mode
10. Battery Life
11. EQ Mode
12. Play Rate
2. Use
2.1 Power ON/OFF
The MP3 player has built-in a rechargeable battery. At
the rst use we suggest to recharge the battery for a
long period (around 8 hours). To recharge the battery
please connect the MP3 player to USB computer port.
Powering On:.
1. Turn on On/O button to On position
Powering O:
1. Hold the Play [] / Pause [] key until the
power-o animation begins
2. Then, turn the On/O button to O position.
2.2 Recharge the Player
The player can be recharged by the priveded
USB cable by connecting to the PC. During charging,
an icon on the right will show.
You should rst turn on you
PC, and then connect the
player to the PC throught the
USB cable. The player should
be fully charged in 2 to 3
hours.
3. Main Menu
After powering on the MP3 player, you can see
the main menu with 9 submenus (optional), which
allow you to select dierent functions and options.
By using the [] or [] buttons, you can select
the desire option, and then press M button to conrm
the selection.
To access at the main menu while you are inside
any of these submenus, press and hold MENU [M]
switch for a few seconds. (Short pressing the MENU
[M] switch usually opens the submenu option of each
submenus)
The available options are:
Music: Select this option to play song.
Movie: Select this option to play AMV video.
Record: Select this option to record voice
messages by the microphone inside.
Play: Select this option to play recorded voice
message.
Radio: Select this option to use the FM radio.
Text: Select this option to read text.
Games: Select this option to play game.
Picture: Select this option to browse and see
photos.
Setting: Select this option to access at system
setup.
3.1 Music Mode
The music player option allows playing songs. To
activate this option please follow here below
instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3
Player, the screen will display
the main menu
2. By using [] or []
buttons, select MUSIC PLAY
option then press [M] button.
3. Press PLAY []
button to start to play the
rst song available.
4. Press and hold M key to return to previous
menu.
3.1.1 Key Function at Music Mode
During the song play it is possible to activate the
following controls.
PLAY [Ź]: Press the play [] to start to play
a song. Press the play button again to pause the song.
To restart to play the song press play button again.
Hold the play button for longer time will
eventually turn o the player
REW & FFWD [] Press [] or [] to select the
previous or the next song.
Press and Hold the [] or [] buttons to rewind
or fast forward the song.
Volume (VOL+ and VOL-): Press [VOL+] button to
increase the volume and press [VOL-] button to
decrease the volume.
3.1.2 Music Mode
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
enter into each submenus. Press [] or [] to choose,
and then press MENU [M] key to conrm each
submenus. Use the same technique to navigate inside
each of the submenus.
In both modes (playing mode and stop mode)
you can nd the following submenus:
O Now playing
O All songs
O Album
O Artists
O Genre: Dance Music, Pop, Symphony,
Unknown Genre
O Local folder
O Create playlist
O Setting
- Repeat: Normal, Repeat one, Folder, Repeat
folder, Repeat all, Random, Intro
- Equalizer: Natural, Rock, Pop, Classic, Soft, Jazz,
DBB
- Tempo rate: ASS speed set, FFREV speed set
- Replay mode
- Bookmark: Bookmark select, Bookmark delete,
Bookmark add, Exit
O Delete le
O Delete all
3.2 Movie
The Movie MODE allows to play movies in AMV
Format. To activate this option please follow here
below
instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu.
2. By using [] or [] buttons,
select Movie option then press PLAY
[M] button.
3. Press PLAY [] button to
start to play the rst movie available.
Note:The Movie Player only
plays AMV les, you need conversion
from other le format in order to
watch the movie you like.
3.2.1 Key Function at Movie Mode
During the song play it is possible to activate the
following controls.
PLAY [Ź]: Press the PLAY [] to start to play
a movie. Press the play button again to pause the
movie. To restart to play the movie press play button
again.
Hold the play button for longer time will
eventually turn o the player
REW & FFWD [] Press [] or [] to select
the previous or the next movie.
Press and Hold the [] or [] buttons to rewind
or fast forward the movie.
Volume (VOL+ and VOL-): Press [VOL+] button to
increase the volume and press [VOL-] button to
decrease the volume.
3.2.2 AMV Submenu
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
nd the following AMV submenus. Press [] or []to
choose, and then press MENU [M] key to conrm each
submenus. Use the same technique to navigate inside
each of the submenus.
O Now playing
O Local Folder:
Under this directory, you can choose to go up a
folder level by pressing MENU [M] to conrm. And
then you can choose the folder you want to play
O Repeat
O Delete File:
Delete specic video you want.
O Delete All:
Delete all videos using this option.
3.3 Record (Voice messages recorder)
This option allows to record voice messages by
using the microphone inside. To record voice
message, please follow here below instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu.
2. By using [] or [] buttons, select RECORD
option then press PLAY [M] button.
3. Press PLAY [] button
to start to recording.
4. You can listen to your
wav le under the VOICE
submenu.
During recording, Press the
PLAY [] to start recording.
Press the play button again to
pause recording. Hold the PLAY
[] / M button for longer time will eventually stop
recording.
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
nd the LOCAL FOLDER and REC TYPE. Press [] or
[] to choose, and then press MENU [M] key to
conrm each submenus. Use the same technique to
navigate inside each of the submenus.
1. Under the LOCAL FOLDER submenu, you can
choose to go up a folder level by pressing [M] to
conrm. And then you can choose the folder you want
to play
2. Under the REC format submenu, you can
choose the recording format including
ACT/MP3/WAV/WMA .
3.4 Play (Voice Messages Player)
The play option allows to play the voice
messages recorded by the MP3 Player. To activate this
option, please follow here below instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu.
2. By using [] or [] buttons, select VOICE
option then press PLAY [M] button.
3. Press PLAY [] button to start to play the
rst recording available.
3.4.1 Key Function at PLAY
Mode
During the recording play it is
possible to activate the following
controls.
PLAY [Ź]: Press the PLAY
[] to start to play a recording.
Press the play button again to pause the recording. To
restart to play the recording press play button again.
Hold the play button for longer time will
eventually turn o the player
REW & FFWD [] Press [] or [] to select
the previous or the next recording.
Press and Hold the [] or [] buttons to rewind
or fast forward the recording.
Volume (VOL+ and VOL-): Press [VOL+] button to
increase the volume and press [VOL-] button to
decrease the volume.
3.4.2 PLAY Submenu
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
nd the following music submenus. Press [] and []
to choose, and then press MENU [M] key to conrm
each submenus. Use the same technique to navigate
inside each of the submenus.
O Local Folder:
Under this directory, you can choose to go up a
folder level by pressing MENU [M] to conrm. And
then you can choose the folder you want to play
O Setting:
- Repeat: Normal, Repeat one, Folfer, Repeat
folder, Repeat all, Random, Intro
- Tempo rate: You can alter the Tempo Rate of the
Song.
- Replay
O Delete File:
Delete specic voice le you want.
O Delete All:
Delete all voice les using this option.
3.5 FM (FM Radio)
When the FM Radio mode is activated it is
possible to hear radio programs.
This option allows us to enjoy FM radio
programs. To use it, please follow here below
instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu
2. By using [] or [] buttons, select FM option
then press [M] button to conrm.
3. If there are preset channels, press PLAY []
button to play the rst channel, press again for the
next channel.
3.5.1 FM Submenu
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
nd the following FM submenus. Press [] and [] to
choose, and then press MENU [M]key to conrm each
submenus. Use the same technique to navigate inside
each of the submenus.
Here below you will nd the FM radio option list.
SAVE: Select this option to save radio channels
DELETE: Select this option to delete radio
channels.
DELETE ALL: Select this option to delete all radio
channels.
AUTO SEARCH: Select this option to start
auto-searching for radio channels.
NORMAL BAND: Select this option to activate
normal FM band.
3.5.2 Automatic Search
To scan automatically all
the available channels, please
follow here below instruction:
1. When the FM Mode is
activated, press MENU [M]
button to select AUTO SEARCH option.
2. Press [M] button to start the automatic search.
The MP3 Player will store the rst 20 radio programs
available.
3.5.3 Manual Search and Storing Channels
To scan manually the frequencies please follow
her
e below instruction:
1. When the FM Mode is activated, long pressing
the [] or [] buttons to start auto scanning.
Scanning stops as an available channel is found.
2. By short pressing the [] or [] buttons to
step-up scanning.
3. Press MENU [M] button to select SAVE option.
4. Press PLAY [] and this specic channel will
be saved as the last channel
5. Repeat the step from 1 to 4 for each desired
radio program by keeping in mind that the MP3 Player
has 20 memory positions.
3.5.4 FM Radio Record (REC)
To record FM radio program please follow here
below instruction:
1. When the FM Radio Mode is activated, press
MENU [M] button to select FINE REC option.
2. Press PLAY [] button to start the recording.
3. Press PLAY [] button to pause the
recording and press it again to restart the recording.
4. To stop and save the recording, long press [M]
button, will return to FM mode.
3.6 E-BooK
The Ebook option allows reading text le. To
activate this option please follow here below
instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu.
2. By using the [] or [] buttons select E-book,
and then press [M] button to conrm
3. Use [] or [] buttons to choose the le
4. Press PLAY [] button to start reading the
le
3.6.1 E-Book Submenu
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
nd the following music submenus. Press [] or []
to choose, and then press [M] key to conrm each
submenus. Use the same technique to navigate inside
each of the submenus.
Before you open any le, if you press M, it will
appears the following submenu:
O Local Folder:
Under this directory, you
can choose to go up a folder
level by pressing MENU [M] to
conrm. And then you can
choose to folder you want to
play
O Play Set:
You can choose between manual play and auto
play. For auto play, you can set the playing time from 1
to 10 seconds for each page of the E-book.
O Delete File:
Delete specic text le you want.
O Delete All:
Delete all text les using this option.
While reading, if you press and hold M, you can
select from:
- Bookmark select
- Bookmark delete
- Bookmark add
3.7 PHOTO
The Photo option allows browsing JPG le. To
activate this option please follow here below
instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu.
2. By using the [] or [] buttons select PHOTO,
and then press [M] button to conrm
3. Use [] or [] buttons to choose the le
4. Press PLAY [] button to start browsing the le
3.7.1 PHOTO Submenu
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
nd the following music submenus. Press [] or []
to choose, and then press [M] key to conrm each
submenus. Use the same technique to navigate inside
each of the submenus.
O Local Folder:
Under this directory, you can
choose to go up a folder level by
pressing PLAY [] to conrm.
And then you can choose to
folder you want to play
O Play Set:
You can choose between manual play and auto
play. For auto play, you can set the playing time from 1
to 10 seconds for each picture.
O Delete File:
Delete specic photo le you want.
O Delete All:
Delete all Photos using this option.
3.8 GAMES
The GAMES option allows playing games. To
activate this option please follow here below
instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu.
2. By using the [] or [] buttons to select
GAMES, and then press [M] button to enter the GAME
MENU.
Inside the game menu, there is one game for
you to use Russia Brick .and then press [M] button to
conrm
3.9 Setting
The SETTING option allows to access to MP3
Player setup system. To access at system setup please
follow here below instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 player, button, the screen
will display the main menu.
2. By using the [] or [] select SYSTEM option
then press [M] button to enter the SYSTEM MENU.
3. By using the [] or [] select the system
setup parameter and press MENU [M] button.
The parameters available in the setup system are:
Clock: This option allows setting of the system
date and time.
LCD set: This option allows setting the brightness,
darkly and black screen of the LCD panel.
Language: This option allows setting the
Language of the User Interface.
Power O: This option allows setting the o time
and sleep time.
Replay mode:
Online mode:
Memory Info: This option allows checking the
memory usage.
Firmware Ver: This
option allows checking the
rmware version.
Firmware Upg: This
option allows to upgrade the
rmware.
3.9.1 Clock
This option allows
setting of the system date
and time. The upper case display the date in Year :
Month : Day Format, and the lower case display the
Time in Hour : Minute : Second format. To change the
Date and time, please follow here below instruction:
1. Under the SYSTEM MENU, choose SYSTEM TIME
by pressing [] or [] and press [M] to conrm
2. Press [VOL+] and [VOL-] to choose the
parameter you want to adjust
3. press [] or [] to change the value. Press
MENU [M] to conrm.
3.9.2 Power O Set
This option allows setting the o time and sleep
time. By setting O Time, it is possible to enable (30s,
60s, 90s and 120s) or disable the power management
features to automatically shut down your player if it is
not used. By setting Sleep Time, it is possible to set
power o the unit after a specied time (30s, 60s, 90s,
120s) from the moment you conrm about this
selection.
To modify this parameter please follow here
below instruction:
1. Under the SYSTEM MENU, choose POWER OFF
by pressing [] or [] and press PLAY [].
2. By using the [] or [] buttons, select OFF
TIME or SLEEP TIME and press [M] button.
3. Choose the desired OFF TIME or SLEEP TIME
and press [M] to conrm.
Memory info
The gure presents the total volume of the disc,
the percentage present the percentage between used
space and total space.
Specication
Notice: You will not informed if the production design
and the specication.
1
THORN
User Manual
Introduction
Congratulation for the purchasing of the THORN
Player. The high integration reduces the device weight
and the dimensions and the use is comfortable. The
big display with TFT technology oers clear and sharp
information and the USB 2.0 High Speed interface
make easier the data transfer operation from/to the
computer. The EM820 MP3 Player has built-in a
Li-Polymer battery rechargeable by computer USB
port. By the microphone inside it is possible to record
voice messages and play them directly with the device
or by computer.
Before using this product, please read this manual and
retain the instruction for future reference.
Description
Here below you will nd a product description
1. Power ON/OFF
2. Play [] / Pause []
3. Previous [] / Backward []
4. Menu
5. Earphone Connector
6. USB Connector
7. VOL – (Decrease the Volume)
8. Next [] / Forward []
9. VOL +(Increase the Volume)
10. MICRO SD Card Slot
1. Display
Here below you will nd a display description
1. Total Number of Songs
2. Current Song Location
3. Volume
4. File Format
5. Elapsed Time
6. Total Time
7. EQ Animation
8. Song Name
9. Repeat Mode
10. Battery Life
11. EQ Mode
12. Play Rate
2. Use
2.1 Power ON/OFF
The MP3 player has built-in a rechargeable battery. At
the rst use we suggest to recharge the battery for a
long period (around 8 hours). To recharge the battery
please connect the MP3 player to USB computer port.
Powering On:.
1. Turn on On/O button to On position
Powering O:
1. Hold the Play [] / Pause [] key until the
power-o animation begins
2. Then, turn the On/O button to O position.
2.2 Recharge the Player
The player can be recharged by the priveded
USB cable by connecting to the PC. During charging,
an icon on the right will show.
You should rst turn on you
PC, and then connect the
player to the PC throught the
USB cable. The player should
be fully charged in 2 to 3
hours.
3. Main Menu
After powering on the MP3 player, you can see
the main menu with 9 submenus (optional), which
allow you to select dierent functions and options.
By using the [] or [] buttons, you can select
the desire option, and then press M button to conrm
the selection.
To access at the main menu while you are inside
any of these submenus, press and hold MENU [M]
switch for a few seconds. (Short pressing the MENU
[M] switch usually opens the submenu option of each
submenus)
The available options are:
Music: Select this option to play song.
Movie: Select this option to play AMV video.
Record: Select this option to record voice
messages by the microphone inside.
Play: Select this option to play recorded voice
message.
Radio: Select this option to use the FM radio.
Text: Select this option to read text.
Games: Select this option to play game.
Picture: Select this option to browse and see
photos.
Setting: Select this option to access at system
setup.
3.1 Music Mode
The music player option allows playing songs. To
activate this option please follow here below
instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3
Player, the screen will display
the main menu
2. By using [] or []
buttons, select MUSIC PLAY
option then press [M] button.
3. Press PLAY []
button to start to play the
rst song available.
4. Press and hold M key to return to previous
menu.
3.1.1 Key Function at Music Mode
During the song play it is possible to activate the
following controls.
PLAY [Ź]: Press the play [] to start to play
a song. Press the play button again to pause the song.
To restart to play the song press play button again.
Hold the play button for longer time will
eventually turn o the player
REW & FFWD [] Press [] or [] to select the
previous or the next song.
Press and Hold the [] or [] buttons to rewind
or fast forward the song.
Volume (VOL+ and VOL-): Press [VOL+] button to
increase the volume and press [VOL-] button to
decrease the volume.
3.1.2 Music Mode
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
enter into each submenus. Press [] or [] to choose,
and then press MENU [M] key to conrm each
submenus. Use the same technique to navigate inside
each of the submenus.
In both modes (playing mode and stop mode)
you can nd the following submenus:
O Now playing
O All songs
O Album
O Artists
O Genre: Dance Music, Pop, Symphony,
Unknown Genre
O Local folder
O Create playlist
O Setting
- Repeat: Normal, Repeat one, Folder, Repeat
folder, Repeat all, Random, Intro
- Equalizer: Natural, Rock, Pop, Classic, Soft, Jazz,
DBB
- Tempo rate: ASS speed set, FFREV speed set
- Replay mode
- Bookmark: Bookmark select, Bookmark delete,
Bookmark add, Exit
O Delete le
O Delete all
3.2 Movie
The Movie MODE allows to play movies in AMV
Format. To activate this option please follow here
below
instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu.
2. By using [] or [] buttons,
select Movie option then press PLAY
[M] button.
3. Press PLAY [] button to
start to play the rst movie available.
Note:The Movie Player only
plays AMV les, you need conversion
from other le format in order to
watch the movie you like.
3.2.1 Key Function at Movie Mode
During the song play it is possible to activate the
following controls.
PLAY [Ź]: Press the PLAY [] to start to play
a movie. Press the play button again to pause the
movie. To restart to play the movie press play button
again.
Hold the play button for longer time will
eventually turn o the player
REW & FFWD [] Press [] or [] to select
the previous or the next movie.
Press and Hold the [] or [] buttons to rewind
or fast forward the movie.
Volume (VOL+ and VOL-): Press [VOL+] button to
increase the volume and press [VOL-] button to
decrease the volume.
3.2.2 AMV Submenu
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
nd the following AMV submenus. Press [] or []to
choose, and then press MENU [M] key to conrm each
submenus. Use the same technique to navigate inside
each of the submenus.
O Now playing
O Local Folder:
Under this directory, you can choose to go up a
folder level by pressing MENU [M] to conrm. And
then you can choose the folder you want to play
O Repeat
O Delete File:
Delete specic video you want.
O Delete All:
Delete all videos using this option.
3.3 Record (Voice messages recorder)
This option allows to record voice messages by
using the microphone inside. To record voice
message, please follow here below instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu.
2. By using [] or [] buttons, select RECORD
option then press PLAY [M] button.
3. Press PLAY [] button
to start to recording.
4. You can listen to your
wav le under the VOICE
submenu.
During recording, Press the
PLAY [] to start recording.
Press the play button again to
pause recording. Hold the PLAY
[] / M button for longer time will eventually stop
recording.
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
nd the LOCAL FOLDER and REC TYPE. Press [] or
[] to choose, and then press MENU [M] key to
conrm each submenus. Use the same technique to
navigate inside each of the submenus.
1. Under the LOCAL FOLDER submenu, you can
choose to go up a folder level by pressing [M] to
conrm. And then you can choose the folder you want
to play
2. Under the REC format submenu, you can
choose the recording format including
ACT/MP3/WAV/WMA .
3.4 Play (Voice Messages Player)
The play option allows to play the voice
messages recorded by the MP3 Player. To activate this
option, please follow here below instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu.
2. By using [] or [] buttons, select VOICE
option then press PLAY [M] button.
3. Press PLAY [] button to start to play the
rst recording available.
3.4.1 Key Function at PLAY
Mode
During the recording play it is
possible to activate the following
controls.
PLAY [Ź]: Press the PLAY
[] to start to play a recording.
Press the play button again to pause the recording. To
restart to play the recording press play button again.
Hold the play button for longer time will
eventually turn o the player
REW & FFWD [] Press [] or [] to select
the previous or the next recording.
Press and Hold the [] or [] buttons to rewind
or fast forward the recording.
Volume (VOL+ and VOL-): Press [VOL+] button to
increase the volume and press [VOL-] button to
decrease the volume.
3.4.2 PLAY Submenu
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
nd the following music submenus. Press [] and []
to choose, and then press MENU [M] key to conrm
each submenus. Use the same technique to navigate
inside each of the submenus.
O Local Folder:
Under this directory, you can choose to go up a
folder level by pressing MENU [M] to conrm. And
then you can choose the folder you want to play
O Setting:
- Repeat: Normal, Repeat one, Folfer, Repeat
folder, Repeat all, Random, Intro
- Tempo rate: You can alter the Tempo Rate of the
Song.
- Replay
O Delete File:
Delete specic voice le you want.
O Delete All:
Delete all voice les using this option.
3.5 FM (FM Radio)
When the FM Radio mode is activated it is
possible to hear radio programs.
This option allows us to enjoy FM radio
programs. To use it, please follow here below
instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu
2. By using [] or [] buttons, select FM option
then press [M] button to conrm.
3. If there are preset channels, press PLAY []
button to play the rst channel, press again for the
next channel.
3.5.1 FM Submenu
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
nd the following FM submenus. Press [] and [] to
choose, and then press MENU [M]key to conrm each
submenus. Use the same technique to navigate inside
each of the submenus.
Here below you will nd the FM radio option list.
SAVE: Select this option to save radio channels
DELETE: Select this option to delete radio
channels.
DELETE ALL: Select this option to delete all radio
channels.
AUTO SEARCH: Select this option to start
auto-searching for radio channels.
NORMAL BAND: Select this option to activate
normal FM band.
3.5.2 Automatic Search
To scan automatically all
the available channels, please
follow here below instruction:
1. When the FM Mode is
activated, press MENU [M]
button to select AUTO SEARCH option.
2. Press [M] button to start the automatic search.
The MP3 Player will store the rst 20 radio programs
available.
3.5.3 Manual Search and Storing Channels
To scan manually the frequencies please follow
here below instruction:
1. When the FM Mode is activated, long pressing
the [] or [] buttons to start auto scanning.
Scanning stops as an available channel is found.
2. By short pressing the [] or [] buttons to
step-up scanning.
3. Press MENU [M] button to select SAVE option.
4. Press PLAY [] and this specic channel will
be saved as the last channel
5. Repeat the step from 1 to 4 for each desired
radio program by keeping in mind that the MP3 Player
has 20 memory positions.
3.5.4 FM Radio Record (REC)
To record FM radio program please follow here
below instruction:
1. When the FM Radio Mode is activated, press
MENU [M] button to select FINE REC option.
2. P
ress PLAY [] button to start the recording.
3. Press PLAY [] button to pause the
recording and press it again to restart the recording.
4. To stop and save the recording, long press [M]
button, will return to FM mode.
3.6 E-BooK
The Ebook option allows reading text le. To
activate this option please follow here below
instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu.
2. By using the [] or [] buttons select E-book,
and then press [M] button to conrm
3. Use [] or [] buttons to choose the le
4. Press PLAY [] button to start reading the
le
3.6.1 E-Book Submenu
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
nd the following music submenus. Press [] or []
to choose, and then press [M] key to conrm each
submenus. Use the same technique to navigate inside
each of the submenus.
Before you open any le, if you press M, it will
appears the following submenu:
O Local Folder:
Under this directory, you
can choose to go up a folder
level by pressing MENU [M] to
conrm. And then you can
choose to folder you want to
play
O Play Set:
You can choose between manual play and auto
play. For auto play, you can set the playing time from 1
to 10 seconds for each page of the E-book.
O Delete File:
Delete specic text le you want.
O Delete All:
Delete all text les using this option.
While reading, if you press and hold M, you can
select from:
- Bookmark select
- Bookmark delete
- Bookmark add
3.7 PHOTO
The Photo option allows browsing JPG le. To
activate this option please follow here below
instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu.
2. By using the [] or [] buttons select PHOTO,
and then press [M] button to conrm
3. Use [] or [] buttons to choose the le
4. Press PLAY [] button to start browsing the le
3.7.1 PHOTO Submenu
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
nd the following music submenus. Press [] or []
to choose, and then press [M] key to conrm each
submenus. Use the same technique to navigate inside
each of the submenus.
O Local Folder:
Under this directory, you can
choose to go up a folder level by
pressing PLAY [] to conrm.
And then you can choose to
folder you want to play
O Play Set:
You can choose between manual play and auto
play. For auto play, you can set the playing time from 1
to 10 seconds for each picture.
O Delete File:
Delete specic photo le you want.
O Delete All:
Delete all Photos using this option.
3.8 GAMES
The GAMES option allows playing games. To
activate this option please follow here below
instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu.
2. By using the [] or [] buttons to select
GAMES, and then press [M] button to enter the GAME
MENU.
Inside the game menu, there is one game for
you to use Russia Brick .and then press [M] button to
conrm
3.9 Setting
The SETTING option allows to access to MP3
Player setup system. To access at system setup please
follow here below instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 player, button, the screen
will display the main menu.
2. By using the [] or [] select SYSTEM option
then press [M] button to enter the SYSTEM MENU.
3. By using the [] or [] select the system
setup parameter and press MENU [M] button.
The parameters available in the setup system are:
Clock: This option allows setting of the system
date and time.
LCD set: This option allows setting the brightness,
darkly and black screen of the LCD panel.
Language: This option allows setting the
Language of the User Interface.
Power O: This option allows setting the o time
and sleep time.
Replay mode:
Online mode:
Memory Info: This option allows checking the
memory usage.
Firmware Ver: This
option allows checking the
rmware version.
Firmware Upg: This
option allows to upgrade the
rmware.
3.9.1 Clock
This option allows
setting of the system date
and time. The upper case display the date in Year :
Month : Day Format, and the lower case display the
Time in Hour : Minute : Second format. To change the
Date and time, please follow here below instruction:
1. Under the SYSTEM MENU, choose SYSTEM TIME
by pressing [] or [] and press [M] to conrm
2. Press [VOL+] and [VOL-] to choose the
parameter you want to adjust
3. press [] or [] to change the value. Press
MENU [M] to conrm.
3.9.2 Power O Set
This option allows setting the o time and sleep
time. By setting O Time, it is possible to enable (30s,
60s, 90s and 120s) or disable the power management
features to automatically shut down your player if it is
not used. By setting Sleep Time, it is possible to set
power o the unit after a specied time (30s, 60s, 90s,
120s) from the moment you conrm about this
selection.
To modify this parameter please follow here
below instruction:
1. Under the SYSTEM MENU, choose POWER OFF
by pressing [] or [] and press PLAY [].
2. By using the [] or [] buttons, select OFF
TIME or SLEEP TIME and press [M] button.
3. Choose the desired OFF TIME or SLEEP TIME
and press [M] to conrm.
Memory info
The gure presents the total volume of the disc,
the percentage present the percentage between used
space and total space.
Specication
Notice: You will not informed if the production design
and the specication.
2
3. Main Menu
After powering on the MP3 player, you can see
the main menu with 9 submenus (optional), which
allow you to select dierent functions and options.
By using the [] or [] buttons, you can select
the desire option, and then press M button to conrm
the selection.
To access at the main menu while you are inside
any of these submenus, press and hold MENU [M]
switch for a few seconds. (Short pressing the MENU
[M] switch usually opens the submenu option of each
submenus)
The available options are:
Music: Select this option to play song.
Movie: Select this option to play AMV video.
Record: Select this option to record voice
messages by the microphone inside.
Play: Select this option to play recorded voice
message.
Radio: Select this option to use the FM radio.
Text: Select this option to read text.
Games: Select this option to play game.
Picture: Select this option to browse and see
photos.
Setting: Select this option to access at system
setup.
3.1 Music Mode
The music player option allows playing songs. To
activate this option please follow here below
instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3
Player, the screen will display
the main menu
2. By using [] or []
buttons, select MUSIC PLAY
option then press [M] button.
3. Press PLAY []
button to start to play the
rst song available.
4. Press and hold M key to return to previous
menu.
3.1.1 Key Function at Music Mode
During the song play it is possible to activate the
following controls.
PLAY [Ź]: Press the play [] to start to play
a song. Press the play button again to pause the song.
To restart to play the song press play button again.
Hold the play button for longer time will
eventually turn o the player
REW & FFWD [] Press [] or [] to select the
previous or the next song.
Press and Hold the [] or [] buttons to rewind
or fast forward the song.
Volume (VOL+ and VOL-): Press [VOL+] button to
increase the volume and press [VOL-] button to
decrease the volume.
3.1.2 Music Mode
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
enter into each submenus. Press [] or [] to choose,
and then press MENU [M] key to conrm each
submenus. Use the same technique to navigate inside
each of the submenus.
In both modes (playing mode and stop mode)
you can nd the following submenus:
O Now playing
O All songs
O Album
O Artists
O Genre: Dance Music, Pop, Symphony,
Unknown Genre
O Local folder
O Create playlist
O Setting
- Repeat: Normal, Repeat one, Folder, Repeat
folder, Repeat all, Random, Intro
- Equalizer: Natural, Rock, Pop, Classic, Soft, Jazz,
DBB
- Tempo rate: ASS speed set, FFREV speed set
- Replay mode
- Bookmark: Bookmark select, Bookmark delete,
Bookmark add, Exit
O Delete le
O Delete all
3.2 Movie
The Movie MODE allows to play movies in AMV
Format. To activate this option please follow here
below
instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu.
2. By using [] or [] buttons,
select Movie option then press PLAY
[M] button.
3. Press PLAY [] button to
start to play the rst movie available.
Note:The Movie Player only
plays AMV les, you need conversion
from other le format in order to
watch the movie you like.
3.2.1 Key Function at Movie Mode
During the song play it is possible to activate the
following controls.
PLAY [Ź]: Press the PLAY [] to start to play
a movie. Press the play button again to pause the
movie. To restart to play the movie press play button
again.
Hold the play button for longer time will
eventually turn o the player
REW & FFWD [] Press [] or [] to select
the previous or the next movie.
Press and Hold the [] or [] buttons to rewind
or fast forward the movie.
Volume (VOL+ and VOL-): Press [VOL+] button to
increase the volume and press [VOL-] button to
decrease the volume.
3.2.2 AMV Submenu
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
nd the following AMV submenus. Press [] or []to
choose, and then press MENU [M] key to conrm each
submenus. Use the same technique to navigate inside
each of the submenus.
O Now playing
O Local Folder:
Under this directory, you can choose to go up a
folder level by pressing MENU [M] to conrm. And
then you can choose the folder you want to play
O Repeat
O Delete File:
Delete specic video you want.
O Delete All:
Delete all videos using this option.
3.3 Record (Voice messages recorder)
This option allows to record voice messages by
using the microphone inside. To record voice
message, please follow here below instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu.
2. By using [] or [] buttons, select RECORD
option then press PLAY [M] button.
3. Press PLAY [] button
to start to recording.
4. You can listen to your
wav le under the VOICE
submenu.
During recording, Press the
PLAY [] to start recording.
Press the play button again to
pause recording. Hold the PLAY
[] / M button for longer time will eventually stop
recording.
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
nd the LOCAL FOLDER and REC TYPE. Press [] or
[] to choose, and then press MENU [M] key to
conrm each submenus. Use the same technique to
navigate inside each of the submenus.
1. Under the LOCAL FOLDER submenu, you can
choose to go up a folder level by pressing [M] to
conrm. And then you can choose the folder you want
to play
2. Under the REC format submenu, you can
choose the recording format including
ACT/MP3/WAV/WMA .
3.4 Play (Voice Messages Player)
The play option allows to play the voice
messages recorded by the MP3 Player. To activate this
option, please follow here below instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu.
2. By using [] or [] buttons, select VOICE
option then press PLAY [M] button.
3. Press PLAY [] button to start to play the
rst recording available.
3.4.1 Key Function at PLAY
Mode
During the recording play it is
possible to activate the following
controls.
PLAY [Ź]: Press the PLAY
[] to start to play a recording.
Press the play button again to pause the recording. To
restart to play the recording press play button again.
Hold the play button for longer time will
eventually turn o the player
REW & FFWD [] Press [] or [] to select
the previous or the next recording.
Press and Hold the [] or [] buttons to rewind
or fast forward the recording.
Volume (VOL+ and VOL-): Press [VOL+] button to
increase the volume and press [VOL-] button to
decrease the volume.
3.4.2 PLAY Submenu
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
nd the following music submenus. Press [] and []
to choose, and then press MENU [M] key to conrm
each submenus. Use the same technique to navigate
inside each of the submenus.
O Local Folder:
Under this directory, you can choose to go up a
folder level by pressing MENU [M] to conrm. And
then you can choose the folder you want to play
O Setting:
- Repeat: Normal, Repeat one, Folfer, Repeat
folder, Repeat all, Random, Intro
- Tempo rate: You can alter the Tempo Rate of the
Song.
- Replay
O Delete File:
Delete specic voice le you want.
O Delete All:
Delete all voice les using this option.
3.5 FM (FM Radio)
When the FM Radio mode is activated it is
possible to hear radio programs.
This option allows us to enjoy FM radio
programs. To use it, please follow here below
instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu
2. By using [] or [] buttons, select FM option
then press [M] button to conrm.
3. If there are preset channels, press PLAY []
button to play the rst channel, press again for the
next channel.
3.5.1 FM Submenu
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
nd the following FM submenus. Press [] and [] to
choose, and then press MENU [M]key to conrm each
submenus. Use the same technique to navigate inside
each of the submenus.
Here below you will nd the FM radio option list.
SAVE: Select this option to save radio channels
DELETE: Select this option to delete radio
channels.
DELETE ALL: Select this option to delete all radio
channels.
AUTO SEARCH: Select this option to start
auto-searching for radio channels.
NORMAL BAND: Select this option to activate
normal FM band.
3.5.2 Automatic Search
To scan automatically all
the available channels, please
follow here below instruction:
1. When the FM Mode is
activated, press MENU [M]
button to select AUTO SEARCH option.
2. Press [M] button to start the automatic search.
The MP3 Player will store the rst 20 radio programs
available.
3.5.3 Manual Search and Storing Channels
To scan manually the frequencies please follow
here below instruction:
1. When the FM Mode is activated, long pressing
the [] or [] buttons to start auto scanning.
Scanning stops as an available channel is found.
2. By short pressing the [] or [] buttons to
step-up scanning.
3. Press MENU [M] button to select SAVE option.
4. Press PLAY [] and this specic channel will
be saved as the last channel
5. Repeat the step from 1 to 4 for each desired
radio program by keeping in mind that the MP3 Player
has 20 memory positions.
3.5.4 FM Radio Record (REC)
To record FM radio program please follow here
below instruction:
1. When the FM Radio Mode is activated, press
MENU [M] button to select FINE REC option.
2. Press PLAY [] button to start the recording.
3. Press PLAY [] button to pause the
recording and press it again to restart the recording.
4. To stop and save the recording, long press [M]
button, will return to FM mode.
3.6 E-BooK
The Ebook option allows reading text le. To
activate this option please follow here below
instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu.
2. By using the [
] or [] buttons select E-book,
and then pr
ess [M] button to conrm
3. Use [] or [] buttons to choose the le
4. Press PLAY [] button to start reading the
le
3.6.1 E-Book Submenu
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
nd the following music submenus. Press [] or []
to choose, and then press [M] key to conrm each
submenus. Use the same technique to navigate inside
each of the submenus.
Before you open any le, if you press M, it will
appears the following submenu:
O Local Folder:
Under this directory, you
can choose to go up a folder
level by pressing MENU [M] to
conrm. And then you can
choose to folder you want to
play
O Play Set:
You can choose between manual play and auto
play. For auto play, you can set the playing time from 1
to 10 seconds for each page of the E-book.
O Delete File:
Delete specic text le you want.
O Delete All:
Delete all text les using this option.
While reading, if you press and hold M, you can
select from:
- Bookmark select
- Bookmark delete
- Bookmark add
3.7 PHOTO
The Photo option allows browsing JPG le. To
activate this option please follow here below
instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu.
2. By using the [] or [] buttons select PHOTO,
and then press [M] button to conrm
3. Use [] or [] buttons to choose the le
4. Press PLAY [] button to start browsing the le
3.7.1 PHOTO Submenu
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
nd the following music submenus. Press [] or []
to choose, and then press [M] key to conrm each
submenus. Use the same technique to navigate inside
each of the submenus.
O Local Folder:
Under this directory, you can
choose to go up a folder level by
pressing PLAY [] to conrm.
And then you can choose to
folder you want to play
O Play Set:
You can choose between manual play and auto
play. For auto play, you can set the playing time from 1
to 10 seconds for each picture.
O Delete File:
Delete specic photo le you want.
O Delete All:
Delete all Photos using this option.
3.8 GAMES
The GAMES option allows playing games. To
activate this option please follow here below
instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu.
2. By using the [] or [] buttons to select
GAMES, and then press [M] button to enter the GAME
MENU.
Inside the game menu, there is one game for
you to use Russia Brick .and then press [M] button to
conrm
3.9 Setting
The SETTING option allows to access to MP3
Player setup system. To access at system setup please
follow here below instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 player, button, the screen
will display the main menu.
2. By using the [] or [] select SYSTEM option
then press [M] button to enter the SYSTEM MENU.
3. By using the [] or [] select the system
setup parameter and press MENU [M] button.
The parameters available in the setup system are:
Clock: This option allows setting of the system
date and time.
LCD set: This option allows setting the brightness,
darkly and black screen of the LCD panel.
Language: This option allows setting the
Language of the User Interface.
Power O: This option allows setting the o time
and sleep time.
Replay mode:
Online mode:
Memory Info: This option allows checking the
memory usage.
Firmware Ver: This
option allows checking the
rmware version.
Firmware Upg: This
option allows to upgrade the
rmware.
3.9.1 Clock
This option allows
setting of the system date
and time. The upper case display the date in Year :
Month : Day Format, and the lower case display the
Time in Hour : Minute : Second format. To change the
Date and time, please follow here below instruction:
1. Under the SYSTEM MENU, choose SYSTEM TIME
by pressing [] or [] and press [M] to conrm
2. Press [VOL+] and [VOL-] to choose the
parameter you want to adjust
3. press [] or [] to change the value. Press
MENU [M] to conrm.
3.9.2 Power O Set
This option allows setting the o time and sleep
time. By setting O Time, it is possible to enable (30s,
60s, 90s and 120s) or disable the power management
features to automatically shut down your player if it is
not used. By setting Sleep Time, it is possible to set
power o the unit after a specied time (30s, 60s, 90s,
120s) from the moment you conrm about this
selection.
To modify this parameter please follow here
below instruction:
1. Under the SYSTEM MENU, choose POWER OFF
by pressing [] or [] and press PLAY [].
2. By using the [] or [] buttons, select OFF
TIME or SLEEP TIME and press [M] button.
3. Choose the desired OFF TIME or SLEEP TIME
and press [M] to conrm.
Memory info
The gure presents the total volume of the disc,
the percentage present the percentage between used
space and total space.
Specication
Notice: You will not informed if the production design
and the specication.
3
3. Main Menu
After powering on the MP3 player, you can see
the main menu with 9 submenus (optional), which
allow you to select dierent functions and options.
By using the [] or [] buttons, you can select
the desire option, and then press M button to conrm
the selection.
To access at the main menu while you are inside
any of these submenus, press and hold MENU [M]
switch for a few seconds. (Short pressing the MENU
[M] switch usually opens the submenu option of each
submenus)
The available options are:
Music: Select this option to play song.
Movie: Select this option to play AMV video.
Record: Select this option to record voice
messages by the microphone inside.
Play: Select this option to play recorded voice
message.
Radio: Select this option to use the FM radio.
Text: Select this option to read text.
Games: Select this option to play game.
Picture: Select this option to browse and see
photos.
Setting: Select this option to access at system
setup.
3.1 Music Mode
The music player option allows playing songs. To
activate this option please follow here below
instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3
Player, the screen will display
the main menu
2. By using [] or []
buttons, select MUSIC PLAY
option then press [M] button.
3. Press PLAY []
button to start to play the
rst song available.
4. Press and hold M key to return to previous
menu.
3.1.1 Key Function at Music Mode
During the song play it is possible to activate the
following controls.
PLAY [Ź]: Press the play [] to start to play
a song. Press the play button again to pause the song.
To restart to play the song press play button again.
Hold the play button for longer time will
eventually turn o the player
REW & FFWD [] Press [] or [] to select the
previous or the next song.
Press and Hold the [] or [] buttons to rewind
or fast forward the song.
Volume (VOL+ and VOL-): Press [VOL+] button to
increase the volume and press [VOL-] button to
decrease the volume.
3.1.2 Music Mode
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
enter into each submenus. Press [] or [] to choose,
and then press MENU [M] key to conrm each
submenus. Use the same technique to navigate inside
each of the submenus.
In both modes (playing mode and stop mode)
you can nd the following submenus:
O Now playing
O All songs
O Album
O Artists
O Genre: Dance Music, Pop, Symphony,
Unknown Genre
O Local folder
O Create playlist
O Setting
- Repeat: Normal, Repeat one, Folder, Repeat
folder, Repeat all, Random, Intro
- Equalizer: Natural, Rock, Pop, Classic, Soft, Jazz,
DBB
- Tempo rate: ASS speed set, FFREV speed set
- Replay mode
- Bookmark: Bookmark select, Bookmark delete,
Bookmark add, Exit
O Delete le
O Delete all
3.2 Movie
The Movie MODE allows to play movies in AMV
Format. To activate this option please follow here
below
instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu.
2. By using [] or [] buttons,
select Movie option then press PLAY
[M] button.
3. Press PLAY [] button to
start to play the rst movie available.
Note:The Movie Player only
plays AMV les, you need conversion
from other le format in order to
watch the movie you like.
3.2.1 Key Function at Movie Mode
During the song play it is possible to activate the
following controls.
PLAY [Ź]: Press the PLAY [] to start to play
a movie. Press the play button again to pause the
movie. To restart to play the movie press play button
again.
Hold the play button for longer time will
eventually turn o the player
REW & FFWD [] Press [] or [] to select
the previous or the next movie.
Press and Hold the [] or [] buttons to rewind
or fast forward the movie.
Volume (VOL+ and VOL-): Press [VOL+] button to
increase the volume and press [VOL-] button to
decrease the volume.
3.2.2 AMV Submenu
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
nd the following AMV submenus. Press [] or []to
choose, and then press MENU [M] key to conrm each
submenus. Use the same technique to navigate inside
each of the submenus.
O Now playing
O Local Folder:
Under this directory, you can choose to go up a
folder level by pressing MENU [M] to conrm. And
then you can choose the folder you want to play
O Repeat
O Delete File:
Delete specic video you want.
O Delete All:
Delete all videos using this option.
3.3 Record (Voice messages recorder)
This option allows to record voice messages by
using the microphone inside. To record voice
message, please follow here below instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu.
2. By using [] or [] buttons, select RECORD
option then press PLAY [M] button.
3. Press PLAY [] button
to start to recording.
4. You can listen to your
wav le under the VOICE
submenu.
During recording, Press the
PLAY [] to start recording.
Press the play button again to
pause recording. Hold the PLAY
[] / M button for longer time will eventually stop
recording.
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
nd the LOCAL FOLDER and REC TYPE. Press [] or
[] to choose, and then press MENU [M] key to
conrm each submenus. Use the same technique to
navigate inside each of the submenus.
1. Under the LOCAL FOLDER submenu, you can
choose to go up a folder level by pressing [M] to
conrm. And then you can choose the folder you want
to play
2. Under the REC format submenu, you can
choose the recording format including
ACT/MP3/WAV/WMA .
3.4 Play (Voice Messages Player)
The play option allows to play the voice
messages recorded by the MP3 Player. To activate this
option, please follow here below instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu.
2. By using [] or [] buttons, select VOICE
option then press PLAY [M] button.
3. Press PLAY [] button to start to play the
rst recording available.
3.4.1 Key Function at PLAY
Mode
During the recording play it is
possible to activate the following
controls.
PLAY [Ź]: Press the PLAY
[] to start to play a recording.
Press the play button again to pause the recording. To
restart to play the recording press play button again.
Hold the play button for longer time will
eventually turn o the player
REW & FFWD [] Press [] or [] to select
the previous or the next recording.
Press and Hold the [] or [] buttons to rewind
or fast forward the recording.
Volume (VOL+ and VOL-): Press [VOL+] button to
increase the volume and press [VOL-] button to
decrease the volume.
3.4.2 PLAY Submenu
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
nd the following music submenus. Press [] and []
to choose, and then press MENU [M] key to conrm
each submenus. Use the same technique to navigate
inside each of the submenus.
O Local Folder:
Under this directory, you can choose to go up a
folder level by pressing MENU [M] to conrm. And
then you can choose the folder you want to play
O Setting:
- Repeat: Normal, Repeat one, Folfer, Repeat
folder, Repeat all, Random, Intro
- Tempo rate: You can alter the Tempo Rate of the
Song.
- Replay
O Delete File:
Delete specic voice le you want.
O Delete All:
Delete all voice les using this option.
3.5 FM (FM Radio)
When the FM Radio mode is activated it is
possible to hear radio programs.
This option allows us to enjoy FM radio
programs. To use it, please follow here below
instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu
2. By using [] or [] buttons, select FM option
then press [M] button to conrm.
3. If there are preset channels, press PLAY []
button to play the rst channel, press again for the
next channel.
3.5.1 FM Submenu
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
nd the following FM submenus. Press [] and [] to
choose, and then press MENU [M]key to conrm each
submenus. Use the same technique to navigate inside
each of the submenus.
Here below you will nd the FM radio option list.
SAVE: Select this option to save radio channels
DELETE: Select this option to delete radio
channels.
DELETE ALL: Select this option to delete all radio
channels.
AUTO SEARCH: Select this option to start
auto-searching for radio channels.
NORMAL BAND: Select this option to activate
normal FM band.
3.5.2 Automatic Search
To scan automatically all
the available channels, please
follow here below instruction:
1. When the FM Mode is
activated, press MENU [M]
button to select AUTO SEARCH option.
2. Press [M] button to start the automatic search.
The MP3 Player will store the rst 20 radio programs
available.
3.5.3 Manual Search and Storing Channels
To scan manually the frequencies please follow
here below instruction:
1. When the FM Mode is activated, long pressing
the [] or [] buttons to start auto scanning.
Scanning stops as an available channel is found.
2. By short pressing the [] or [] buttons to
step-up scanning.
3. Press MENU [M] button to select SAVE option.
4. Press PLAY [] and this specic channel will
be saved as the last channel
5. Repeat the step from 1 to 4 for each desired
radio program by keeping in mind that the MP3 Player
has 20 memory positions.
3.5.4 FM Radio Record (REC)
To record FM radio program please follow here
below instruction:
1. When the FM Radio Mode is activated, press
MENU [M] button to select FINE REC option.
2. Press PLAY [] button to start the recording.
3. Press PLAY [] button to pause the
recording and press it again to restart the recording.
4. To stop and save the recording, long press [M]
button, will return to FM mode.
3.6 E-BooK
The Ebook option allows reading text le. To
activate this option please follow here below
instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu.
2. By using the [] or [] buttons select E-book,
and then press [M] button to conrm
3. Use [] or [] buttons to choose the le
4. Press PLAY [] button to start reading the
le
3.6.1 E-Book Submenu
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
nd the following music submenus. Press [] or []
to choose, and then press [M] key to conrm each
submenus. Use the same technique to navigate inside
each of the submenus.
Before you open any le, if you press M, it will
appears the following submenu:
O Local Folder:
Under this directory, you
can choose to go up a folder
level by pressing MENU [M] to
conrm. And then you can
choose t
o folder you want to
play
O Play Set:
You can choose between manual play and auto
play. For auto play, you can set the playing time from 1
to 10 seconds for each page of the E-book.
O Delete File:
Delete specic text le you want.
O Delete All:
Delete all text les using this option.
While reading, if you press and hold M, you can
select from:
- Bookmark select
- Bookmark delete
- Bookmark add
3.7 PHOTO
The Photo option allows browsing JPG le. To
activate this option please follow here below
instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu.
2. By using the [] or [] buttons select PHOTO,
and then press [M] button to conrm
3. Use [] or [] buttons to choose the le
4. Press PLAY [] button to start browsing the le
3.7.1 PHOTO Submenu
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
nd the following music submenus. Press [] or []
to choose, and then press [M] key to conrm each
submenus. Use the same technique to navigate inside
each of the submenus.
O Local Folder:
Under this directory, you can
choose to go up a folder level by
pressing PLAY [] to conrm.
And then you can choose to
folder you want to play
O Play Set:
You can choose between manual play and auto
play. For auto play, you can set the playing time from 1
to 10 seconds for each picture.
O Delete File:
Delete specic photo le you want.
O Delete All:
Delete all Photos using this option.
3.8 GAMES
The GAMES option allows playing games. To
activate this option please follow here below
instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu.
2. By using the [] or [] buttons to select
GAMES, and then press [M] button to enter the GAME
MENU.
Inside the game menu, there is one game for
you to use Russia Brick .and then press [M] button to
conrm
3.9 Setting
The SETTING option allows to access to MP3
Player setup system. To access at system setup please
follow here below instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 player, button, the screen
will display the main menu.
2. By using the [] or [] select SYSTEM option
then press [M] button to enter the SYSTEM MENU.
3. By using the [] or [] select the system
setup parameter and press MENU [M] button.
The parameters available in the setup system are:
Clock: This option allows setting of the system
date and time.
LCD set: This option allows setting the brightness,
darkly and black screen of the LCD panel.
Language: This option allows setting the
Language of the User Interface.
Power O: This option allows setting the o time
and sleep time.
Replay mode:
Online mode:
Memory Info: This option allows checking the
memory usage.
Firmware Ver: This
option allows checking the
rmware version.
Firmware Upg: This
option allows to upgrade the
rmware.
3.9.1 Clock
This option allows
setting of the system date
and time. The upper case display the date in Year :
Month : Day Format, and the lower case display the
Time in Hour : Minute : Second format. To change the
Date and time, please follow here below instruction:
1. Under the SYSTEM MENU, choose SYSTEM TIME
by pressing [] or [] and press [M] to conrm
2. Press [VOL+] and [VOL-] to choose the
parameter you want to adjust
3. press [] or [] to change the value. Press
MENU [M] to conrm.
3.9.2 Power O Set
This option allows setting the o time and sleep
time. By setting O Time, it is possible to enable (30s,
60s, 90s and 120s) or disable the power management
features to automatically shut down your player if it is
not used. By setting Sleep Time, it is possible to set
power o the unit after a specied time (30s, 60s, 90s,
120s) from the moment you conrm about this
selection.
To modify this parameter please follow here
below instruction:
1. Under the SYSTEM MENU, choose POWER OFF
by pressing [] or [] and press PLAY [].
2. By using the [] or [] buttons, select OFF
TIME or SLEEP TIME and press [M] button.
3. Choose the desired OFF TIME or SLEEP TIME
and press [M] to conrm.
Memory info
The gure presents the total volume of the disc,
the percentage present the percentage between used
space and total space.
Specication
Notice: You will not informed if the production design
and the specication.
4
3. Main Menu
After powering on the MP3 player, you can see
the main menu with 9 submenus (optional), which
allow you to select dierent functions and options.
By using the [] or [] buttons, you can select
the desire option, and then press M button to conrm
the selection.
To access at the main menu while you are inside
any of these submenus, press and hold MENU [M]
switch for a few seconds. (Short pressing the MENU
[M] switch usually opens the submenu option of each
submenus)
The available options are:
Music: Select this option to play song.
Movie: Select this option to play AMV video.
Record: Select this option to record voice
messages by the microphone inside.
Play: Select this option to play recorded voice
message.
Radio: Select this option to use the FM radio.
Text: Select this option to read text.
Games: Select this option to play game.
Picture: Select this option to browse and see
photos.
Setting: Select this option to access at system
setup.
3.1 Music Mode
The music player option allows playing songs. To
activate this option please follow here below
instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3
Player, the screen will display
the main menu
2. By using [] or []
buttons, select MUSIC PLAY
option then press [M] button.
3. Press PLAY []
button to start to play the
rst song available.
4. Press and hold M key to return to previous
menu.
3.1.1 Key Function at Music Mode
During the song play it is possible to activate the
following controls.
PLAY [Ź]: Press the play [] to start to play
a song. Press the play button again to pause the song.
To restart to play the song press play button again.
Hold the play button for longer time will
eventually turn o the player
REW & FFWD [] Press [] or [] to select the
previous or the next song.
Press and Hold the [] or [] buttons to rewind
or fast forward the song.
Volume (VOL+ and VOL-): Press [VOL+] button to
increase the volume and press [VOL-] button to
decrease the volume.
3.1.2 Music Mode
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
enter into each submenus. Press [] or [] to choose,
and then press MENU [M] key to conrm each
submenus. Use the same technique to navigate inside
each of the submenus.
In both modes (playing mode and stop mode)
you can nd the following submenus:
O Now playing
O All songs
O Album
O Artists
O Genre: Dance Music, Pop, Symphony,
Unknown Genre
O Local folder
O Create playlist
O Setting
- Repeat: Normal, Repeat one, Folder, Repeat
folder, Repeat all, Random, Intro
- Equalizer: Natural, Rock, Pop, Classic, Soft, Jazz,
DBB
- Tempo rate: ASS speed set, FFREV speed set
- Replay mode
- Bookmark: Bookmark select, Bookmark delete,
Bookmark add, Exit
O Delete le
O Delete all
3.2 Movie
The Movie MODE allows to play movies in AMV
Format. To activate this option please follow here
below
instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu.
2. By using [] or [] buttons,
select Movie option then press PLAY
[M] button.
3. Press PLAY [] button to
start to play the rst movie available.
Note:The Movie Player only
plays AMV les, you need conversion
from other le format in order to
watch the movie you like.
3.2.1 Key Function at Movie Mode
During the song play it is possible to activate the
following controls.
PLAY [Ź]: Press the PLAY [] to start to play
a movie. Press the play button again to pause the
movie. To restart to play the movie press play button
again.
Hold the play button for longer time will
eventually turn o the player
REW & FFWD [] Press [] or [] to select
the previous or the next movie.
Press and Hold the [] or [] buttons to rewind
or fast forward the movie.
Volume (VOL+ and VOL-): Press [VOL+] button to
increase the volume and press [VOL-] button to
decrease the volume.
3.2.2 AMV Submenu
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
nd the following AMV submenus. Press [] or []to
choose, and then press MENU [M] key to conrm each
submenus. Use the same technique to navigate inside
each of the submenus.
O Now playing
O Local Folder:
Under this directory, you can choose to go up a
folder level by pressing MENU [M] to conrm. And
then you can choose the folder you want to play
O Repeat
O Delete File:
Delete specic video you want.
O Delete All:
Delete all videos using this option.
3.3 Record (Voice messages recorder)
This option allows to record voice messages by
using the microphone inside. To record voice
message, please follow here below instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu.
2. By using [] or [] buttons, select RECORD
option then press PLAY [M] button.
3. Press PLAY [] button
to start to recording.
4. You can listen to your
wav le under the VOICE
submenu.
During recording, Press the
PLAY [] to start recording.
Press the play button again to
pause recording. Hold the PLAY
[] / M button for longer time will eventually stop
recording.
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
nd the LOCAL FOLDER and REC TYPE. Press [] or
[] to choose, and then press MENU [M] key to
conrm each submenus. Use the same technique to
navigate inside each of the submenus.
1. Under the LOCAL FOLDER submenu, you can
choose to go up a folder level by pressing [M] to
conrm. And then you can choose the folder you want
to play
2. Under the REC format submenu, you can
choose the recording format including
ACT/MP3/WAV/WMA .
3.4 Play (Voice Messages Player)
The play option allows to play the voice
messages recorded by the MP3 Player. To activate this
option, please follow here below instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu.
2. By using [] or [] buttons, select VOICE
option then press PLAY [M] button.
3. Press PLAY [] button to start to play the
rst recording available.
3.4.1 Key Function at PLAY
Mode
During the recording play it is
possible to activate the following
controls.
PLAY [Ź]: Press the PLAY
[] to start to play a recording.
Press the play button again to pause the recording. To
restart to play the recording press play button again.
Hold the play button for longer time will
eventually turn o the player
REW & FFWD [] Press [] or [] to select
the previous or the next recording.
Press and Hold the [] or [] buttons to rewind
or fast forward the recording.
Volume (VOL+ and VOL-): Press [VOL+] button to
increase the volume and press [VOL-] button to
decrease the volume.
3.4.2 PLAY Submenu
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
nd the following music submenus. Press [] and []
to choose, and then press MENU [M] key to conrm
each submenus. Use the same technique to navigate
inside each of the submenus.
O Local Folder:
Under this directory, you can choose to go up a
folder level by pressing MENU [M] to conrm. And
then you can choose the folder you want to play
O Setting:
- Repeat: Normal, Repeat one, Folfer, Repeat
folder, Repeat all, Random, Intro
- Tempo rate: You can alter the Tempo Rate of the
Song.
- Replay
O Delete File:
Delete specic voice le you want.
O Delete All:
Delete all voice les using this option.
3.5 FM (FM Radio)
When the FM Radio mode is activated it is
possible to hear radio programs.
This option allows us to enjoy FM radio
programs. To use it, please follow here below
instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu
2. By using [] or [] buttons, select FM option
then press [M] button to conrm.
3. If there are preset channels, press PLAY []
button to play the rst channel, press again for the
next channel.
3.5.1 FM Submenu
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
nd the following FM submenus. Press [] and [] to
choose, and then press MENU [M]key to conrm each
submenus. Use the same technique to navigate inside
each of the submenus.
Here below you will nd the FM radio option list.
SAVE: Select this option to save radio channels
DELETE: Select this option to delete radio
channels.
DELETE ALL: Select this option to delete all radio
channels.
AUTO SEARCH: Select this option to start
auto-searching for radio channels.
NORMAL BAND: Select this option to activate
normal FM band.
3.5.2 Automatic Search
To scan automatically all
the available channels, please
follow here below instruction:
1. When the FM Mode is
activated, press MENU [M]
button to select AUTO SEARCH option.
2. Press [M] button to start the automatic search.
The MP3 Player will store the rst 20 radio programs
available.
3.5.3 Manual Search and Storing Channels
To scan manually the frequencies please follow
here below instruction:
1. When the FM Mode is activated, long pressing
the [] or [] buttons to start auto scanning.
Scanning stops as an available channel is found.
2. By short pressing the [] or [] buttons to
step-up scanning.
3. Press MENU [M] button to select SAVE option.
4. Press PLAY [] and this specic channel will
be saved as the last channel
5. Repeat the step from 1 to 4 for each desired
radio program by keeping in mind that the MP3 Player
has 20 memory positions.
3.5.4 FM Radio Record (REC)
To record FM radio program please follow here
below instruction:
1. When the FM Radio Mode is activated, press
MENU [M] button to select FINE REC option.
2. Press PLAY [] button to start the recording.
3. Press PLAY [] button to pause the
recording and press it again to restart the recording.
4. To stop and save the recording, long press [M]
button, will return to FM mode.
3.6 E-BooK
The Ebook option allows reading text le. To
activate this option please follow here below
instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu.
2. By using the [] or [] buttons select E-book,
and then press [M] button to conrm
3. Use [] or [] buttons to choose the le
4. Press PLAY [] button to start reading the
le
3.6.1 E-Book Submenu
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
nd the following music submenus. Press [] or []
to choose, and then press [M] key to conrm each
submenus. Use the same technique to navigate inside
each of the submenus.
Before you open any le, if you press M, it will
appears the following submenu:
O Local Folder:
Under this directory, you
can choose to go up a folder
level by pressing MENU [M] to
conrm. And then you can
choose to folder you want to
play
O Play Set:
You can choose between manual play and auto
play. For auto play, you can set the playing time from 1
to 10 seconds for each page of the E-book.
O Delete File:
Delete specic text le you want.
O Delete All:
Delete all text les using this option.
While reading, if you press and hold M, you can
select from:
- Bookmark select
- Bookmark delete
- Bookmark add
3.7 PHOTO
The Photo option allows browsing JPG le. To
activate this option please follow here below
instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu.
2. By using the [] or [] buttons select PHOTO,
and then press [M] button to conrm
3. Use [] or [] buttons to choose the le
4. Press PLAY [] button to start browsing the le
3.7.1 PHOTO Submenu
B
y short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
nd the following music submenus. Press [] or []
to choose, and then press [M] key to conrm each
submenus. Use the same technique to navigate inside
each of the submenus.
O Local Folder:
Under this directory, you can
choose to go up a folder level by
pressing PLAY [] to conrm.
And then you can choose to
folder you want to play
O Play Set:
You can choose between manual play and auto
play. For auto play, you can set the playing time from 1
to 10 seconds for each picture.
O Delete File:
Delete specic photo le you want.
O Delete All:
Delete all Photos using this option.
3.8 GAMES
The GAMES option allows playing games. To
activate this option please follow here below
instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu.
2. By using the [] or [] buttons to select
GAMES, and then press [M] button to enter the GAME
MENU.
Inside the game menu, there is one game for
you to use Russia Brick .and then press [M] button to
conrm
3.9 Setting
The SETTING option allows to access to MP3
Player setup system. To access at system setup please
follow here below instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 player, button, the screen
will display the main menu.
2. By using the [] or [] select SYSTEM option
then press [M] button to enter the SYSTEM MENU.
3. By using the [] or [] select the system
setup parameter and press MENU [M] button.
The parameters available in the setup system are:
Clock: This option allows setting of the system
date and time.
LCD set: This option allows setting the brightness,
darkly and black screen of the LCD panel.
Language: This option allows setting the
Language of the User Interface.
Power O: This option allows setting the o time
and sleep time.
Replay mode:
Online mode:
Memory Info: This option allows checking the
memory usage.
Firmware Ver: This
option allows checking the
rmware version.
Firmware Upg: This
option allows to upgrade the
rmware.
3.9.1 Clock
This option allows
setting of the system date
and time. The upper case display the date in Year :
Month : Day Format, and the lower case display the
Time in Hour : Minute : Second format. To change the
Date and time, please follow here below instruction:
1. Under the SYSTEM MENU, choose SYSTEM TIME
by pressing [] or [] and press [M] to conrm
2. Press [VOL+] and [VOL-] to choose the
parameter you want to adjust
3. press [] or [] to change the value. Press
MENU [M] to conrm.
3.9.2 Power O Set
This option allows setting the o time and sleep
time. By setting O Time, it is possible to enable (30s,
60s, 90s and 120s) or disable the power management
features to automatically shut down your player if it is
not used. By setting Sleep Time, it is possible to set
power o the unit after a specied time (30s, 60s, 90s,
120s) from the moment you conrm about this
selection.
To modify this parameter please follow here
below instruction:
1. Under the SYSTEM MENU, choose POWER OFF
by pressing [] or [] and press PLAY [].
2. By using the [] or [] buttons, select OFF
TIME or SLEEP TIME and press [M] button.
3. Choose the desired OFF TIME or SLEEP TIME
and press [M] to conrm.
Memory info
The gure presents the total volume of the disc,
the percentage present the percentage between used
space and total space.
Specication
Notice: You will not informed if the production design
and the specication.
5
3. Main Menu
After powering on the MP3 player, you can see
the main menu with 9 submenus (optional), which
allow you to select dierent functions and options.
By using the [] or [] buttons, you can select
the desire option, and then press M button to conrm
the selection.
To access at the main menu while you are inside
any of these submenus, press and hold MENU [M]
switch for a few seconds. (Short pressing the MENU
[M] switch usually opens the submenu option of each
submenus)
The available options are:
Music: Select this option to play song.
Movie: Select this option to play AMV video.
Record: Select this option to record voice
messages by the microphone inside.
Play: Select this option to play recorded voice
message.
Radio: Select this option to use the FM radio.
Text: Select this option to read text.
Games: Select this option to play game.
Picture: Select this option to browse and see
photos.
Setting: Select this option to access at system
setup.
3.1 Music Mode
The music player option allows playing songs. To
activate this option please follow here below
instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3
Player, the screen will display
the main menu
2. By using [] or []
buttons, select MUSIC PLAY
option then press [M] button.
3. Press PLAY []
button to start to play the
rst song available.
4. Press and hold M key to return to previous
menu.
3.1.1 Key Function at Music Mode
During the song play it is possible to activate the
following controls.
PLAY [Ź]: Press the play [] to start to play
a song. Press the play button again to pause the song.
To restart to play the song press play button again.
Hold the play button for longer time will
eventually turn o the player
REW & FFWD [] Press [] or [] to select the
previous or the next song.
Press and Hold the [] or [] buttons to rewind
or fast forward the song.
Volume (VOL+ and VOL-): Press [VOL+] button to
increase the volume and press [VOL-] button to
decrease the volume.
3.1.2 Music Mode
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
enter into each submenus. Press [] or [] to choose,
and then press MENU [M] key to conrm each
submenus. Use the same technique to navigate inside
each of the submenus.
In both modes (playing mode and stop mode)
you can nd the following submenus:
O Now playing
O All songs
O Album
O Artists
O Genre: Dance Music, Pop, Symphony,
Unknown Genre
O Local folder
O Create playlist
O Setting
- Repeat: Normal, Repeat one, Folder, Repeat
folder, Repeat all, Random, Intro
- Equalizer: Natural, Rock, Pop, Classic, Soft, Jazz,
DBB
- Tempo rate: ASS speed set, FFREV speed set
- Replay mode
- Bookmark: Bookmark select, Bookmark delete,
Bookmark add, Exit
O Delete le
O Delete all
3.2 Movie
The Movie MODE allows to play movies in AMV
Format. To activate this option please follow here
below
instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu.
2. By using [] or [] buttons,
select Movie option then press PLAY
[M] button.
3. Press PLAY [] button to
start to play the rst movie available.
Note:The Movie Player only
plays AMV les, you need conversion
from other le format in order to
watch the movie you like.
3.2.1 Key Function at Movie Mode
During the song play it is possible to activate the
following controls.
PLAY [Ź]: Press the PLAY [] to start to play
a movie. Press the play button again to pause the
movie. To restart to play the movie press play button
again.
Hold the play button for longer time will
eventually turn o the player
REW & FFWD [] Press [] or [] to select
the previous or the next movie.
Press and Hold the [] or [] buttons to rewind
or fast forward the movie.
Volume (VOL+ and VOL-): Press [VOL+] button to
increase the volume and press [VOL-] button to
decrease the volume.
3.2.2 AMV Submenu
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
nd the following AMV submenus. Press [] or []to
choose, and then press MENU [M] key to conrm each
submenus. Use the same technique to navigate inside
each of the submenus.
O Now playing
O Local Folder:
Under this directory, you can choose to go up a
folder level by pressing MENU [M] to conrm. And
then you can choose the folder you want to play
O Repeat
O Delete File:
Delete specic video you want.
O Delete All:
Delete all videos using this option.
3.3 Record (Voice messages recorder)
This option allows to record voice messages by
using the microphone inside. To record voice
message, please follow here below instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu.
2. By using [] or [] buttons, select RECORD
option then press PLAY [M] button.
3. Press PLAY [] button
to start to recording.
4. You can listen to your
wav le under the VOICE
submenu.
During recording, Press the
PLAY [] to start recording.
Press the play button again to
pause recording. Hold the PLAY
[] / M button for longer time will eventually stop
recording.
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
nd the LOCAL FOLDER and REC TYPE. Press [] or
[] to choose, and then press MENU [M] key to
conrm each submenus. Use the same technique to
navigate inside each of the submenus.
1. Under the LOCAL FOLDER submenu, you can
choose to go up a folder level by pressing [M] to
conrm. And then you can choose the folder you want
to play
2. Under the REC format submenu, you can
choose the recording format including
ACT/MP3/WAV/WMA .
3.4 Play (Voice Messages Player)
The play option allows to play the voice
messages recorded by the MP3 Player. To activate this
option, please follow here below instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu.
2. By using [] or [] buttons, select VOICE
option then press PLAY [M] button.
3. Press PLAY [] button to start to play the
rst recording available.
3.4.1 Key Function at PLAY
Mode
During the recording play it is
possible to activate the following
controls.
PLAY [Ź]: Press the PLAY
[] to start to play a recording.
Press the play button again to pause the recording. To
restart to play the recording press play button again.
Hold the play button for longer time will
eventually turn o the player
REW & FFWD [] Press [] or [] to select
the previous or the next recording.
Press and Hold the [] or [] buttons to rewind
or fast forward the recording.
Volume (VOL+ and VOL-): Press [VOL+] button to
increase the volume and press [VOL-] button to
decrease the volume.
3.4.2 PLAY Submenu
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
nd the following music submenus. Press [] and []
to choose, and then press MENU [M] key to conrm
each submenus. Use the same technique to navigate
inside each of the submenus.
O Local Folder:
Under this directory, you can choose to go up a
folder level by pressing MENU [M] to conrm. And
then you can choose the folder you want to play
O Setting:
- Repeat: Normal, Repeat one, Folfer, Repeat
folder, Repeat all, Random, Intro
- Tempo rate: You can alter the Tempo Rate of the
Song.
- Replay
O Delete File:
Delete specic voice le you want.
O Delete All:
Delete all voice les using this option.
3.5 FM (FM Radio)
When the FM Radio mode is activated it is
possible to hear radio programs.
This option allows us to enjoy FM radio
programs. To use it, please follow here below
instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu
2. By using [] or [] buttons, select FM option
then press [M] button to conrm.
3. If there are preset channels, press PLAY []
button to play the rst channel, press again for the
next channel.
3.5.1 FM Submenu
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
nd the following FM submenus. Press [] and [] to
choose, and then press MENU [M]key to conrm each
submenus. Use the same technique to navigate inside
each of the submenus.
Here below you will nd the FM radio option list.
SAVE: Select this option to save radio channels
DELETE: Select this option to delete radio
channels.
DELETE ALL: Select this option to delete all radio
channels.
AUTO SEARCH: Select this option to start
auto-searching for radio channels.
NORMAL BAND: Select this option to activate
normal FM band.
3.5.2 Automatic Search
To scan automatically all
the available channels, please
follow here below instruction:
1. When the FM Mode is
activated, press MENU [M]
button to select AUTO SEARCH option.
2. Press [M] button to start the automatic search.
The MP3 Player will store the rst 20 radio programs
available.
3.5.3 Manual Search and Storing Channels
To scan manually the frequencies please follow
here below instruction:
1. When the FM Mode is activated, long pressing
the [] or [] buttons to start auto scanning.
Scanning stops as an available channel is found.
2. By short pressing the [] or [] buttons to
step-up scanning.
3. Press MENU [M] button to select SAVE option.
4. Press PLAY [] and this specic channel will
be saved as the last channel
5. Repeat the step from 1 to 4 for each desired
radio program by keeping in mind that the MP3 Player
has 20 memory positions.
3.5.4 FM Radio Record (REC)
To record FM radio program please follow here
below instruction:
1. When the FM Radio Mode is activated, press
MENU [M] button to select FINE REC option.
2. Press PLAY [] button to start the recording.
3. Press PLAY [] button to pause the
recording and press it again to restart the recording.
4. To stop and save the recording, long press [M]
button, will return to FM mode.
3.6 E-BooK
The Ebook option allows reading text le. To
activate this option please follow here below
instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu.
2. By using the [] or [] buttons select E-book,
and then press [M] button to conrm
3. Use [] or [] buttons to choose the le
4. Press PLAY [] button to start reading the
le
3.6.1 E-Book Submenu
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
nd the following music submenus. Press [] or []
to choose, and then press [M] key to conrm each
submenus. Use the same technique to navigate inside
each of the submenus.
Before you open any le, if you press M, it will
appears the following submenu:
O Local Folder:
Under this directory, you
can choose to go up a folder
level by pressing MENU [M] to
conrm. And then you can
choose to folder you want to
play
O Play Set:
You can choose between manual play and auto
play. For auto play, you can set the playing time from 1
to 10 seconds for each page of the E-book.
O Delete File:
Delete specic text le you want.
O Delete All:
Delete all text les using this option.
While reading, if you press and hold M, you can
select from:
- Bookmark select
- Bookmark delete
- Bookmark add
3.7 PHOTO
The Photo option allows browsing JPG le. To
activate this option please follow here below
instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu.
2. By using the [] or [] buttons select PHOTO,
and then press [M] button to conrm
3. Use [] or [] buttons to choose the le
4. Press PLAY [] button to start browsing the le
3.7.1 PHOTO Submenu
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
nd the following music submenus. Press [] or []
to choose, and then press [M] key to conrm each
submenus. Use the same technique to navigate inside
each of the submenus.
O Local Folder:
Under this directory, you can
choose to go up a folder level by
pressing PLAY [] to conrm.
And then you can choose to
folder you want to play
O Play Set:
You can choose between manual play and auto
play. For auto play, you can set the playing time from 1
to 10 seconds for each picture.
O Delete File:
Delete specic photo le you want.
O Delete All:
Delete all Photos using this option.
3.8 GAMES
The GAMES option allows playing games. To
activate this option please follow here below
instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
displa
y the main menu.
2. By using the [] or [] buttons to select
GAMES, and then press [M] button to enter the GAME
MENU.
Inside the game menu, there is one game for
you to use Russia Brick .and then press [M] button to
conrm
3.9 Setting
The SETTING option allows to access to MP3
Player setup system. To access at system setup please
follow here below instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 player, button, the screen
will display the main menu.
2. By using the [] or [] select SYSTEM option
then press [M] button to enter the SYSTEM MENU.
3. By using the [] or [] select the system
setup parameter and press MENU [M] button.
The parameters available in the setup system are:
Clock: This option allows setting of the system
date and time.
LCD set: This option allows setting the brightness,
darkly and black screen of the LCD panel.
Language: This option allows setting the
Language of the User Interface.
Power O: This option allows setting the o time
and sleep time.
Replay mode:
Online mode:
Memory Info: This option allows checking the
memory usage.
Firmware Ver: This
option allows checking the
rmware version.
Firmware Upg: This
option allows to upgrade the
rmware.
3.9.1 Clock
This option allows
setting of the system date
and time. The upper case display the date in Year :
Month : Day Format, and the lower case display the
Time in Hour : Minute : Second format. To change the
Date and time, please follow here below instruction:
1. Under the SYSTEM MENU, choose SYSTEM TIME
by pressing [] or [] and press [M] to conrm
2. Press [VOL+] and [VOL-] to choose the
parameter you want to adjust
3. press [] or [] to change the value. Press
MENU [M] to conrm.
3.9.2 Power O Set
This option allows setting the o time and sleep
time. By setting O Time, it is possible to enable (30s,
60s, 90s and 120s) or disable the power management
features to automatically shut down your player if it is
not used. By setting Sleep Time, it is possible to set
power o the unit after a specied time (30s, 60s, 90s,
120s) from the moment you conrm about this
selection.
To modify this parameter please follow here
below instruction:
1. Under the SYSTEM MENU, choose POWER OFF
by pressing [] or [] and press PLAY [].
2. By using the [] or [] buttons, select OFF
TIME or SLEEP TIME and press [M] button.
3. Choose the desired OFF TIME or SLEEP TIME
and press [M] to conrm.
Memory info
The gure presents the total volume of the disc,
the percentage present the percentage between used
space and total space.
Specication
Notice: You will not informed if the production design
and the specication.
6
3. Main Menu
After powering on the MP3 player, you can see
the main menu with 9 submenus (optional), which
allow you to select dierent functions and options.
By using the [] or [] buttons, you can select
the desire option, and then press M button to conrm
the selection.
To access at the main menu while you are inside
any of these submenus, press and hold MENU [M]
switch for a few seconds. (Short pressing the MENU
[M] switch usually opens the submenu option of each
submenus)
The available options are:
Music: Select this option to play song.
Movie: Select this option to play AMV video.
Record: Select this option to record voice
messages by the microphone inside.
Play: Select this option to play recorded voice
message.
Radio: Select this option to use the FM radio.
Text: Select this option to read text.
Games: Select this option to play game.
Picture: Select this option to browse and see
photos.
Setting: Select this option to access at system
setup.
3.1 Music Mode
The music player option allows playing songs. To
activate this option please follow here below
instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3
Player, the screen will display
the main menu
2. By using [] or []
buttons, select MUSIC PLAY
option then press [M] button.
3. Press PLAY []
button to start to play the
rst song available.
4. Press and hold M key to return to previous
menu.
3.1.1 Key Function at Music Mode
During the song play it is possible to activate the
following controls.
PLAY [Ź]: Press the play [] to start to play
a song. Press the play button again to pause the song.
To restart to play the song press play button again.
Hold the play button for longer time will
eventually turn o the player
REW & FFWD [] Press [] or [] to select the
previous or the next song.
Press and Hold the [] or [] buttons to rewind
or fast forward the song.
Volume (VOL+ and VOL-): Press [VOL+] button to
increase the volume and press [VOL-] button to
decrease the volume.
3.1.2 Music Mode
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
enter into each submenus. Press [] or [] to choose,
and then press MENU [M] key to conrm each
submenus. Use the same technique to navigate inside
each of the submenus.
In both modes (playing mode and stop mode)
you can nd the following submenus:
O Now playing
O All songs
O Album
O Artists
O Genre: Dance Music, Pop, Symphony,
Unknown Genre
O Local folder
O Create playlist
O Setting
- Repeat: Normal, Repeat one, Folder, Repeat
folder, Repeat all, Random, Intro
- Equalizer: Natural, Rock, Pop, Classic, Soft, Jazz,
DBB
- Tempo rate: ASS speed set, FFREV speed set
- Replay mode
- Bookmark: Bookmark select, Bookmark delete,
Bookmark add, Exit
O Delete le
O Delete all
3.2 Movie
The Movie MODE allows to play movies in AMV
Format. To activate this option please follow here
below
instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu.
2. By using [] or [] buttons,
select Movie option then press PLAY
[M] button.
3. Press PLAY [] button to
start to play the rst movie available.
Note:The Movie Player only
plays AMV les, you need conversion
from other le format in order to
watch the movie you like.
3.2.1 Key Function at Movie Mode
During the song play it is possible to activate the
following controls.
PLAY [Ź]: Press the PLAY [] to start to play
a movie. Press the play button again to pause the
movie. To restart to play the movie press play button
again.
Hold the play button for longer time will
eventually turn o the player
REW & FFWD [] Press [] or [] to select
the previous or the next movie.
Press and Hold the [] or [] buttons to rewind
or fast forward the movie.
Volume (VOL+ and VOL-): Press [VOL+] button to
increase the volume and press [VOL-] button to
decrease the volume.
3.2.2 AMV Submenu
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
nd the following AMV submenus. Press [] or []to
choose, and then press MENU [M] key to conrm each
submenus. Use the same technique to navigate inside
each of the submenus.
O Now playing
O Local Folder:
Under this directory, you can choose to go up a
folder level by pressing MENU [M] to conrm. And
then you can choose the folder you want to play
O Repeat
O Delete File:
Delete specic video you want.
O Delete All:
Delete all videos using this option.
3.3 Record (Voice messages recorder)
This option allows to record voice messages by
using the microphone inside. To record voice
message, please follow here below instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu.
2. By using [] or [] buttons, select RECORD
option then press PLAY [M] button.
3. Press PLAY [] button
to start to recording.
4. You can listen to your
wav le under the VOICE
submenu.
During recording, Press the
PLAY [] to start recording.
Press the play button again to
pause recording. Hold the PLAY
[] / M button for longer time will eventually stop
recording.
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
nd the LOCAL FOLDER and REC TYPE. Press [] or
[] to choose, and then press MENU [M] key to
conrm each submenus. Use the same technique to
navigate inside each of the submenus.
1. Under the LOCAL FOLDER submenu, you can
choose to go up a folder level by pressing [M] to
conrm. And then you can choose the folder you want
to play
2. Under the REC format submenu, you can
choose the recording format including
ACT/MP3/WAV/WMA .
3.4 Play (Voice Messages Player)
The play option allows to play the voice
messages recorded by the MP3 Player. To activate this
option, please follow here below instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu.
2. By using [] or [] buttons, select VOICE
option then press PLAY [M] button.
3. Press PLAY [] button to start to play the
rst recording available.
3.4.1 Key Function at PLAY
Mode
During the recording play it is
possible to activate the following
controls.
PLAY [Ź]: Press the PLAY
[] to start to play a recording.
Press the play button again to pause the recording. To
restart to play the recording press play button again.
Hold the play button for longer time will
eventually turn o the player
REW & FFWD [] Press [] or [] to select
the previous or the next recording.
Press and Hold the [] or [] buttons to rewind
or fast forward the recording.
Volume (VOL+ and VOL-): Press [VOL+] button to
increase the volume and press [VOL-] button to
decrease the volume.
3.4.2 PLAY Submenu
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
nd the following music submenus. Press [] and []
to choose, and then press MENU [M] key to conrm
each submenus. Use the same technique to navigate
inside each of the submenus.
O Local Folder:
Under this directory, you can choose to go up a
folder level by pressing MENU [M] to conrm. And
then you can choose the folder you want to play
O Setting:
- Repeat: Normal, Repeat one, Folfer, Repeat
folder, Repeat all, Random, Intro
- Tempo rate: You can alter the Tempo Rate of the
Song.
- Replay
O Delete File:
Delete specic voice le you want.
O Delete All:
Delete all voice les using this option.
3.5 FM (FM Radio)
When the FM Radio mode is activated it is
possible to hear radio programs.
This option allows us to enjoy FM radio
programs. To use it, please follow here below
instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu
2. By using [] or [] buttons, select FM option
then press [M] button to conrm.
3. If there are preset channels, press PLAY []
button to play the rst channel, press again for the
next channel.
3.5.1 FM Submenu
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
nd the following FM submenus. Press [] and [] to
choose, and then press MENU [M]key to conrm each
submenus. Use the same technique to navigate inside
each of the submenus.
Here below you will nd the FM radio option list.
SAVE: Select this option to save radio channels
DELETE: Select this option to delete radio
channels.
DELETE ALL: Select this option to delete all radio
channels.
AUTO SEARCH: Select this option to start
auto-searching for radio channels.
NORMAL BAND: Select this option to activate
normal FM band.
3.5.2 Automatic Search
To scan automatically all
the available channels, please
follow here below instruction:
1. When the FM Mode is
activated, press MENU [M]
button to select AUTO SEARCH option.
2. Press [M] button to start the automatic search.
The MP3 Player will store the rst 20 radio programs
available.
3.5.3 Manual Search and Storing Channels
To scan manually the frequencies please follow
here below instruction:
1. When the FM Mode is activated, long pressing
the [] or [] buttons to start auto scanning.
Scanning stops as an available channel is found.
2. By short pressing the [] or [] buttons to
step-up scanning.
3. Press MENU [M] button to select SAVE option.
4. Press PLAY [] and this specic channel will
be saved as the last channel
5. Repeat the step from 1 to 4 for each desired
radio program by keeping in mind that the MP3 Player
has 20 memory positions.
3.5.4 FM Radio Record (REC)
To record FM radio program please follow here
below instruction:
1. When the FM Radio Mode is activated, press
MENU [M] button to select FINE REC option.
2. Press PLAY [] button to start the recording.
3. Press PLAY [] button to pause the
recording and press it again to restart the recording.
4. To stop and save the recording, long press [M]
button, will return to FM mode.
3.6 E-BooK
The Ebook option allows reading text le. To
activate this option please follow here below
instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu.
2. By using the [] or [] buttons select E-book,
and then press [M] button to conrm
3. Use [] or [] buttons to choose the le
4. Press PLAY [] button to start reading the
le
3.6.1 E-Book Submenu
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
nd the following music submenus. Press [] or []
to choose, and then press [M] key to conrm each
submenus. Use the same technique to navigate inside
each of the submenus.
Before you open any le, if you press M, it will
appears the following submenu:
O Local Folder:
Under this directory, you
can choose to go up a folder
level by pressing MENU [M] to
conrm. And then you can
choose to folder you want to
play
O Play Set:
You can choose between manual play and auto
play. For auto play, you can set the playing time from 1
to 10 seconds for each page of the E-book.
O Delete File:
Delete specic text le you want.
O Delete All:
Delete all text les using this option.
While reading, if you press and hold M, you can
select from:
- Bookmark select
- Bookmark delete
- Bookmark add
3.7 PHOTO
The Photo option allows browsing JPG le. To
activate this option please follow here below
instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu.
2. By using the [] or [] buttons select PHOTO,
and then press [M] button to conrm
3. Use [] or [] buttons to choose the le
4. Press PLAY [] button to start browsing the le
3.7.1 PHOTO Submenu
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
nd the following music submenus. Press [] or []
to choose, and then press [M] key to conrm each
submenus. Use the same technique to navigate inside
each of the submenus.
O Local Folder:
Under this directory, you can
choose to go up a folder level by
pressing PLAY [] to conrm.
And then you can choose to
folder you want to play
O Play Set:
You can choose between manual play and auto
play. For auto play, you can set the playing time from 1
to 10 seconds for each picture.
O Delete File:
Delete specic photo le you want.
O Delete All:
Delete all Photos using this option.
3.8 GAMES
The GAMES option allows playing games. To
activate this option please follow here below
instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu.
2. By using the [] or [] buttons to select
GAMES, and then press [M] button to enter the GAME
MENU.
Inside the game menu, there is one game for
you to use Russia Brick .and then press [M] button to
conrm
3.9 Setting
The SETTING option allows to access to MP3
Player setup system. To access at system setup please
follow here below instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 player, button, the screen
will display the main menu.
2. By using the [] or [] select SYSTEM option
then press [M] button to enter the SYSTEM MENU.
3. By using the [] or [] select the system
setup parameter and press MENU [M] button.
The parameters available in the setup system are:
Clock: This option allows setting of the system
date and time.
LCD set: This option allows setting the brightness,
darkly and black screen of the LCD panel.
Language: This option allows setting the
Language of the User Interface.
Power O: This option allows setting the o time
and sleep time.
Replay mode:
Online mode:
Memory Info: This option allows checking the
memory usage.
Firmware Ver: This
option allows checking the
r
mware version.
Firmware Upg: This
option allows to upgrade the
rmware.
3.9.1 Clock
This option allows
setting of the system date
and time. The upper case display the date in Year :
Month : Day Format, and the lower case display the
Time in Hour : Minute : Second format. To change the
Date and time, please follow here below instruction:
1. Under the SYSTEM MENU, choose SYSTEM TIME
by pressing [] or [] and press [M] to conrm
2. Press [VOL+] and [VOL-] to choose the
parameter you want to adjust
3. press [] or [] to change the value. Press
MENU [M] to conrm.
3.9.2 Power O Set
This option allows setting the o time and sleep
time. By setting O Time, it is possible to enable (30s,
60s, 90s and 120s) or disable the power management
features to automatically shut down your player if it is
not used. By setting Sleep Time, it is possible to set
power o the unit after a specied time (30s, 60s, 90s,
120s) from the moment you conrm about this
selection.
To modify this parameter please follow here
below instruction:
1. Under the SYSTEM MENU, choose POWER OFF
by pressing [] or [] and press PLAY [].
2. By using the [] or [] buttons, select OFF
TIME or SLEEP TIME and press [M] button.
3. Choose the desired OFF TIME or SLEEP TIME
and press [M] to conrm.
Memory info
The gure presents the total volume of the disc,
the percentage present the percentage between used
space and total space.
Specication
Notice: You will not informed if the production design
and the specication.
7
3. Main Menu
After powering on the MP3 player, you can see
the main menu with 9 submenus (optional), which
allow you to select dierent functions and options.
By using the [] or [] buttons, you can select
the desire option, and then press M button to conrm
the selection.
To access at the main menu while you are inside
any of these submenus, press and hold MENU [M]
switch for a few seconds. (Short pressing the MENU
[M] switch usually opens the submenu option of each
submenus)
The available options are:
Music: Select this option to play song.
Movie: Select this option to play AMV video.
Record: Select this option to record voice
messages by the microphone inside.
Play: Select this option to play recorded voice
message.
Radio: Select this option to use the FM radio.
Text: Select this option to read text.
Games: Select this option to play game.
Picture: Select this option to browse and see
photos.
Setting: Select this option to access at system
setup.
3.1 Music Mode
The music player option allows playing songs. To
activate this option please follow here below
instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3
Player, the screen will display
the main menu
2. By using [] or []
buttons, select MUSIC PLAY
option then press [M] button.
3. Press PLAY []
button to start to play the
rst song available.
4. Press and hold M key to return to previous
menu.
3.1.1 Key Function at Music Mode
During the song play it is possible to activate the
following controls.
PLAY [Ź]: Press the play [] to start to play
a song. Press the play button again to pause the song.
To restart to play the song press play button again.
Hold the play button for longer time will
eventually turn o the player
REW & FFWD [] Press [] or [] to select the
previous or the next song.
Press and Hold the [] or [] buttons to rewind
or fast forward the song.
Volume (VOL+ and VOL-): Press [VOL+] button to
increase the volume and press [VOL-] button to
decrease the volume.
3.1.2 Music Mode
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
enter into each submenus. Press [] or [] to choose,
and then press MENU [M] key to conrm each
submenus. Use the same technique to navigate inside
each of the submenus.
In both modes (playing mode and stop mode)
you can nd the following submenus:
O Now playing
O All songs
O Album
O Artists
O Genre: Dance Music, Pop, Symphony,
Unknown Genre
O Local folder
O Create playlist
O Setting
- Repeat: Normal, Repeat one, Folder, Repeat
folder, Repeat all, Random, Intro
- Equalizer: Natural, Rock, Pop, Classic, Soft, Jazz,
DBB
- Tempo rate: ASS speed set, FFREV speed set
- Replay mode
- Bookmark: Bookmark select, Bookmark delete,
Bookmark add, Exit
O Delete le
O Delete all
3.2 Movie
The Movie MODE allows to play movies in AMV
Format. To activate this option please follow here
below
instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu.
2. By using [] or [] buttons,
select Movie option then press PLAY
[M] button.
3. Press PLAY [] button to
start to play the rst movie available.
Note:The Movie Player only
plays AMV les, you need conversion
from other le format in order to
watch the movie you like.
3.2.1 Key Function at Movie Mode
During the song play it is possible to activate the
following controls.
PLAY [Ź]: Press the PLAY [] to start to play
a movie. Press the play button again to pause the
movie. To restart to play the movie press play button
again.
Hold the play button for longer time will
eventually turn o the player
REW & FFWD [] Press [] or [] to select
the previous or the next movie.
Press and Hold the [] or [] buttons to rewind
or fast forward the movie.
Volume (VOL+ and VOL-): Press [VOL+] button to
increase the volume and press [VOL-] button to
decrease the volume.
3.2.2 AMV Submenu
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
nd the following AMV submenus. Press [] or []to
choose, and then press MENU [M] key to conrm each
submenus. Use the same technique to navigate inside
each of the submenus.
O Now playing
O Local Folder:
Under this directory, you can choose to go up a
folder level by pressing MENU [M] to conrm. And
then you can choose the folder you want to play
O Repeat
O Delete File:
Delete specic video you want.
O Delete All:
Delete all videos using this option.
3.3 Record (Voice messages recorder)
This option allows to record voice messages by
using the microphone inside. To record voice
message, please follow here below instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu.
2. By using [] or [] buttons, select RECORD
option then press PLAY [M] button.
3. Press PLAY [] button
to start to recording.
4. You can listen to your
wav le under the VOICE
submenu.
During recording, Press the
PLAY [] to start recording.
Press the play button again to
pause recording. Hold the PLAY
[] / M button for longer time will eventually stop
recording.
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
nd the LOCAL FOLDER and REC TYPE. Press [] or
[] to choose, and then press MENU [M] key to
conrm each submenus. Use the same technique to
navigate inside each of the submenus.
1. Under the LOCAL FOLDER submenu, you can
choose to go up a folder level by pressing [M] to
conrm. And then you can choose the folder you want
to play
2. Under the REC format submenu, you can
choose the recording format including
ACT/MP3/WAV/WMA .
3.4 Play (Voice Messages Player)
The play option allows to play the voice
messages recorded by the MP3 Player. To activate this
option, please follow here below instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu.
2. By using [] or [] buttons, select VOICE
option then press PLAY [M] button.
3. Press PLAY [] button to start to play the
rst recording available.
3.4.1 Key Function at PLAY
Mode
During the recording play it is
possible to activate the following
controls.
PLAY [Ź]: Press the PLAY
[] to start to play a recording.
Press the play button again to pause the recording. To
restart to play the recording press play button again.
Hold the play button for longer time will
eventually turn o the player
REW & FFWD [] Press [] or [] to select
the previous or the next recording.
Press and Hold the [] or [] buttons to rewind
or fast forward the recording.
Volume (VOL+ and VOL-): Press [VOL+] button to
increase the volume and press [VOL-] button to
decrease the volume.
3.4.2 PLAY Submenu
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
nd the following music submenus. Press [] and []
to choose, and then press MENU [M] key to conrm
each submenus. Use the same technique to navigate
inside each of the submenus.
O Local Folder:
Under this directory, you can choose to go up a
folder level by pressing MENU [M] to conrm. And
then you can choose the folder you want to play
O Setting:
- Repeat: Normal, Repeat one, Folfer, Repeat
folder, Repeat all, Random, Intro
- Tempo rate: You can alter the Tempo Rate of the
Song.
- Replay
O Delete File:
Delete specic voice le you want.
O Delete All:
Delete all voice les using this option.
3.5 FM (FM Radio)
When the FM Radio mode is activated it is
possible to hear radio programs.
This option allows us to enjoy FM radio
programs. To use it, please follow here below
instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu
2. By using [] or [] buttons, select FM option
then press [M] button to conrm.
3. If there are preset channels, press PLAY []
button to play the rst channel, press again for the
next channel.
3.5.1 FM Submenu
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
nd the following FM submenus. Press [] and [] to
choose, and then press MENU [M]key to conrm each
submenus. Use the same technique to navigate inside
each of the submenus.
Here below you will nd the FM radio option list.
SAVE: Select this option to save radio channels
DELETE: Select this option to delete radio
channels.
DELETE ALL: Select this option to delete all radio
channels.
AUTO SEARCH: Select this option to start
auto-searching for radio channels.
NORMAL BAND: Select this option to activate
normal FM band.
3.5.2 Automatic Search
To scan automatically all
the available channels, please
follow here below instruction:
1. When the FM Mode is
activated, press MENU [M]
button to select AUTO SEARCH option.
2. Press [M] button to start the automatic search.
The MP3 Player will store the rst 20 radio programs
available.
3.5.3 Manual Search and Storing Channels
To scan manually the frequencies please follow
here below instruction:
1. When the FM Mode is activated, long pressing
the [] or [] buttons to start auto scanning.
Scanning stops as an available channel is found.
2. By short pressing the [] or [] buttons to
step-up scanning.
3. Press MENU [M] button to select SAVE option.
4. Press PLAY [] and this specic channel will
be saved as the last channel
5. Repeat the step from 1 to 4 for each desired
radio program by keeping in mind that the MP3 Player
has 20 memory positions.
3.5.4 FM Radio Record (REC)
To record FM radio program please follow here
below instruction:
1. When the FM Radio Mode is activated, press
MENU [M] button to select FINE REC option.
2. Press PLAY [] button to start the recording.
3. Press PLAY [] button to pause the
recording and press it again to restart the recording.
4. To stop and save the recording, long press [M]
button, will return to FM mode.
3.6 E-BooK
The Ebook option allows reading text le. To
activate this option please follow here below
instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu.
2. By using the [] or [] buttons select E-book,
and then press [M] button to conrm
3. Use [] or [] buttons to choose the le
4. Press PLAY [] button to start reading the
le
3.6.1 E-Book Submenu
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
nd the following music submenus. Press [] or []
to choose, and then press [M] key to conrm each
submenus. Use the same technique to navigate inside
each of the submenus.
Before you open any le, if you press M, it will
appears the following submenu:
O Local Folder:
Under this directory, you
can choose to go up a folder
level by pressing MENU [M] to
conrm. And then you can
choose to folder you want to
play
O Play Set:
You can choose between manual play and auto
play. For auto play, you can set the playing time from 1
to 10 seconds for each page of the E-book.
O Delete File:
Delete specic text le you want.
O Delete All:
Delete all text les using this option.
While reading, if you press and hold M, you can
select from:
- Bookmark select
- Bookmark delete
- Bookmark add
3.7 PHOTO
The Photo option allows browsing JPG le. To
activate this option please follow here below
instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu.
2. By using the [] or [] buttons select PHOTO,
and then press [M] button to conrm
3. Use [] or [] buttons to choose the le
4. Press PLAY [] button to start browsing the le
3.7.1 PHOTO Submenu
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
nd the following music submenus. Press [] or []
to choose, and then press [M] key to conrm each
submenus. Use the same technique to navigate inside
each of the submenus.
O Local Folder:
Under this directory, you can
choose to go up a folder level by
pressing PLAY [] to conrm.
And then you can choose to
folder you want to play
O Play Set:
You can choose between manual play and auto
play. For auto play, you can set the playing time from 1
to 10 seconds for each picture.
O Delete File:
Delete specic photo le you want.
O Delete All:
Delete all Photos using this option.
3.8 GAMES
The GAMES option allows playing games. To
activate this option please follow here below
instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu.
2. By using the [] or [] buttons to select
GAMES, and then press [M] button to enter the GAME
MENU.
Inside the game menu, there is one game for
you to use Russia Brick .and then press [M] button to
conrm
3.9 Setting
The SETTING option allows to access to MP3
Player setup system. To access at system setup please
follow here below instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 player, button, the screen
will display the main menu.
2. By using the [] or [] select SYSTEM option
then press [M] button to enter the SYSTEM MENU.
3. By using the [] or [] select the system
setup parameter and press MENU [M] button.
The parameters available in the setup system are:
Clock: This option allows setting of the system
date and time.
LCD set: This option allows setting the brightness,
darkly and black screen of the LCD panel.
Language: This option allows setting the
Language of the User Interface.
Power O: This option allows setting the o time
and sleep time.
Replay mode:
Online mode:
Memory Info: This option allows checking the
memory usage.
Firmware Ver: This
option allows checking the
rmware version.
Firmware Upg: This
option allows to upgrade the
rmware.
3.9.1 Clock
This option allows
setting of the system date
and time. The upper case display the date in Year :
Month : Day Format, and the lower case display the
Time in Hour : Minute : Second format. To change the
Date and time, please follow here below instruction:
1. Under the SYSTEM MENU, choose SYSTEM TIME
by pressing [] or [] and press [M] to conrm
2. Press [VOL+] and [VOL-] to choose the
parameter you want to adjust
3. press [] or [] to change the value. Press
MENU [M] to conrm.
3.9.2 Power O Set
This option allows setting the o time and sleep
time. By setting O Time, it is possible to enable (30s,
60s, 90s and 120s) or disable the power management
features to automatically shut down your player if it is
not used. By setting Sleep Time, it is possible to set
power o the unit after a specied time (30s, 60s, 90s,
120s) fr
om the moment you conrm about this
selection.
To modify this parameter please follow here
below instruction:
1. Under the SYSTEM MENU, choose POWER OFF
by pressing [] or [] and press PLAY [].
2. By using the [] or [] buttons, select OFF
TIME or SLEEP TIME and press [M] button.
3. Choose the desired OFF TIME or SLEEP TIME
and press [M] to conrm.
Memory info
The gure presents the total volume of the disc,
the percentage present the percentage between used
space and total space.
Specication
Notice: You will not informed if the production design
and the specication.
8
3. Main Menu
After powering on the MP3 player, you can see
the main menu with 9 submenus (optional), which
allow you to select dierent functions and options.
By using the [] or [] buttons, you can select
the desire option, and then press M button to conrm
the selection.
To access at the main menu while you are inside
any of these submenus, press and hold MENU [M]
switch for a few seconds. (Short pressing the MENU
[M] switch usually opens the submenu option of each
submenus)
The available options are:
Music: Select this option to play song.
Movie: Select this option to play AMV video.
Record: Select this option to record voice
messages by the microphone inside.
Play: Select this option to play recorded voice
message.
Radio: Select this option to use the FM radio.
Text: Select this option to read text.
Games: Select this option to play game.
Picture: Select this option to browse and see
photos.
Setting: Select this option to access at system
setup.
3.1 Music Mode
The music player option allows playing songs. To
activate this option please follow here below
instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3
Player, the screen will display
the main menu
2. By using [] or []
buttons, select MUSIC PLAY
option then press [M] button.
3. Press PLAY []
button to start to play the
rst song available.
4. Press and hold M key to return to previous
menu.
3.1.1 Key Function at Music Mode
During the song play it is possible to activate the
following controls.
PLAY [Ź]: Press the play [] to start to play
a song. Press the play button again to pause the song.
To restart to play the song press play button again.
Hold the play button for longer time will
eventually turn o the player
REW & FFWD [] Press [] or [] to select the
previous or the next song.
Press and Hold the [] or [] buttons to rewind
or fast forward the song.
Volume (VOL+ and VOL-): Press [VOL+] button to
increase the volume and press [VOL-] button to
decrease the volume.
3.1.2 Music Mode
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
enter into each submenus. Press [] or [] to choose,
and then press MENU [M] key to conrm each
submenus. Use the same technique to navigate inside
each of the submenus.
In both modes (playing mode and stop mode)
you can nd the following submenus:
O Now playing
O All songs
O Album
O Artists
O Genre: Dance Music, Pop, Symphony,
Unknown Genre
O Local folder
O Create playlist
O Setting
- Repeat: Normal, Repeat one, Folder, Repeat
folder, Repeat all, Random, Intro
- Equalizer: Natural, Rock, Pop, Classic, Soft, Jazz,
DBB
- Tempo rate: ASS speed set, FFREV speed set
- Replay mode
- Bookmark: Bookmark select, Bookmark delete,
Bookmark add, Exit
O Delete le
O Delete all
3.2 Movie
The Movie MODE allows to play movies in AMV
Format. To activate this option please follow here
below
instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu.
2. By using [] or [] buttons,
select Movie option then press PLAY
[M] button.
3. Press PLAY [] button to
start to play the rst movie available.
Note:The Movie Player only
plays AMV les, you need conversion
from other le format in order to
watch the movie you like.
3.2.1 Key Function at Movie Mode
During the song play it is possible to activate the
following controls.
PLAY [Ź]: Press the PLAY [] to start to play
a movie. Press the play button again to pause the
movie. To restart to play the movie press play button
again.
Hold the play button for longer time will
eventually turn o the player
REW & FFWD [] Press [] or [] to select
the previous or the next movie.
Press and Hold the [] or [] buttons to rewind
or fast forward the movie.
Volume (VOL+ and VOL-): Press [VOL+] button to
increase the volume and press [VOL-] button to
decrease the volume.
3.2.2 AMV Submenu
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
nd the following AMV submenus. Press [] or []to
choose, and then press MENU [M] key to conrm each
submenus. Use the same technique to navigate inside
each of the submenus.
O Now playing
O Local Folder:
Under this directory, you can choose to go up a
folder level by pressing MENU [M] to conrm. And
then you can choose the folder you want to play
O Repeat
O Delete File:
Delete specic video you want.
O Delete All:
Delete all videos using this option.
3.3 Record (Voice messages recorder)
This option allows to record voice messages by
using the microphone inside. To record voice
message, please follow here below instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu.
2. By using [] or [] buttons, select RECORD
option then press PLAY [M] button.
3. Press PLAY [] button
to start to recording.
4. You can listen to your
wav le under the VOICE
submenu.
During recording, Press the
PLAY [] to start recording.
Press the play button again to
pause recording. Hold the PLAY
[] / M button for longer time will eventually stop
recording.
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
nd the LOCAL FOLDER and REC TYPE. Press [] or
[] to choose, and then press MENU [M] key to
conrm each submenus. Use the same technique to
navigate inside each of the submenus.
1. Under the LOCAL FOLDER submenu, you can
choose to go up a folder level by pressing [M] to
conrm. And then you can choose the folder you want
to play
2. Under the REC format submenu, you can
choose the recording format including
ACT/MP3/WAV/WMA .
3.4 Play (Voice Messages Player)
The play option allows to play the voice
messages recorded by the MP3 Player. To activate this
option, please follow here below instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu.
2. By using [] or [] buttons, select VOICE
option then press PLAY [M] button.
3. Press PLAY [] button to start to play the
rst recording available.
3.4.1 Key Function at PLAY
Mode
During the recording play it is
possible to activate the following
controls.
PLAY [Ź]: Press the PLAY
[] to start to play a recording.
Press the play button again to pause the recording. To
restart to play the recording press play button again.
Hold the play button for longer time will
eventually turn o the player
REW & FFWD [] Press [] or [] to select
the previous or the next recording.
Press and Hold the [] or [] buttons to rewind
or fast forward the recording.
Volume (VOL+ and VOL-): Press [VOL+] button to
increase the volume and press [VOL-] button to
decrease the volume.
3.4.2 PLAY Submenu
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
nd the following music submenus. Press [] and []
to choose, and then press MENU [M] key to conrm
each submenus. Use the same technique to navigate
inside each of the submenus.
O Local Folder:
Under this directory, you can choose to go up a
folder level by pressing MENU [M] to conrm. And
then you can choose the folder you want to play
O Setting:
- Repeat: Normal, Repeat one, Folfer, Repeat
folder, Repeat all, Random, Intro
- Tempo rate: You can alter the Tempo Rate of the
Song.
- Replay
O Delete File:
Delete specic voice le you want.
O Delete All:
Delete all voice les using this option.
3.5 FM (FM Radio)
When the FM Radio mode is activated it is
possible to hear radio programs.
This option allows us to enjoy FM radio
programs. To use it, please follow here below
instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu
2. By using [] or [] buttons, select FM option
then press [M] button to conrm.
3. If there are preset channels, press PLAY []
button to play the rst channel, press again for the
next channel.
3.5.1 FM Submenu
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
nd the following FM submenus. Press [] and [] to
choose, and then press MENU [M]key to conrm each
submenus. Use the same technique to navigate inside
each of the submenus.
Here below you will nd the FM radio option list.
SAVE: Select this option to save radio channels
DELETE: Select this option to delete radio
channels.
DELETE ALL: Select this option to delete all radio
channels.
AUTO SEARCH: Select this option to start
auto-searching for radio channels.
NORMAL BAND: Select this option to activate
normal FM band.
3.5.2 Automatic Search
To scan automatically all
the available channels, please
follow here below instruction:
1. When the FM Mode is
activated, press MENU [M]
button to select AUTO SEARCH option.
2. Press [M] button to start the automatic search.
The MP3 Player will store the rst 20 radio programs
available.
3.5.3 Manual Search and Storing Channels
To scan manually the frequencies please follow
here below instruction:
1. When the FM Mode is activated, long pressing
the [] or [] buttons to start auto scanning.
Scanning stops as an available channel is found.
2. By short pressing the [] or [] buttons to
step-up scanning.
3. Press MENU [M] button to select SAVE option.
4. Press PLAY [] and this specic channel will
be saved as the last channel
5. Repeat the step from 1 to 4 for each desired
radio program by keeping in mind that the MP3 Player
has 20 memory positions.
3.5.4 FM Radio Record (REC)
To record FM radio program please follow here
below instruction:
1. When the FM Radio Mode is activated, press
MENU [M] button to select FINE REC option.
2. Press PLAY [] button to start the recording.
3. Press PLAY [] button to pause the
recording and press it again to restart the recording.
4. To stop and save the recording, long press [M]
button, will return to FM mode.
3.6 E-BooK
The Ebook option allows reading text le. To
activate this option please follow here below
instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu.
2. By using the [] or [] buttons select E-book,
and then press [M] button to conrm
3. Use [] or [] buttons to choose the le
4. Press PLAY [] button to start reading the
le
3.6.1 E-Book Submenu
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
nd the following music submenus. Press [] or []
to choose, and then press [M] key to conrm each
submenus. Use the same technique to navigate inside
each of the submenus.
Before you open any le, if you press M, it will
appears the following submenu:
O Local Folder:
Under this directory, you
can choose to go up a folder
level by pressing MENU [M] to
conrm. And then you can
choose to folder you want to
play
O Play Set:
You can choose between manual play and auto
play. For auto play, you can set the playing time from 1
to 10 seconds for each page of the E-book.
O Delete File:
Delete specic text le you want.
O Delete All:
Delete all text les using this option.
While reading, if you press and hold M, you can
select from:
- Bookmark select
- Bookmark delete
- Bookmark add
3.7 PHOTO
The Photo option allows browsing JPG le. To
activate this option please follow here below
instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu.
2. By using the [] or [] buttons select PHOTO,
and then press [M] button to conrm
3. Use [] or [] buttons to choose the le
4. Press PLAY [] button to start browsing the le
3.7.1 PHOTO Submenu
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
nd the following music submenus. Press [] or []
to choose, and then press [M] key to conrm each
submenus. Use the same technique to navigate inside
each of the submenus.
O Local Folder:
Under this directory, you can
choose to go up a folder level by
pressing PLAY [] to conrm.
And then you can choose to
folder you want to play
O Play Set:
You can choose between manual play and auto
play. For auto play, you can set the playing time from 1
to 10 seconds for each picture.
O Delete File:
Delete specic photo le you want.
O Delete All:
Delete all Photos using this option.
3.8 GAMES
The GAMES option allows playing games. To
activate this option please follow here below
instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu.
2. By using the [] or [] buttons to select
GAMES, and then press [M] button to enter the GAME
MENU.
Inside the game menu, there is one game for
you to use Russia Brick .and then press [M] button to
conrm
3.9 Setting
The SETTING option allows to access to MP3
Player setup system. To access at system setup please
follow here below instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 player, button, the screen
will display the main menu.
2. By using the [] or [] select SYSTEM option
then press [M] button to enter the SYSTEM MENU.
3. By using the [] or [] select the system
setup parameter and press MENU [M] button.
The parameters available in the setup system are:
Clock: This option allows setting of the system
date and time.
LCD set: This option allows setting the brightness,
darkly and black screen of the LCD panel.
Language: This option allows setting the
Language of the User Interface.
Power O: This option allows setting the o time
and sleep time.
Replay mode:
Online mode:
Memory Info: This option allows checking the
memory usage.
Firmware Ver: This
option allows checking the
rmware version.
Firmware Upg: This
option allows to upgrade the
rmware.
3.9.1 Clock
This option allows
setting of the system date
and time. The upper case display the date in Year :
Month : Day Format, and the lower case display the
Time in Hour : Minute : Second format. To change the
Date and time, please follow here below instruction:
1. Under the SYSTEM MENU, choose SYSTEM TIME
by pressing [] or [] and press [M] to conrm
2. Press [VOL+] and [VOL-] to choose the
parameter you want to adjust
3. press [] or [] to change the value. Press
MENU [M] to conrm.
3.9.2 Power O Set
This option allows setting the o time and sleep
time. By setting O Time, it is possible to enable (30s,
60s, 90s and 120s) or disable the power management
features to automatically shut down your player if it is
not used. By setting Sleep Time, it is possible to set
power o the unit after a specied time (30s, 60s, 90s,
120s) from the moment you conrm about this
selection.
To modify this parameter please follow here
below instruction:
1. Under the SYSTEM MENU, choose POWER OFF
by pressing [] or [] and press PLAY [].
2. By using the [] or [] buttons, select OFF
TIME or SLEEP TIME and press [M] button.
3. Choose the desired OFF TIME or SLEEP TIME
and press [M] to conrm.
Memory info
The gure presents the total volume of the disc,
the percentage present the percentage between used
space and total space.
Specication
Notice: You will not informed if the production design
and the specication.
9
3. Main Menu
After powering on the MP3 player, you can see
the main menu with 9 submenus (optional), which
allow you to select dierent functions and options.
By using the [] or [] buttons, you can select
the desire option, and then press M button to conrm
the selection.
To access at the main menu while you are inside
any of these submenus, press and hold MENU [M]
switch for a few seconds. (Short pressing the MENU
[M] switch usually opens the submenu option of each
submenus)
The available options are:
Music: Select this option to play song.
Movie: Select this option to play AMV video.
Record: Select this option to record voice
messages by the microphone inside.
Play: Select this option to play recorded voice
message.
Radio: Select this option to use the FM radio.
Text: Select this option to read text.
Games: Select this option to play game.
Picture: Select this option to browse and see
photos.
Setting: Select this option to access at system
setup.
3.1 Music Mode
The music player option allows playing songs. To
activate this option please follow here below
instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3
Player, the screen will display
the main menu
2. By using [] or []
buttons, select MUSIC PLAY
option then press [M] button.
3. Press PLAY []
button to start to play the
rst song available.
4. Press and hold M key to return to previous
menu.
3.1.1 Key Function at Music Mode
During the song play it is possible to activate the
following controls.
PLAY [Ź]: Press the play [] to start to play
a song. Press the play button again to pause the song.
To restart to play the song press play button again.
Hold the play button for longer time will
eventually turn o the player
REW & FFWD [] Press [] or [] to select the
previous or the next song.
Press and Hold the [] or [] buttons to rewind
or fast forward the song.
Volume (VOL+ and VOL-): Press [VOL+] button to
increase the volume and press [VOL-] button to
decrease the volume.
3.1.2 Music Mode
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
enter into each submenus. Press [] or [] to choose,
and then press MENU [M] key to conrm each
submenus. Use the same technique to navigate inside
each of the submenus.
In both modes (playing mode and stop mode)
you can nd the following submenus:
O Now playing
O All songs
O Album
O Artists
O Genre: Dance Music, Pop, Symphony,
Unknown Genre
O Local folder
O Create playlist
O Setting
- Repeat: Normal, Repeat one, Folder, Repeat
folder, Repeat all, Random, Intro
- Equalizer: Natural, Rock, Pop, Classic, Soft, Jazz,
DBB
- Tempo rate: ASS speed set, FFREV speed set
- Replay mode
- Bookmark: Bookmark select, Bookmark delete,
Bookmark add, Exit
O Delete le
O Delete all
3.2 Movie
The Movie MODE allows to play movies in AMV
Format. To activate this option please follow here
below
instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu.
2. By using [] or [] buttons,
select Movie option then press PLAY
[M] button.
3. Press PLAY [] button to
start to play the rst movie available.
Note:The Movie Player only
plays AMV les, you need conversion
from other le format in order to
watch the movie you like.
3.2.1 Key Function at Movie Mode
During the song play it is possible to activate the
following controls.
PLAY [Ź]: Press the PLAY [] to start to play
a movie. Press the play button again to pause the
movie. To restart to play the movie press play button
again.
Hold the play button for longer time will
eventually turn o the player
REW & FFWD [] Press [] or [] to select
the previous or the next movie.
Press and Hold the [] or [] buttons to rewind
or fast forward the movie.
Volume (VOL+ and VOL-): Press [VOL+] button to
increase the volume and press [VOL-] button to
decrease the volume.
3.2.2 AMV Submenu
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
nd the following AMV submenus. Press [] or []to
choose, and then press MENU [M] key to conrm each
submenus. Use the same technique to navigate inside
each of the submenus.
O Now playing
O Local Folder:
Under this directory, you can choose to go up a
folder level by pressing MENU [M] to conrm. And
then you can choose the folder you want to play
O Repeat
O Delete File:
Delete specic video you want.
O Delete All:
Delete all videos using this option.
3.3 Record (Voice messages recorder)
This option allows to record voice messages by
using the microphone inside. To record voice
message, please follow here below instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu.
2. By using [] or [] buttons, select RECORD
option then press PLAY [M] button.
3. Press PLAY [] button
to start to recording.
4. You can listen to your
wav le under the VOICE
submenu.
During recording, Press the
PLAY [] to start recording.
Press the play button again to
pause recording. Hold the PLAY
[] / M button for longer time will eventually stop
recording.
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
nd the LOCAL FOLDER and REC TYPE. Press [] or
[] to choose, and then press MENU [M] key to
conrm each submenus. Use the same technique to
navigate inside each of the submenus.
1. Under the LOCAL FOLDER submenu, you can
choose to go up a folder level by pressing [M] to
conrm. And then you can choose the folder you want
to play
2. Under the REC format submenu, you can
choose the recording format including
ACT/MP3/WAV/WMA .
3.4 Play (Voice Messages Player)
The play option allows to play the voice
messages recorded by the MP3 Player. To activate this
option, please follow here below instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu.
2. By using [] or [] buttons, select VOICE
option then press PLAY [M] button.
3. Press PLAY [] button to start to play the
rst recording available.
3.4.1 Key Function at PLAY
Mode
During the recording play it is
possible to activate the following
controls.
PLAY [Ź]: Press the PLAY
[] to start to play a recording.
Press the play button again to pause the recording. To
restart to play the recording press play button again.
Hold the play button for longer time will
eventually turn o the player
REW & FFWD [] Press [] or [] to select
the previous or the next recording.
Press and Hold the [] or [] buttons to rewind
or fast forward the recording.
Volume (VOL+ and VOL-): Press [VOL+] button to
increase the volume and press [VOL-] button to
decrease the volume.
3.4.2 PLAY Submenu
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
nd the following music submenus. Press [] and []
to choose, and then press MENU [M] key to conrm
each submenus. Use the same technique to navigate
inside each of the submenus.
O Local Folder:
Under this directory, you can choose to go up a
folder level by pressing MENU [M] to conrm. And
then you can choose the folder you want to play
O Setting:
- Repeat: Normal, Repeat one, Folfer, Repeat
folder, Repeat all, Random, Intro
- Tempo rate: You can alter the Tempo Rate of the
Song.
- Replay
O Delete File:
Delete specic voice le you want.
O Delete All:
Delete all voice les using this option.
3.5 FM (FM Radio)
When the FM Radio mode is activated it is
possible to hear radio programs.
This option allows us to enjoy FM radio
programs. To use it, please follow here below
instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu
2. By using [] or [] buttons, select FM option
then press [M] button to conrm.
3. If there are preset channels, press PLAY []
button to play the rst channel, press again for the
next channel.
3.5.1 FM Submenu
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
nd the following FM submenus. Press [] and [] to
choose, and then press MENU [M]key to conrm each
submenus. Use the same technique to navigate inside
each of the submenus.
Here below you will nd the FM radio option list.
SAVE: Select this option to save radio channels
DELETE: Select this option to delete radio
channels.
DELETE ALL: Select this option to delete all radio
channels.
AUTO SEARCH: Select this option to start
auto-searching for radio channels.
NORMAL BAND: Select this option to activate
normal FM band.
3.5.2 Automatic Search
To scan automatically all
the available channels, please
follow here below instruction:
1. When the FM Mode is
activated, press MENU [M]
button to select AUTO SEARCH option.
2. Press [M] button to start the automatic search.
The MP3 Player will store the rst 20 radio programs
available.
3.5.3 Manual Search and Storing Channels
To scan manually the frequencies please follow
here below instruction:
1. When the FM Mode is activated, long pressing
the [] or [] buttons to start auto scanning.
Scanning stops as an available channel is found.
2. By short pressing the [] or [] buttons to
step-up scanning.
3. Press MENU [M] button to select SAVE option.
4. Press PLAY [] and this specic channel will
be saved as the last channel
5. Repeat the step from 1 to 4 for each desired
radio program by keeping in mind that the MP3 Player
has 20 memory positions.
3.5.4 FM Radio Record (REC)
To record FM radio program please follow here
below instruction:
1. When the FM Radio Mode is activated, press
MENU [M] button to select FINE REC option.
2. Press PLAY [] button to start the recording.
3. Press PLAY [] button to pause the
recording and press it again to restart the recording.
4. To stop and save the recording, long press [M]
button, will return to FM mode.
3.6 E-BooK
The Ebook option allows reading text le. To
activate this option please follow here below
instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu.
2. By using the [] or [] buttons select E-book,
and then press [M] button to conrm
3. Use [] or [] buttons to choose the le
4. Press PLAY [] button to start reading the
le
3.6.1 E-Book Submenu
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
nd the following music submenus. Press [] or []
to choose, and then press [M] key to conrm each
submenus. Use the same technique to navigate inside
each of the submenus.
Before you open any le, if you press M, it will
appears the following submenu:
O Local Folder:
Under this directory, you
can choose to go up a folder
level by pressing MENU [M] to
conrm. And then you can
choose to folder you want to
play
O Play Set:
You can choose between manual play and auto
play. For auto play, you can set the playing time from 1
to 10 seconds for each page of the E-book.
O Delete File:
Delete specic text le you want.
O Delete All:
Delete all text les using this option.
While reading, if you press and hold M, you can
select from:
- Bookmark select
- Bookmark delete
- Bookmark add
3.7 PHOTO
The Photo option allows browsing JPG le. To
activate this option please follow here below
instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu.
2. By using the [] or [] buttons select PHOTO,
and then press [M] button to conrm
3. Use [] or [] buttons to choose the le
4. Press PLAY [] button to start browsing the le
3.7.1 PHOTO Submenu
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
nd the following music submenus. Press [] or []
to choose, and then press [M] key to conrm each
submenus. Use the same technique to navigate inside
each of the submenus.
O Local Folder:
Under this directory, you can
choose to go up a folder level by
pressing PLAY [] to conrm.
And then you can choose to
folder you want to play
O Play Set:
You can choose between manual play and auto
play. For auto play, you can set the playing time from 1
to 10 seconds for each picture.
O Delete File:
Delete specic photo le you want.
O Delete All:
Delete all Photos using this option.
3.8 GAMES
The GAMES option allows playing games. To
activate this option please follow here below
instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu.
2. By using the [] or [] buttons to select
GAMES, and then press [M] button to enter the GAME
MENU.
Inside the game menu, there is one game for
you to use Russia Brick .and then press [M] button to
conrm
3.9 Setting
The SETTING option allows to access to MP3
Player setup system. To access at system setup please
follow here below instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 player, button, the screen
will display the main menu.
2. By using the [] or [] select SYSTEM option
then press [M] button to enter the SYSTEM MENU.
3. By using the [] or [] select the system
setup parameter and press MENU [M] button.
The parameters available in the setup system are:
Clock: This option allows setting of the system
date and time.
LCD set: This option allows setting the brightness,
darkly and black screen of the LCD panel.
Language: This option allows setting the
Language of the User Interface.
Power O: This option allows setting the o time
and sleep time.
Replay mode:
Online mode:
Memory Info: This option allows checking the
memory usage.
Firmware Ver: This
option allows checking the
rmware version.
Firmware Upg: This
option allows to upgrade the
rmware.
3.9.1 Clock
This option allows
setting of the system date
and time. The upper case display the date in Year :
Month : Day Format, and the lower case display the
Time in Hour : Minute : Second format. To change the
Date and time, please follow here below instruction:
1. Under the SYSTEM MENU, choose SYSTEM TIME
by pressing [] or [] and press [M] to conrm
2. Press [VOL+] and [VOL-] to choose the
parameter you want to adjust
3. press [] or [] to change the value. Press
MENU [M] to conrm.
3.9.2 Power O Set
This option allows setting the o time and sleep
time. By setting O Time, it is possible to enable (30s,
60s, 90s and 120s) or disable the power management
features to automatically shut down your player if it is
not used. By setting Sleep Time, it is possible to set
power o the unit after a specied time (30s, 60s, 90s,
120s) from the moment you conrm about this
selection.
To modify this parameter please follow here
below instruction:
1. Under the SYSTEM MENU, choose POWER OFF
by pressing [] or [] and press PLAY [].
2. By using the [] or [] buttons, select OFF
TIME or SLEEP TIME and press [M] button.
3. Choose the desired OFF TIME or SLEEP TIME
and press [M] to conrm.
Memory info
The gure presents the total volume of the disc,
the percentage present the percentage between used
space and total space.
Specication
Notice: You will not informed if the production design
and the specication.
10
3. Main Menu
After powering on the MP3 player, you can see
the main menu with 9 submenus (optional), which
allow you to select dierent functions and options.
By using the [] or [] buttons, you can select
the desire option, and then press M button to conrm
the selection.
To access at the main menu while you are inside
any of these submenus, press and hold MENU [M]
switch for a few seconds. (Short pressing the MENU
[M] switch usually opens the submenu option of each
submenus)
The available options are:
Music: Select this option to play song.
Movie: Select this option to play AMV video.
Record: Select this option to record voice
messages by the microphone inside.
Play: Select this option to play recorded voice
message.
Radio: Select this option to use the FM radio.
Text: Select this option to read text.
Games: Select this option to play game.
Picture: Select this option to browse and see
photos.
Setting: Select this option to access at system
setup.
3.1 Music Mode
The music player option allows playing songs. To
activate this option please follow here below
instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3
Player, the screen will display
the main menu
2. By using [] or []
buttons, select MUSIC PLAY
option then press [M] button.
3. Press PLAY []
button to start to play the
rst song available.
4. Press and hold M key to return to previous
menu.
3.1.1 Key Function at Music Mode
During the song play it is possible to activate the
following controls.
PLAY [Ź]: Press the play [] to start to play
a song. Press the play button again to pause the song.
To restart to play the song press play button again.
Hold the play button for longer time will
eventually turn o the player
REW & FFWD [] Press [] or [] to select the
previous or the next song.
Press and Hold the [] or [] buttons to rewind
or fast forward the song.
Volume (VOL+ and VOL-): Press [VOL+] button to
increase the volume and press [VOL-] button to
decrease the volume.
3.1.2 Music Mode
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
enter into each submenus. Press [] or [] to choose,
and then press MENU [M] key to conrm each
submenus. Use the same technique to navigate inside
each of the submenus.
In both modes (playing mode and stop mode)
you can nd the following submenus:
O Now playing
O All songs
O Album
O Artists
O Genre: Dance Music, Pop, Symphony,
Unknown Genre
O Local folder
O Create playlist
O Setting
- Repeat: Normal, Repeat one, Folder, Repeat
folder, Repeat all, Random, Intro
- Equalizer: Natural, Rock, Pop, Classic, Soft, Jazz,
DBB
- Tempo rate: ASS speed set, FFREV speed set
- Replay mode
- Bookmark: Bookmark select, Bookmark delete,
Bookmark add, Exit
O Delete le
O Delete all
3.2 Movie
The Movie MODE allows to play movies in AMV
Format. To activate this option please follow here
below
instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu.
2. By using [] or [] buttons,
select Movie option then press PLAY
[M] button.
3. Press PLAY [] button to
start to play the rst movie available.
Note:The Movie Player only
plays AMV les, you need conversion
from other le format in order to
watch the movie you like.
3.2.1 Key Function at Movie Mode
During the song play it is possible to activate the
following controls.
PLAY [Ź]: Press the PLAY [] to start to play
a movie. Press the play button again to pause the
movie. To restart to play the movie press play button
again.
Hold the play button for longer time will
eventually turn o the player
REW & FFWD [] Press [] or [] to select
the previous or the next movie.
Press and Hold the [] or [] buttons to rewind
or fast forward the movie.
Volume (VOL+ and VOL-): Press [VOL+] button to
increase the volume and press [VOL-] button to
decrease the volume.
3.2.2 AMV Submenu
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
nd the following AMV submenus. Press [] or []to
choose, and then press MENU [M] key to conrm each
submenus. Use the same technique to navigate inside
each of the submenus.
O Now playing
O Local Folder:
Under this directory, you can choose to go up a
folder level by pressing MENU [M] to conrm. And
then you can choose the folder you want to play
O Repeat
O Delete File:
Delete specic video you want.
O Delete All:
Delete all videos using this option.
3.3 Record (Voice messages recorder)
This option allows to record voice messages by
using the microphone inside. To record voice
message, please follow here below instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu.
2. By using [] or [] buttons, select RECORD
option then press PLAY [M] button.
3. Press PLAY [] button
to start to recording.
4. You can listen to your
wav le under the VOICE
submenu.
During recording, Press the
PLAY [] to start recording.
Press the play button again to
pause recording. Hold the PLAY
[] / M button for longer time will eventually stop
recording.
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
nd the LOCAL FOLDER and REC TYPE. Press [] or
[] to choose, and then press MENU [M] key to
conrm each submenus. Use the same technique to
navigate inside each of the submenus.
1. Under the LOCAL FOLDER submenu, you can
choose to go up a folder level by pressing [M] to
conrm. And then you can choose the folder you want
to play
2. Under the REC format submenu, you can
choose the recording format including
ACT/MP3/WAV/WMA .
3.4 Play (Voice Messages Player)
The play option allows to play the voice
messages recorded by the MP3 Player. To activate this
option, please follow here below instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu.
2. By using [] or [] buttons, select VOICE
option then press PLAY [M] button.
3. Press PLAY [] button to start to play the
rst recording available.
3.4.1 Key Function at PLAY
Mode
During the recording play it is
possible to activate the following
controls.
PLAY [Ź]: Press the PLAY
[] to start to play a recording.
Press the play button again to pause the recording. To
restart to play the recording press play button again.
Hold the play button for longer time will
eventually turn o the player
REW & FFWD [] Press [] or [] to select
the previous or the next recording.
Press and Hold the [] or [] buttons to rewind
or fast forward the recording.
Volume (VOL+ and VOL-): Press [VOL+] button to
increase the volume and press [VOL-] button to
decrease the volume.
3.4.2 PLAY Submenu
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
nd the following music submenus. Press [] and []
to choose, and then press MENU [M] key to conrm
each submenus. Use the same technique to navigate
inside each of the submenus.
O Local Folder:
Under this directory, you can choose to go up a
folder level by pressing MENU [M] to conrm. And
then you can choose the folder you want to play
O Setting:
- Repeat: Normal, Repeat one, Folfer, Repeat
folder, Repeat all, Random, Intro
- Tempo rate: You can alter the Tempo Rate of the
Song.
- Replay
O Delete File:
Delete specic voice le you want.
O Delete All:
Delete all voice les using this option.
3.5 FM (FM Radio)
When the FM Radio mode is activated it is
possible to hear radio programs.
This option allows us to enjoy FM radio
programs. To use it, please follow here below
instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu
2. By using [] or [] buttons, select FM option
then press [M] button to conrm.
3. If there are preset channels, press PLAY []
button to play the rst channel, press again for the
next channel.
3.5.1 FM Submenu
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
nd the following FM submenus. Press [] and [] to
choose, and then press MENU [M]key to conrm each
submenus. Use the same technique to navigate inside
each of the submenus.
Here below you will nd the FM radio option list.
SAVE: Select this option to save radio channels
DELETE: Select this option to delete radio
channels.
DELETE ALL: Select this option to delete all radio
channels.
AUTO SEARCH: Select this option to start
auto-searching for radio channels.
NORMAL BAND: Select this option to activate
normal FM band.
3.5.2 Automatic Search
To scan automatically all
the available channels, please
follow here below instruction:
1. When the FM Mode is
activated, press MENU [M]
button to select AUTO SEARCH option.
2. Press [M] button to start the automatic search.
The MP3 Player will store the rst 20 radio programs
available.
3.5.3 Manual Search and Storing Channels
To scan manually the frequencies please follow
here below instruction:
1. When the FM Mode is activated, long pressing
the [] or [] buttons to start auto scanning.
Scanning stops as an available channel is found.
2. By short pressing the [] or [] buttons to
step-up scanning.
3. Press MENU [M] button to select SAVE option.
4. Press PLAY [] and this specic channel will
be saved as the last channel
5. Repeat the step from 1 to 4 for each desired
radio program by keeping in mind that the MP3 Player
has 20 memory positions.
3.5.4 FM Radio Record (REC)
To record FM radio program please follow here
below instruction:
1. When the FM Radio Mode is activated, press
MENU [M] button to select FINE REC option.
2. Press PLAY [] button to start the recording.
3. Press PLAY [] button to pause the
recording and press it again to restart the recording.
4. To stop and save the recording, long press [M]
button, will return to FM mode.
3.6 E-BooK
The Ebook option allows reading text le. To
activate this option please follow here below
instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu.
2. By using the [] or [] buttons select E-book,
and then press [M] button to conrm
3. Use [] or [] buttons to choose the le
4. Press PLAY [] button to start reading the
le
3.6.1 E-Book Submenu
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
nd the following music submenus. Press [] or []
to choose, and then press [M] key to conrm each
submenus. Use the same technique to navigate inside
each of the submenus.
Before you open any le, if you press M, it will
appears the following submenu:
O Local Folder:
Under this directory, you
can choose to go up a folder
level by pressing MENU [M] to
conrm. And then you can
choose to folder you want to
play
O Play Set:
You can choose between manual play and auto
play. For auto play, you can set the playing time from 1
to 10 seconds for each page of the E-book.
O Delete File:
Delete specic text le you want.
O Delete All:
Delete all text les using this option.
While reading, if you press and hold M, you can
select from:
- Bookmark select
- Bookmark delete
- Bookmark add
3.7 PHOTO
The Photo option allows browsing JPG le. To
activate this option please follow here below
instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu.
2. By using the [] or [] buttons select PHOTO,
and then press [M] button to conrm
3. Use [] or [] buttons to choose the le
4. Press PLAY [] button to start browsing the le
3.7.1 PHOTO Submenu
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
nd the following music submenus. Press [] or []
to choose, and then press [M] key to conrm each
submenus. Use the same technique to navigate inside
each of the submenus.
O Local Folder:
Under this directory, you can
choose to go up a folder level by
pressing PLAY [] to conrm.
And then you can choose to
folder you want to play
O Play Set:
You can choose between manual play and auto
play. For auto play, you can set the playing time from 1
to 10 seconds for each picture.
O Delete File:
Delete specic photo le you want.
O Delete All:
Delete all Photos using this option.
3.8 GAMES
The GAMES option allows playing games. To
activate this option please follow here below
instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu.
2. By using the [] or [] buttons to select
GAMES, and then press [M] button to enter the GAME
MENU.
Inside the game menu, there is one game for
you to use Russia Brick .and then press [M] button to
conrm
3.9 Setting
The SETTING option allows to access to MP3
Player setup system. To access at system setup please
follow here below instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 player, button, the screen
will display the main menu.
2. By using the [] or [] select SYSTEM option
then press [M] button to enter the SYSTEM MENU.
3. By using the [] or [] select the system
setup parameter and press MENU [M] button.
The parameters available in the setup system are:
Clock: This option allows setting of the system
date and time.
LCD set: This option allows setting the brightness,
darkly and black screen of the LCD panel.
Language: This option allows setting the
Language of the User Interface.
Power O: This option allows setting the o time
and sleep time.
Replay mode:
Online mode:
Memory Info: This option allows checking the
memory usage.
Firmware Ver: This
option allows checking the
rmware version.
Firmware Upg: This
option allows to upgrade the
rmware.
3.9.1 Clock
This option allows
setting of the system date
and time. The upper case display the date in Year :
Month : Day Format, and the lower case display the
Time in Hour : Minute : Second format. To change the
Date and time, please follow here below instruction:
1. Under the SYSTEM MENU, choose SYSTEM TIME
by pressing [] or [] and press [M] to conrm
2. Press [VOL+] and [VOL-] to choose the
parameter you want to adjust
3. press [] or [] to change the value. Press
MENU [M] to conrm.
3.9.2 Power O Set
This option allows setting the o time and sleep
time. By setting O Time, it is possible to enable (30s,
60s, 90s and 120s) or disable the power management
features to automatically shut down your player if it is
not used. By setting Sleep Time, it is possible to set
power o the unit after a specied time (30s, 60s, 90s,
120s) from the moment you conrm about this
selection.
To modify this parameter please follow here
below instruction:
1. Under the SYSTEM MENU, choose POWER OFF
by pressing [] or [] and press PLAY [].
2. By using the [] or [] buttons, select OFF
TIME or SLEEP TIME and press [M] button.
3. Choose the desired OFF TIME or SLEEP TIME
and press [M] to conrm.
Memory info
The gure presents the total volume of the disc,
the percentage present the percentage between used
space and total space.
Specication
Notice: You will not informed if the production design
and the specication.
11
3. Main Menu
After powering on the MP3 player, you can see
the main menu with 9 submenus (optional), which
allow you to select dierent functions and options.
By using the [] or [] buttons, you can select
the desire option, and then press M button to conrm
the selection.
To access at the main menu while you are inside
any of these submenus, press and hold MENU [M]
switch for a few seconds. (Short pressing the MENU
[M] switch usually opens the submenu option of each
submenus)
The available options are:
Music: Select this option to play song.
Movie: Select this option to play AMV video.
Record: Select this option to record voice
messages by the microphone inside.
Play: Select this option to play recorded voice
message.
Radio: Select this option to use the FM radio.
Text: Select this option to read text.
Games: Select this option to play game.
Picture: Select this option to browse and see
photos.
Setting: Select this option to access at system
setup.
3.1 Music Mode
The music player option allows playing songs. To
activate this option please follow here below
instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3
Player, the screen will display
the main menu
2. By using [] or []
buttons, select MUSIC PLAY
option then press [M] button.
3. Press PLAY []
button to start to play the
rst song available.
4. Press and hold M key to return to previous
menu.
3.1.1 Key Function at Music Mode
During the song play it is possible to activate the
following controls.
PLAY [Ź]: Press the play [] to start to play
a song. Press the play button again to pause the song.
To restart to play the song press play button again.
Hold the play button for longer time will
eventually turn o the player
REW & FFWD [] Press [] or [] to select the
previous or the next song.
Press and Hold the [] or [] buttons to rewind
or fast forward the song.
Volume (VOL+ and VOL-): Press [VOL+] button to
increase the volume and press [VOL-] button to
decrease the volume.
3.1.2 Music Mode
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
enter into each submenus. Press [] or [] to choose,
and then press MENU [M] key to conrm each
submenus. Use the same technique to navigate inside
each of the submenus.
In both modes (playing mode and stop mode)
you can nd the following submenus:
O Now playing
O All songs
O Album
O Artists
O Genre: Dance Music, Pop, Symphony,
Unknown Genre
O Local folder
O Create playlist
O Setting
- Repeat: Normal, Repeat one, Folder, Repeat
folder, Repeat all, Random, Intro
- Equalizer: Natural, Rock, Pop, Classic, Soft, Jazz,
DBB
- Tempo rate: ASS speed set, FFREV speed set
- Replay mode
- Bookmark: Bookmark select, Bookmark delete,
Bookmark add, Exit
O Delete le
O Delete all
3.2 Movie
The Movie MODE allows to play movies in AMV
Format. To activate this option please follow here
below
instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu.
2. By using [] or [] buttons,
select Movie option then press PLAY
[M] button.
3. Press PLAY [] button to
start to play the rst movie available.
Note:The Movie Player only
plays AMV les, you need conversion
from other le format in order to
watch the movie you like.
3.2.1 Key Function at Movie Mode
During the song play it is possible to activate the
following controls.
PLAY [Ź]: Press the PLAY [] to start to play
a movie. Press the play button again to pause the
movie. To restart to play the movie press play button
again.
Hold the play button for longer time will
eventually turn o the player
REW & FFWD [] Press [] or [] to select
the previous or the next movie.
Press and Hold the [] or [] buttons to rewind
or fast forward the movie.
Volume (VOL+ and VOL-): Press [VOL+] button to
increase the volume and press [VOL-] button to
decrease the volume.
3.2.2 AMV Submenu
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
nd the following AMV submenus. Press [] or []to
choose, and then press MENU [M] key to conrm each
submenus. Use the same technique to navigate inside
each of the submenus.
O Now playing
O Local Folder:
Under this directory, you can choose to go up a
folder level by pressing MENU [M] to conrm. And
then you can choose the folder you want to play
O Repeat
O Delete File:
Delete specic video you want.
O Delete All:
Delete all videos using this option.
3.3 Record (Voice messages recorder)
This option allows to record voice messages by
using the microphone inside. To record voice
message, please follow here below instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu.
2. By using [] or [] buttons, select RECORD
option then press PLAY [M] button.
3. Press PLAY [] button
to start to recording.
4. You can listen to your
wav le under the VOICE
submenu.
During recording, Press the
PLAY [] to start recording.
Press the play button again to
pause recording. Hold the PLAY
[] / M button for longer time will eventually stop
recording.
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
nd the LOCAL FOLDER and REC TYPE. Press [] or
[] to choose, and then press MENU [M] key to
conrm each submenus. Use the same technique to
navigate inside each of the submenus.
1. Under the LOCAL FOLDER submenu, you can
choose to go up a folder level by pressing [M] to
conrm. And then you can choose the folder you want
to play
2. Under the REC format submenu, you can
choose the recording format including
ACT/MP3/WAV/WMA .
3.4 Play (Voice Messages Player)
The play option allows to play the voice
messages recorded by the MP3 Player. To activate this
option, please follow here below instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu.
2. By using [] or [] buttons, select VOICE
option then press PLAY [M] button.
3. Press PLAY [] button to start to play the
rst recording available.
3.4.1 Key Function at PLAY
Mode
During the recording play it is
possible to activate the following
controls.
PLAY [Ź]: Press the PLAY
[] to start to play a recording.
Press the play button again to pause the recording. To
restart to play the recording press play button again.
Hold the play button for longer time will
eventually turn o the player
REW & FFWD [] Press [] or [] to select
the previous or the next recording.
Press and Hold the [] or [] buttons to rewind
or fast forward the recording.
Volume (VOL+ and VOL-): Press [VOL+] button to
increase the volume and press [VOL-] button to
decrease the volume.
3.4.2 PLAY Submenu
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
nd the following music submenus. Press [] and []
to choose, and then press MENU [M] key to conrm
each submenus. Use the same technique to navigate
inside each of the submenus.
O Local Folder:
Under this directory, you can choose to go up a
folder level by pressing MENU [M] to conrm. And
then you can choose the folder you want to play
O Setting:
- Repeat: Normal, Repeat one, Folfer, Repeat
folder, Repeat all, Random, Intro
- Tempo rate: You can alter the Tempo Rate of the
Song.
- Replay
O Delete File:
Delete specic voice le you want.
O Delete All:
Delete all voice les using this option.
3.5 FM (FM Radio)
When the FM Radio mode is activated it is
possible to hear radio programs.
This option allows us to enjoy FM radio
programs. To use it, please follow here below
instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu
2. By using [] or [] buttons, select FM option
then press [M] button to conrm.
3. If there are preset channels, press PLAY []
button to play the rst channel, press again for the
next channel.
3.5.1 FM Submenu
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
nd the following FM submenus. Press [] and [] to
choose, and then press MENU [M]key to conrm each
submenus. Use the same technique to navigate inside
each of the submenus.
Here below you will nd the FM radio option list.
SAVE: Select this option to save radio channels
DELETE: Select this option to delete radio
channels.
DELETE ALL: Select this option to delete all radio
channels.
AUTO SEARCH: Select this option to start
auto-searching for radio channels.
NORMAL BAND: Select this option to activate
normal FM band.
3.5.2 Automatic Search
To scan automatically all
the available channels, please
follow here below instruction:
1. When the FM Mode is
activated, press MENU [M]
button to select AUTO SEARCH option.
2. Press [M] button to start the automatic search.
The MP3 Player will store the rst 20 radio programs
available.
3.5.3 Manual Search and Storing Channels
To scan manually the frequencies please follow
here below instruction:
1. When the FM Mode is activated, long pressing
the [] or [] buttons to start auto scanning.
Scanning stops as an available channel is found.
2. By short pressing the [] or [] buttons to
step-up scanning.
3. Press MENU [M] button to select SAVE option.
4. Press PLAY [] and this specic channel will
be saved as the last channel
5. Repeat the step from 1 to 4 for each desired
radio program by keeping in mind that the MP3 Player
has 20 memory positions.
3.5.4 FM Radio Record (REC)
To record FM radio program please follow here
below instruction:
1. When the FM Radio Mode is activated, press
MENU [M] button to select FINE REC option.
2. Press PLAY [] button to start the recording.
3. Press PLAY [] button to pause the
recording and press it again to restart the recording.
4. To stop and save the recording, long press [M]
button, will return to FM mode.
3.6 E-BooK
The Ebook option allows reading text le. To
activate this option please follow here below
instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu.
2. By using the [] or [] buttons select E-book,
and then press [M] button to conrm
3. Use [] or [] buttons to choose the le
4. Press PLAY [] button to start reading the
le
3.6.1 E-Book Submenu
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
nd the following music submenus. Press [] or []
to choose, and then press [M] key to conrm each
submenus. Use the same technique to navigate inside
each of the submenus.
Before you open any le, if you press M, it will
appears the following submenu:
O Local Folder:
Under this directory, you
can choose to go up a folder
level by pressing MENU [M] to
conrm. And then you can
choose to folder you want to
play
O Play Set:
You can choose between manual play and auto
play. For auto play, you can set the playing time from 1
to 10 seconds for each page of the E-book.
O Delete File:
Delete specic text le you want.
O Delete All:
Delete all text les using this option.
While reading, if you press and hold M, you can
select from:
- Bookmark select
- Bookmark delete
- Bookmark add
3.7 PHOTO
The Photo option allows browsing JPG le. To
activate this option please follow here below
instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu.
2. By using the [] or [] buttons select PHOTO,
and then press [M] button to conrm
3. Use [] or [] buttons to choose the le
4. Press PLAY [] button to start browsing the le
3.7.1 PHOTO Submenu
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
nd the following music submenus. Press [] or []
to choose, and then press [M] key to conrm each
submenus. Use the same technique to navigate inside
each of the submenus.
O Local Folder:
Under this directory, you can
choose to go up a folder level by
pressing PLAY [] to conrm.
And then you can choose to
folder you want to play
O Play Set:
You can choose between manual play and auto
play. For auto play, you can set the playing time from 1
to 10 seconds for each picture.
O Delete File:
Delete specic photo le you want.
O Delete All:
Delete all Photos using this option.
3.8 GAMES
The GAMES option allows playing games. To
activate this option please follow here below
instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu.
2. By using the [] or [] buttons to select
GAMES, and then press [M] button to enter the GAME
MENU.
Inside the game menu, there is one game for
you to use Russia Brick .and then press [M] button to
conrm
3.9 Setting
The SETTING option allows to access to MP3
Player setup system. To access at system setup please
follow here below instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 player, button, the screen
will display the main menu.
2. By using the [] or [] select SYSTEM option
then press [M] button to enter the SYSTEM MENU.
3. By using the [] or [] select the system
setup parameter and press MENU [M] button.
The parameters available in the setup system are:
Clock: This option allows setting of the system
date and time.
LCD set: This option allows setting the brightness,
darkly and black screen of the LCD panel.
Language: This option allows setting the
Language of the User Interface.
Power O: This option allows setting the o time
and sleep time.
Replay mode:
Online mode:
Memory Info: This option allows checking the
memory usage.
Firmware Ver: This
option allows checking the
rmware version.
Firmware Upg: This
option allows to upgrade the
rmware.
3.9.1 Clock
This option allows
setting of the system date
and time. The upper case display the date in Year :
Month : Day Format, and the lower case display the
Time in Hour : Minute : Second format. To change the
Date and time, please follow here below instruction:
1. Under the SYSTEM MENU, choose SYSTEM TIME
by pressing [] or [] and press [M] to conrm
2. Press [VOL+] and [VOL-] to choose the
parameter you want to adjust
3. press [] or [] to change the value. Press
MENU [M] to conrm.
3.9.2 Power O Set
This option allows setting the o time and sleep
time. By setting O Time, it is possible to enable (30s,
60s, 90s and 120s) or disable the power management
features to automatically shut down your player if it is
not used. By setting Sleep Time, it is possible to set
power o the unit after a specied time (30s, 60s, 90s,
120s) from the moment you conrm about this
selection.
To modify this parameter please follow here
below instruction:
1. Under the SYSTEM MENU, choose POWER OFF
by pressing [] or [] and press PLAY [].
2. By using the [] or [] buttons, select OFF
TIME or SLEEP TIME and press [M] button.
3. Choose the desired OFF TIME or SLEEP TIME
and press [M] to conrm.
Memory info
The gure presents the total volume of the disc,
the percentage present the percentage between used
space and total space.
Specication
Notice: You will not informed if the production design
and the specication.
12
3. Main Menu
After powering on the MP3 player, you can see
the main menu with 9 submenus (optional), which
allow you to select dierent functions and options.
By using the [] or [] buttons, you can select
the desire option, and then press M button to conrm
the selection.
To access at the main menu while you are inside
any of these submenus, press and hold MENU [M]
switch for a few seconds. (Short pressing the MENU
[M] switch usually opens the submenu option of each
submenus)
The available options are:
Music: Select this option to play song.
Movie: Select this option to play AMV video.
Record: Select this option to record voice
messages by the microphone inside.
Play: Select this option to play recorded voice
message.
Radio: Select this option to use the FM radio.
Text: Select this option to read text.
Games: Select this option to play game.
Picture: Select this option to browse and see
photos.
Setting: Select this option to access at system
setup.
3.1 Music Mode
The music player option allows playing songs. To
activate this option please follow here below
instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3
Player, the screen will display
the main menu
2. By using [] or []
buttons, select MUSIC PLAY
option then press [M] button.
3. Press PLAY []
button to start to play the
rst song available.
4. Press and hold M key to return to previous
menu.
3.1.1 Key Function at Music Mode
During the song play it is possible to activate the
following controls.
PLAY [Ź]: Press the play [] to start to play
a song. Press the play button again to pause the song.
To restart to play the song press play button again.
Hold the play button for longer time will
eventually turn o the player
REW & FFWD [] Press [] or [] to select the
previous or the next song.
Press and Hold the [] or [] buttons to rewind
or fast forward the song.
Volume (VOL+ and VOL-): Press [VOL+] button to
increase the volume and press [VOL-] button to
decrease the volume.
3.1.2 Music Mode
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
enter into each submenus. Press [] or [] to choose,
and then press MENU [M] key to conrm each
submenus. Use the same technique to navigate inside
each of the submenus.
In both modes (playing mode and stop mode)
you can nd the following submenus:
O Now playing
O All songs
O Album
O Artists
O Genre: Dance Music, Pop, Symphony,
Unknown Genre
O Local folder
O Create playlist
O Setting
- Repeat: Normal, Repeat one, Folder, Repeat
folder, Repeat all, Random, Intro
- Equalizer: Natural, Rock, Pop, Classic, Soft, Jazz,
DBB
- Tempo rate: ASS speed set, FFREV speed set
- Replay mode
- Bookmark: Bookmark select, Bookmark delete,
Bookmark add, Exit
O Delete le
O Delete all
3.2 Movie
The Movie MODE allows to play movies in AMV
Format. To activate this option please follow here
below
instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu.
2. By using [] or [] buttons,
select Movie option then press PLAY
[M] button.
3. Press PLAY [] button to
start to play the rst movie available.
Note:The Movie Player only
plays AMV les, you need conversion
from other le format in order to
watch the movie you like.
3.2.1 Key Function at Movie Mode
During the song play it is possible to activate the
following controls.
PLAY [Ź]: Press the PLAY [] to start to play
a movie. Press the play button again to pause the
movie. To restart to play the movie press play button
again.
Hold the play button for longer time will
eventually turn o the player
REW & FFWD [] Press [] or [] to select
the previous or the next movie.
Press and Hold the [] or [] buttons to rewind
or fast forward the movie.
Volume (VOL+ and VOL-): Press [VOL+] button to
increase the volume and press [VOL-] button to
decrease the volume.
3.2.2 AMV Submenu
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
nd the following AMV submenus. Press [] or []to
choose, and then press MENU [M] key to conrm each
submenus. Use the same technique to navigate inside
each of the submenus.
O Now playing
O Local Folder:
Under this directory, you can choose to go up a
folder level by pressing MENU [M] to conrm. And
then you can choose the folder you want to play
O Repeat
O Delete File:
Delete specic video you want.
O Delete All:
Delete all videos using this option.
3.3 Record (Voice messages recorder)
This option allows to record voice messages by
using the microphone inside. To record voice
message, please follow here below instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu.
2. By using [] or [] buttons, select RECORD
option then press PLAY [M] button.
3. Press PLAY [] button
to start to recording.
4. You can listen to your
wav le under the VOICE
submenu.
During recording, Press the
PLAY [] to start recording.
Press the play button again to
pause recording. Hold the PLAY
[] / M button for longer time will eventually stop
recording.
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
nd the LOCAL FOLDER and REC TYPE. Press [] or
[] to choose, and then press MENU [M] key to
conrm each submenus. Use the same technique to
navigate inside each of the submenus.
1. Under the LOCAL FOLDER submenu, you can
choose to go up a folder level by pressing [M] to
conrm. And then you can choose the folder you want
to play
2. Under the REC format submenu, you can
choose the recording format including
ACT/MP3/WAV/WMA .
3.4 Play (Voice Messages Player)
The play option allows to play the voice
messages recorded by the MP3 Player. To activate this
option, please follow here below instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu.
2. By using [] or [] buttons, select VOICE
option then press PLAY [M] button.
3. Press PLAY [] button to start to play the
rst recording available.
3.4.1 Key Function at PLAY
Mode
During the recording play it is
possible to activate the following
controls.
PLAY [Ź]: Press the PLAY
[] to start to play a recording.
Press the play button again to pause the recording. To
restart to play the recording press play button again.
Hold the play button for longer time will
eventually turn o the player
REW & FFWD [] Press [] or [] to select
the previous or the next recording.
Press and Hold the [] or [] buttons to rewind
or fast forward the recording.
Volume (VOL+ and VOL-): Press [VOL+] button to
increase the volume and press [VOL-] button to
decrease the volume.
3.4.2 PLAY Submenu
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
nd the following music submenus. Press [] and []
to choose, and then press MENU [M] key to conrm
each submenus. Use the same technique to navigate
inside each of the submenus.
O Local Folder:
Under this directory, you can choose to go up a
folder level by pressing MENU [M] to conrm. And
then you can choose the folder you want to play
O Setting:
- Repeat: Normal, Repeat one, Folfer, Repeat
folder, Repeat all, Random, Intro
- Tempo rate: You can alter the Tempo Rate of the
Song.
- Replay
O Delete File:
Delete specic voice le you want.
O Delete All:
Delete all voice les using this option.
3.5 FM (FM Radio)
When the FM Radio mode is activated it is
possible to hear radio programs.
This option allows us to enjoy FM radio
programs. To use it, please follow here below
instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu
2. By using [] or [] buttons, select FM option
then press [M] button to conrm.
3. If there are preset channels, press PLAY []
button to play the rst channel, press again for the
next channel.
3.5.1 FM Submenu
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
nd the following FM submenus. Press [] and [] to
choose, and then press MENU [M]key to conrm each
submenus. Use the same technique to navigate inside
each of the submenus.
Here below you will nd the FM radio option list.
SAVE: Select this option to save radio channels
DELETE: Select this option to delete radio
channels.
DELETE ALL: Select this option to delete all radio
channels.
AUTO SEARCH: Select this option to start
auto-searching for radio channels.
NORMAL BAND: Select this option to activate
normal FM band.
3.5.2 Automatic Search
To scan automatically all
the available channels, please
follow here below instruction:
1. When the FM Mode is
activated, press MENU [M]
button to select AUTO SEARCH option.
2. Press [M] button to start the automatic search.
The MP3 Player will store the rst 20 radio programs
available.
3.5.3 Manual Search and Storing Channels
To scan manually the frequencies please follow
here below instruction:
1. When the FM Mode is activated, long pressing
the [] or [] buttons to start auto scanning.
Scanning stops as an available channel is found.
2. By short pressing the [] or [] buttons to
step-up scanning.
3. Press MENU [M] button to select SAVE option.
4. Press PLAY [] and this specic channel will
be saved as the last channel
5. Repeat the step from 1 to 4 for each desired
radio program by keeping in mind that the MP3 Player
has 20 memory positions.
3.5.4 FM Radio Record (REC)
To record FM radio program please follow here
below instruction:
1. When the FM Radio Mode is activated, press
MENU [M] button to select FINE REC option.
2. Press PLAY [] button to start the recording.
3. Press PLAY [] button to pause the
recording and press it again to restart the recording.
4. To stop and save the recording, long press [M]
button, will return to FM mode.
3.6 E-BooK
The Ebook option allows reading text le. To
activate this option please follow here below
instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu.
2. By using the [] or [] buttons select E-book,
and then press [M] button to conrm
3. Use [] or [] buttons to choose the le
4. Press PLAY [] button to start reading the
le
3.6.1 E-Book Submenu
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
nd the following music submenus. Press [] or []
to choose, and then press [M] key to conrm each
submenus. Use the same technique to navigate inside
each of the submenus.
Before you open any le, if you press M, it will
appears the following submenu:
O Local Folder:
Under this directory, you
can choose to go up a folder
level by pressing MENU [M] to
conrm. And then you can
choose to folder you want to
play
O Play Set:
You can choose between manual play and auto
play. For auto play, you can set the playing time from 1
to 10 seconds for each page of the E-book.
O Delete File:
Delete specic text le you want.
O Delete All:
Delete all text les using this option.
While reading, if you press and hold M, you can
select from:
- Bookmark select
- Bookmark delete
- Bookmark add
3.7 PHOTO
The Photo option allows browsing JPG le. To
activate this option please follow here below
instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu.
2. By using the [] or [] buttons select PHOTO,
and then press [M] button to conrm
3. Use [] or [] buttons to choose the le
4. Press PLAY [] button to start browsing the le
3.7.1 PHOTO Submenu
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
nd the following music submenus. Press [] or []
to choose, and then press [M] key to conrm each
submenus. Use the same technique to navigate inside
each of the submenus.
O Local Folder:
Under this directory, you can
choose to go up a folder level by
pressing PLAY [] to conrm.
And then you can choose to
folder you want to play
O Play Set:
You can choose between manual play and auto
play. For auto play, you can set the playing time from 1
to 10 seconds for each picture.
O Delete File:
Delete specic photo le you want.
O Delete All:
Delete all Photos using this option.
3.8 GAMES
The GAMES option allows playing games. To
activate this option please follow here below
instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu.
2. By using the [] or [] buttons to select
GAMES, and then press [M] button to enter the GAME
MENU.
Inside the game menu, there is one game for
you to use Russia Brick .and then press [M] button to
conrm
3.9 Setting
The SETTING option allows to access to MP3
Player setup system. To access at system setup please
follow here below instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 player, button, the screen
will display the main menu.
2. By using the [] or [] select SYSTEM option
then press [M] button to enter the SYSTEM MENU.
3. By using the [] or [] select the system
setup parameter and press MENU [M] button.
The parameters available in the setup system are:
Clock: This option allows setting of the system
date and time.
LCD set: This option allows setting the brightness,
darkly and black screen of the LCD panel.
Language: This option allows setting the
Language of the User Interface.
Power O: This option allows setting the o time
and sleep time.
Replay mode:
Online mode:
Memory Info: This option allows checking the
memory usage.
Firmware Ver: This
option allows checking the
rmware version.
Firmware Upg: This
option allows to upgrade the
rmware.
3.9.1 Clock
This option allows
setting of the system date
and time. The upper case display the date in Year :
Month : Day Format, and the lower case display the
Time in Hour : Minute : Second format. To change the
Date and time, please follow here below instruction:
1. Under the SYSTEM MENU, choose SYSTEM TIME
by pressing [] or [] and press [M] to conrm
2. Press [VOL+] and [VOL-] to choose the
parameter you want to adjust
3. press [] or [] to change the value. Press
MENU [M] to conrm.
3.9.2 Power O Set
This option allows setting the o time and sleep
time. By setting O Time, it is possible to enable (30s,
60s, 90s and 120s) or disable the power management
features to automatically shut down your player if it is
not used. By setting Sleep Time, it is possible to set
power o the unit after a specied time (30s, 60s, 90s,
120s) from the moment you conrm about this
selection.
To modify this parameter please follow here
below instruction:
1. Under the SYSTEM MENU, choose POWER OFF
by pressing [] or [] and press PLAY [].
2. By using the [] or [] buttons, select OFF
TIME or SLEEP TIME and press [M] button.
3. Choose the desired OFF TIME or SLEEP TIME
and press [M] to conrm.
Memory info
The gure presents the total volume of the disc,
the percentage present the percentage between used
space and total space.
Specication
Notice: You will not informed if the production design
and the specication.
13
3. Main Menu
After powering on the MP3 player, you can see
the main menu with 9 submenus (optional), which
allow you to select dierent functions and options.
By using the [] or [] buttons, you can select
the desire option, and then press M button to conrm
the selection.
To access at the main menu while you are inside
any of these submenus, press and hold MENU [M]
switch for a few seconds. (Short pressing the MENU
[M] switch usually opens the submenu option of each
submenus)
The available options are:
Music: Select this option to play song.
Movie: Select this option to play AMV video.
Record: Select this option to record voice
messages by the microphone inside.
Play: Select this option to play recorded voice
message.
Radio: Select this option to use the FM radio.
Text: Select this option to read text.
Games: Select this option to play game.
Picture: Select this option to browse and see
photos.
Setting: Select this option to access at system
setup.
3.1 Music Mode
The music player option allows playing songs. To
activate this option please follow here below
instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3
Player, the screen will display
the main menu
2. By using [] or []
buttons, select MUSIC PLAY
option then press [M] button.
3. Press PLAY []
button to start to play the
rst song available.
4. Press and hold M key to return to previous
menu.
3.1.1 Key Function at Music Mode
During the song play it is possible to activate the
following controls.
PLAY [Ź]: Press the play [] to start to play
a song. Press the play button again to pause the song.
To restart to play the song press play button again.
Hold the play button for longer time will
eventually turn o the player
REW & FFWD [] Press [] or [] to select the
previous or the next song.
Press and Hold the [] or [] buttons to rewind
or fast forward the song.
Volume (VOL+ and VOL-): Press [VOL+] button to
increase the volume and press [VOL-] button to
decrease the volume.
3.1.2 Music Mode
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
enter into each submenus. Press [] or [] to choose,
and then press MENU [M] key to conrm each
submenus. Use the same technique to navigate inside
each of the submenus.
In both modes (playing mode and stop mode)
you can nd the following submenus:
O Now playing
O All songs
O Album
O Artists
O Genre: Dance Music, Pop, Symphony,
Unknown Genre
O Local folder
O Create playlist
O Setting
- Repeat: Normal, Repeat one, Folder, Repeat
folder, Repeat all, Random, Intro
- Equalizer: Natural, Rock, Pop, Classic, Soft, Jazz,
DBB
- Tempo rate: ASS speed set, FFREV speed set
- Replay mode
- Bookmark: Bookmark select, Bookmark delete,
Bookmark add, Exit
O Delete le
O Delete all
3.2 Movie
The Movie MODE allows to play movies in AMV
Format. To activate this option please follow here
below
instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu.
2. By using [] or [] buttons,
select Movie option then press PLAY
[M] button.
3. Press PLAY [] button to
start to play the rst movie available.
Note:The Movie Player only
plays AMV les, you need conversion
from other le format in order to
watch the movie you like.
3.2.1 Key Function at Movie Mode
During the song play it is possible to activate the
following controls.
PLAY [Ź]: Press the PLAY [] to start to play
a movie. Press the play button again to pause the
movie. To restart to play the movie press play button
again.
Hold the play button for longer time will
eventually turn o the player
REW & FFWD [] Press [] or [] to select
the previous or the next movie.
Press and Hold the [] or [] buttons to rewind
or fast forward the movie.
Volume (VOL+ and VOL-): Press [VOL+] button to
increase the volume and press [VOL-] button to
decrease the volume.
3.2.2 AMV Submenu
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
nd the following AMV submenus. Press [] or []to
choose, and then press MENU [M] key to conrm each
submenus. Use the same technique to navigate inside
each of the submenus.
O Now playing
O Local Folder:
Under this directory, you can choose to go up a
folder level by pressing MENU [M] to conrm. And
then you can choose the folder you want to play
O Repeat
O Delete File:
Delete specic video you want.
O Delete All:
Delete all videos using this option.
3.3 Record (Voice messages recorder)
This option allows to record voice messages by
using the microphone inside. To record voice
message, please follow here below instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu.
2. By using [] or [] buttons, select RECORD
option then press PLAY [M] button.
3. Press PLAY [] button
to start to recording.
4. You can listen to your
wav le under the VOICE
submenu.
During recording, Press the
PLAY [] to start recording.
Press the play button again to
pause recording. Hold the PLAY
[] / M button for longer time will eventually stop
recording.
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
nd the LOCAL FOLDER and REC TYPE. Press [] or
[] to choose, and then press MENU [M] key to
conrm each submenus. Use the same technique to
navigate inside each of the submenus.
1. Under the LOCAL FOLDER submenu, you can
choose to go up a folder level by pressing [M] to
conrm. And then you can choose the folder you want
to play
2. Under the REC format submenu, you can
choose the recording format including
ACT/MP3/WAV/WMA .
3.4 Play (Voice Messages Player)
The play option allows to play the voice
messages recorded by the MP3 Player. To activate this
option, please follow here below instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu.
2. By using [] or [] buttons, select VOICE
option then press PLAY [M] button.
3. Press PLAY [] button to start to play the
rst recording available.
3.4.1 Key Function at PLAY
Mode
During the recording play it is
possible to activate the following
controls.
PLAY [Ź]: Press the PLAY
[] to start to play a recording.
Press the play button again to pause the recording. To
restart to play the recording press play button again.
Hold the play button for longer time will
eventually turn o the player
REW & FFWD [] Press [] or [] to select
the previous or the next recording.
Press and Hold the [] or [] buttons to rewind
or fast forward the recording.
Volume (VOL+ and VOL-): Press [VOL+] button to
increase the volume and press [VOL-] button to
decrease the volume.
3.4.2 PLAY Submenu
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
nd the following music submenus. Press [] and []
to choose, and then press MENU [M] key to conrm
each submenus. Use the same technique to navigate
inside each of the submenus.
O Local Folder:
Under this directory, you can choose to go up a
folder level by pressing MENU [M] to conrm. And
then you can choose the folder you want to play
O Setting:
- Repeat: Normal, Repeat one, Folfer, Repeat
folder, Repeat all, Random, Intro
- Tempo rate: You can alter the Tempo Rate of the
Song.
- Replay
O Delete File:
Delete specic voice le you want.
O Delete All:
Delete all voice les using this option.
3.5 FM (FM Radio)
When the FM Radio mode is activated it is
possible to hear radio programs.
This option allows us to enjoy FM radio
programs. To use it, please follow here below
instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu
2. By using [] or [] buttons, select FM option
then press [M] button to conrm.
3. If there are preset channels, press PLAY []
button to play the rst channel, press again for the
next channel.
3.5.1 FM Submenu
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
nd the following FM submenus. Press [] and [] to
choose, and then press MENU [M]key to conrm each
submenus. Use the same technique to navigate inside
each of the submenus.
Here below you will nd the FM radio option list.
SAVE: Select this option to save radio channels
DELETE: Select this option to delete radio
channels.
DELETE ALL: Select this option to delete all radio
channels.
AUTO SEARCH: Select this option to start
auto-searching for radio channels.
NORMAL BAND: Select this option to activate
normal FM band.
3.5.2 Automatic Search
To scan automatically all
the available channels, please
follow here below instruction:
1. When the FM Mode is
activated, press MENU [M]
button to select AUTO SEARCH option.
2. Press [M] button to start the automatic search.
The MP3 Player will store the rst 20 radio programs
available.
3.5.3 Manual Search and Storing Channels
To scan manually the frequencies please follow
here below instruction:
1. When the FM Mode is activated, long pressing
the [] or [] buttons to start auto scanning.
Scanning stops as an available channel is found.
2. By short pressing the [] or [] buttons to
step-up scanning.
3. Press MENU [M] button to select SAVE option.
4. Press PLAY [] and this specic channel will
be saved as the last channel
5. Repeat the step from 1 to 4 for each desired
radio program by keeping in mind that the MP3 Player
has 20 memory positions.
3.5.4 FM Radio Record (REC)
To record FM radio program please follow here
below instruction:
1. When the FM Radio Mode is activated, press
MENU [M] button to select FINE REC option.
2. Press PLAY [] button to start the recording.
3. Press PLAY [] button to pause the
recording and press it again to restart the recording.
4. To stop and save the recording, long press [M]
button, will return to FM mode.
3.6 E-BooK
The Ebook option allows reading text le. To
activate this option please follow here below
instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu.
2. By using the [] or [] buttons select E-book,
and then press [M] button to conrm
3. Use [] or [] buttons to choose the le
4. Press PLAY [] button to start reading the
le
3.6.1 E-Book Submenu
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
nd the following music submenus. Press [] or []
to choose, and then press [M] key to conrm each
submenus. Use the same technique to navigate inside
each of the submenus.
Before you open any le, if you press M, it will
appears the following submenu:
O Local Folder:
Under this directory, you
can choose to go up a folder
level by pressing MENU [M] to
conrm. And then you can
choose to folder you want to
play
O Play Set:
You can choose between manual play and auto
play. For auto play, you can set the playing time from 1
to 10 seconds for each page of the E-book.
O Delete File:
Delete specic text le you want.
O Delete All:
Delete all text les using this option.
While reading, if you press and hold M, you can
select from:
- Bookmark select
- Bookmark delete
- Bookmark add
3.7 PHOTO
The Photo option allows browsing JPG le. To
activate this option please follow here below
instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu.
2. By using the [] or [] buttons select PHOTO,
and then press [M] button to conrm
3. Use [] or [] buttons to choose the le
4. Press PLAY [] button to start browsing the le
3.7.1 PHOTO Submenu
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
nd the following music submenus. Press [] or []
to choose, and then press [M] key to conrm each
submenus. Use the same technique to navigate inside
each of the submenus.
O Local Folder:
Under this directory, you can
choose to go up a folder level by
pressing PLAY [] to conrm.
And then you can choose to
folder you want to play
O Play Set:
You can choose between manual play and auto
play. For auto play, you can set the playing time from 1
to 10 seconds for each picture.
O Delete File:
Delete specic photo le you want.
O Delete All:
Delete all Photos using this option.
3.8 GAMES
The GAMES option allows playing games. To
activate this option please follow here below
instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu.
2. By using the [] or [] buttons to select
GAMES, and then press [M] button to enter the GAME
MENU.
Inside the game menu, there is one game for
you to use Russia Brick .and then press [M] button to
conrm
3.9 Setting
The SETTING option allows to access to MP3
Player setup system. To access at system setup please
follow here below instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 player, button, the screen
will display the main menu.
2. By using the [] or [] select SYSTEM option
then press [M] button to enter the SYSTEM MENU.
3. By using the [] or [] select the system
setup parameter and press MENU [M] button.
The parameters available in the setup system are:
Clock: This option allows setting of the system
date and time.
LCD set: This option allows setting the brightness,
darkly and black screen of the LCD panel.
Language: This option allows setting the
Language of the User Interface.
Power O: This option allows setting the o time
and sleep time.
Replay mode:
Online mode:
Memory Info: This option allows checking the
memory usage.
Firmware Ver: This
option allows checking the
rmware version.
Firmware Upg: This
option allows to upgrade the
rmware.
3.9.1 Clock
This option allows
setting of the system date
and time. The upper case display the date in Year :
Month : Day Format, and the lower case display the
Time in Hour : Minute : Second format. To change the
Date and time, please follow here below instruction:
1. Under the SYSTEM MENU, choose SYSTEM TIME
by pressing [] or [] and press [M] to conrm
2. Press [VOL+] and [VOL-] to choose the
parameter you want to adjust
3. press [] or [] to change the value. Press
MENU [M] to conrm.
3.9.2 Power O Set
This option allows setting the o time and sleep
time. By setting O Time, it is possible to enable (30s,
60s, 90s and 120s) or disable the power management
features to automatically shut down your player if it is
not used. By setting Sleep Time, it is possible to set
power o the unit after a specied time (30s, 60s, 90s,
120s) from the moment you conrm about this
selection.
To modify this parameter please follow here
below instruction:
1. Under the SYSTEM MENU, choose POWER OFF
by pressing [] or [] and press PLAY [].
2. By using the [] or [] buttons, select OFF
TIME or SLEEP TIME and press [M] button.
3. Choose the desired OFF TIME or SLEEP TIME
and press [M] to conrm.
Memory info
The gure presents the total volume of the disc,
the percentage present the percentage between used
space and total space.
Specication
Notice: You will not informed if the production design
and the specication.
14
3. Main Menu
After powering on the MP3 player, you can see
the main menu with 9 submenus (optional), which
allow you to select dierent functions and options.
By using the [] or [] buttons, you can select
the desire option, and then press M button to conrm
the selection.
To access at the main menu while you are inside
any of these submenus, press and hold MENU [M]
switch for a few seconds. (Short pressing the MENU
[M] switch usually opens the submenu option of each
submenus)
The available options are:
Music: Select this option to play song.
Movie: Select this option to play AMV video.
Record: Select this option to record voice
messages by the microphone inside.
Play: Select this option to play recorded voice
message.
Radio: Select this option to use the FM radio.
Text: Select this option to read text.
Games: Select this option to play game.
Picture: Select this option to browse and see
photos.
Setting: Select this option to access at system
setup.
3.1 Music Mode
The music player option allows playing songs. To
activate this option please follow here below
instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3
Player, the screen will display
the main menu
2. By using [] or []
buttons, select MUSIC PLAY
option then press [M] button.
3. Press PLAY []
button to start to play the
rst song available.
4. Press and hold M key to return to previous
menu.
3.1.1 Key Function at Music Mode
During the song play it is possible to activate the
following controls.
PLAY [Ź]: Press the play [] to start to play
a song. Press the play button again to pause the song.
To restart to play the song press play button again.
Hold the play button for longer time will
eventually turn o the player
REW & FFWD [] Press [] or [] to select the
previous or the next song.
Press and Hold the [] or [] buttons to rewind
or fast forward the song.
Volume (VOL+ and VOL-): Press [VOL+] button to
increase the volume and press [VOL-] button to
decrease the volume.
3.1.2 Music Mode
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
enter into each submenus. Press [] or [] to choose,
and then press MENU [M] key to conrm each
submenus. Use the same technique to navigate inside
each of the submenus.
In both modes (playing mode and stop mode)
you can nd the following submenus:
O Now playing
O All songs
O Album
O Artists
O Genre: Dance Music, Pop, Symphony,
Unknown Genre
O Local folder
O Create playlist
O Setting
- Repeat: Normal, Repeat one, Folder, Repeat
folder, Repeat all, Random, Intro
- Equalizer: Natural, Rock, Pop, Classic, Soft, Jazz,
DBB
- Tempo rate: ASS speed set, FFREV speed set
- Replay mode
- Bookmark: Bookmark select, Bookmark delete,
Bookmark add, Exit
O Delete le
O Delete all
3.2 Movie
The Movie MODE allows to play movies in AMV
Format. To activate this option please follow here
below
instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu.
2. By using [] or [] buttons,
select Movie option then press PLAY
[M] button.
3. Press PLAY [] button to
start to play the rst movie available.
Note:The Movie Player only
plays AMV les, you need conversion
from other le format in order to
watch the movie you like.
3.2.1 Key Function at Movie Mode
During the song play it is possible to activate the
following controls.
PLAY [Ź]: Press the PLAY [] to start to play
a movie. Press the play button again to pause the
movie. To restart to play the movie press play button
again.
Hold the play button for longer time will
eventually turn o the player
REW & FFWD [] Press [] or [] to select
the previous or the next movie.
Press and Hold the [] or [] buttons to rewind
or fast forward the movie.
Volume (VOL+ and VOL-): Press [VOL+] button to
increase the volume and press [VOL-] button to
decrease the volume.
3.2.2 AMV Submenu
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
nd the following AMV submenus. Press [] or []to
choose, and then press MENU [M] key to conrm each
submenus. Use the same technique to navigate inside
each of the submenus.
O Now playing
O Local Folder:
Under this directory, you can choose to go up a
folder level by pressing MENU [M] to conrm. And
then you can choose the folder you want to play
O Repeat
O Delete File:
Delete specic video you want.
O Delete All:
Delete all videos using this option.
3.3 Record (Voice messages recorder)
This option allows to record voice messages by
using the microphone inside. To record voice
message, please follow here below instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu.
2. By using [] or [] buttons, select RECORD
option then press PLAY [M] button.
3. Press PLAY [] button
to start to recording.
4. You can listen to your
wav le under the VOICE
submenu.
During recording, Press the
PLAY [] to start recording.
Press the play button again to
pause recording. Hold the PLAY
[] / M button for longer time will eventually stop
recording.
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
nd the LOCAL FOLDER and REC TYPE. Press [] or
[] to choose, and then press MENU [M] key to
conrm each submenus. Use the same technique to
navigate inside each of the submenus.
1. Under the LOCAL FOLDER submenu, you can
choose to go up a folder level by pressing [M] to
conrm. And then you can choose the folder you want
to play
2. Under the REC format submenu, you can
choose the recording format including
ACT/MP3/WAV/WMA .
3.4 Play (Voice Messages Player)
The play option allows to play the voice
messages recorded by the MP3 Player. To activate this
option, please follow here below instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu.
2. By using [] or [] buttons, select VOICE
option then press PLAY [M] button.
3. Press PLAY [] button to start to play the
rst recording available.
3.4.1 Key Function at PLAY
Mode
During the recording play it is
possible to activate the following
controls.
PLAY [Ź]: Press the PLAY
[] to start to play a recording.
Press the play button again to pause the recording. To
restart to play the recording press play button again.
Hold the play button for longer time will
eventually turn o the player
REW & FFWD [] Press [] or [] to select
the previous or the next recording.
Press and Hold the [] or [] buttons to rewind
or fast forward the recording.
Volume (VOL+ and VOL-): Press [VOL+] button to
increase the volume and press [VOL-] button to
decrease the volume.
3.4.2 PLAY Submenu
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
nd the following music submenus. Press [] and []
to choose, and then press MENU [M] key to conrm
each submenus. Use the same technique to navigate
inside each of the submenus.
O Local Folder:
Under this directory, you can choose to go up a
folder level by pressing MENU [M] to conrm. And
then you can choose the folder you want to play
O Setting:
- Repeat: Normal, Repeat one, Folfer, Repeat
folder, Repeat all, Random, Intro
- Tempo rate: You can alter the Tempo Rate of the
Song.
- Replay
O Delete File:
Delete specic voice le you want.
O Delete All:
Delete all voice les using this option.
3.5 FM (FM Radio)
When the FM Radio mode is activated it is
possible to hear radio programs.
This option allows us to enjoy FM radio
programs. To use it, please follow here below
instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu
2. By using [] or [] buttons, select FM option
then press [M] button to conrm.
3. If there are preset channels, press PLAY []
button to play the rst channel, press again for the
next channel.
3.5.1 FM Submenu
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
nd the following FM submenus. Press [] and [] to
choose, and then press MENU [M]key to conrm each
submenus. Use the same technique to navigate inside
each of the submenus.
Here below you will nd the FM radio option list.
SAVE: Select this option to save radio channels
DELETE: Select this option to delete radio
channels.
DELETE ALL: Select this option to delete all radio
channels.
AUTO SEARCH: Select this option to start
auto-searching for radio channels.
NORMAL BAND: Select this option to activate
normal FM band.
3.5.2 Automatic Search
To scan automatically all
the available channels, please
follow here below instruction:
1. When the FM Mode is
activated, press MENU [M]
button to select AUTO SEARCH option.
2. Press [M] button to start the automatic search.
The MP3 Player will store the rst 20 radio programs
available.
3.5.3 Manual Search and Storing Channels
To scan manually the frequencies please follow
here below instruction:
1. When the FM Mode is activated, long pressing
the [] or [] buttons to start auto scanning.
Scanning stops as an available channel is found.
2. By short pressing the [] or [] buttons to
step-up scanning.
3. Press MENU [M] button to select SAVE option.
4. Press PLAY [] and this specic channel will
be saved as the last channel
5. Repeat the step from 1 to 4 for each desired
radio program by keeping in mind that the MP3 Player
has 20 memory positions.
3.5.4 FM Radio Record (REC)
To record FM radio program please follow here
below instruction:
1. When the FM Radio Mode is activated, press
MENU [M] button to select FINE REC option.
2. P
ress PLAY [] button to start the recording.
3. Press PLAY [] button to pause the
recording and press it again to restart the recording.
4. To stop and save the recording, long press [M]
button, will return to FM mode.
3.6 E-BooK
The Ebook option allows reading text le. To
activate this option please follow here below
instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu.
2. By using the [] or [] buttons select E-book,
and then press [M] button to conrm
3. Use [] or [] buttons to choose the le
4. Press PLAY [] button to start reading the
le
3.6.1 E-Book Submenu
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
nd the following music submenus. Press [] or []
to choose, and then press [M] key to conrm each
submenus. Use the same technique to navigate inside
each of the submenus.
Before you open any le, if you press M, it will
appears the following submenu:
O Local Folder:
Under this directory, you
can choose to go up a folder
level by pressing MENU [M] to
conrm. And then you can
choose to folder you want to
play
O Play Set:
You can choose between manual play and auto
play. For auto play, you can set the playing time from 1
to 10 seconds for each page of the E-book.
O Delete File:
Delete specic text le you want.
O Delete All:
Delete all text les using this option.
While reading, if you press and hold M, you can
select from:
- Bookmark select
- Bookmark delete
- Bookmark add
3.7 PHOTO
The Photo option allows browsing JPG le. To
activate this option please follow here below
instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu.
2. By using the [] or [] buttons select PHOTO,
and then press [M] button to conrm
3. Use [] or [] buttons to choose the le
4. Press PLAY [] button to start browsing the le
3.7.1 PHOTO Submenu
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
nd the following music submenus. Press [] or []
to choose, and then press [M] key to conrm each
submenus. Use the same technique to navigate inside
each of the submenus.
O Local Folder:
Under this directory, you can
choose to go up a folder level by
pressing PLAY [] to conrm.
And then you can choose to
folder you want to play
O Play Set:
You can choose between manual play and auto
play. For auto play, you can set the playing time from 1
to 10 seconds for each picture.
O Delete File:
Delete specic photo le you want.
O Delete All:
Delete all Photos using this option.
3.8 GAMES
The GAMES option allows playing games. To
activate this option please follow here below
instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu.
2. By using the [] or [] buttons to select
GAMES, and then press [M] button to enter the GAME
MENU.
Inside the game menu, there is one game for
you to use Russia Brick .and then press [M] button to
conrm
3.9 Setting
The SETTING option allows to access to MP3
Player setup system. To access at system setup please
follow here below instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 player, button, the screen
will display the main menu.
2. By using the [] or [] select SYSTEM option
then press [M] button to enter the SYSTEM MENU.
3. By using the [] or [] select the system
setup parameter and press MENU [M] button.
The parameters available in the setup system are:
Clock: This option allows setting of the system
date and time.
LCD set: This option allows setting the brightness,
darkly and black screen of the LCD panel.
Language: This option allows setting the
Language of the User Interface.
Power O: This option allows setting the o time
and sleep time.
Replay mode:
Online mode:
Memory Info: This option allows checking the
memory usage.
Firmware Ver: This
option allows checking the
rmware version.
Firmware Upg: This
option allows to upgrade the
rmware.
3.9.1 Clock
This option allows
setting of the system date
and time. The upper case display the date in Year :
Month : Day Format, and the lower case display the
Time in Hour : Minute : Second format. To change the
Date and time, please follow here below instruction:
1. Under the SYSTEM MENU, choose SYSTEM TIME
by pressing [] or [] and press [M] to conrm
2. Press [VOL+] and [VOL-] to choose the
parameter you want to adjust
3. press [] or [] to change the value. Press
MENU [M] to conrm.
3.9.2 Power O Set
This option allows setting the o time and sleep
time. By setting O Time, it is possible to enable (30s,
60s, 90s and 120s) or disable the power management
features to automatically shut down your player if it is
not used. By setting Sleep Time, it is possible to set
power o the unit after a specied time (30s, 60s, 90s,
120s) from the moment you conrm about this
selection.
To modify this parameter please follow here
below instruction:
1. Under the SYSTEM MENU, choose POWER OFF
by pressing [] or [] and press PLAY [].
2. By using the [] or [] buttons, select OFF
TIME or SLEEP TIME and press [M] button.
3. Choose the desired OFF TIME or SLEEP TIME
and press [M] to conrm.
Memory info
The gure presents the total volume of the disc,
the percentage present the percentage between used
space and total space.
Specication
Notice: You will not informed if the production design
and the specication.
15
3. Main Menu
After powering on the MP3 player, you can see
the main menu with 9 submenus (optional), which
allow you to select dierent functions and options.
By using the [] or [] buttons, you can select
the desire option, and then press M button to conrm
the selection.
To access at the main menu while you are inside
any of these submenus, press and hold MENU [M]
switch for a few seconds. (Short pressing the MENU
[M] switch usually opens the submenu option of each
submenus)
The available options are:
Music: Select this option to play song.
Movie: Select this option to play AMV video.
Record: Select this option to record voice
messages by the microphone inside.
Play: Select this option to play recorded voice
message.
Radio: Select this option to use the FM radio.
Text: Select this option to read text.
Games: Select this option to play game.
Picture: Select this option to browse and see
photos.
Setting: Select this option to access at system
setup.
3.1 Music Mode
The music player option allows playing songs. To
activate this option please follow here below
instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3
Player, the screen will display
the main menu
2. By using [] or []
buttons, select MUSIC PLAY
option then press [M] button.
3. Press PLAY []
button to start to play the
rst song available.
4. Press and hold M key to return to previous
menu.
3.1.1 Key Function at Music Mode
During the song play it is possible to activate the
following controls.
PLAY [Ź]: Press the play [] to start to play
a song. Press the play button again to pause the song.
To restart to play the song press play button again.
Hold the play button for longer time will
eventually turn o the player
REW & FFWD [] Press [] or [] to select the
previous or the next song.
Press and Hold the [] or [] buttons to rewind
or fast forward the song.
Volume (VOL+ and VOL-): Press [VOL+] button to
increase the volume and press [VOL-] button to
decrease the volume.
3.1.2 Music Mode
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
enter into each submenus. Press [] or [] to choose,
and then press MENU [M] key to conrm each
submenus. Use the same technique to navigate inside
each of the submenus.
In both modes (playing mode and stop mode)
you can nd the following submenus:
O Now playing
O All songs
O Album
O Artists
O Genre: Dance Music, Pop, Symphony,
Unknown Genre
O Local folder
O Create playlist
O Setting
- Repeat: Normal, Repeat one, Folder, Repeat
folder, Repeat all, Random, Intro
- Equalizer: Natural, Rock, Pop, Classic, Soft, Jazz,
DBB
- Tempo rate: ASS speed set, FFREV speed set
- Replay mode
- Bookmark: Bookmark select, Bookmark delete,
Bookmark add, Exit
O Delete le
O Delete all
3.2 Movie
The Movie MODE allows to play movies in AMV
Format. To activate this option please follow here
below
instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu.
2. By using [] or [] buttons,
select Movie option then press PLAY
[M] button.
3. Press PLAY [] button to
start to play the rst movie available.
Note:The Movie Player only
plays AMV les, you need conversion
from other le format in order to
watch the movie you like.
3.2.1 Key Function at Movie Mode
During the song play it is possible to activate the
following controls.
PLAY [Ź]: Press the PLAY [] to start to play
a movie. Press the play button again to pause the
movie. To restart to play the movie press play button
again.
Hold the play button for longer time will
eventually turn o the player
REW & FFWD [] Press [] or [] to select
the previous or the next movie.
Press and Hold the [] or [] buttons to rewind
or fast forward the movie.
Volume (VOL+ and VOL-): Press [VOL+] button to
increase the volume and press [VOL-] button to
decrease the volume.
3.2.2 AMV Submenu
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
nd the following AMV submenus. Press [] or []to
choose, and then press MENU [M] key to conrm each
submenus. Use the same technique to navigate inside
each of the submenus.
O Now playing
O Local Folder:
Under this directory, you can choose to go up a
folder level by pressing MENU [M] to conrm. And
then you can choose the folder you want to play
O Repeat
O Delete File:
Delete specic video you want.
O Delete All:
Delete all videos using this option.
3.3 Record (Voice messages recorder)
This option allows to record voice messages by
using the microphone inside. To record voice
message, please follow here below instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu.
2. By using [] or [] buttons, select RECORD
option then press PLAY [M] button.
3. Press PLAY [] button
to start to recording.
4. You can listen to your
wav le under the VOICE
submenu.
During recording, Press the
PLAY [] to start recording.
Press the play button again to
pause recording. Hold the PLAY
[] / M button for longer time will eventually stop
recording.
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
nd the LOCAL FOLDER and REC TYPE. Press [] or
[] to choose, and then press MENU [M] key to
conrm each submenus. Use the same technique to
navigate inside each of the submenus.
1. Under the LOCAL FOLDER submenu, you can
choose to go up a folder level by pressing [M] to
conrm. And then you can choose the folder you want
to play
2. Under the REC format submenu, you can
choose the recording format including
ACT/MP3/WAV/WMA .
3.4 Play (Voice Messages Player)
The play option allows to play the voice
messages recorded by the MP3 Player. To activate this
option, please follow here below instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu.
2. By using [] or [] buttons, select VOICE
option then press PLAY [M] button.
3. Press PLAY [] button to start to play the
rst recording available.
3.4.1 Key Function at PLAY
Mode
During the recording play it is
possible to activate the following
controls.
PLAY [Ź]: Press the PLAY
[] to start to play a recording.
Press the play button again to pause the recording. To
restart to play the recording press play button again.
Hold the play button for longer time will
eventually turn o the player
REW & FFWD [] Press [] or [] to select
the previous or the next recording.
Press and Hold the [] or [] buttons to rewind
or fast forward the recording.
Volume (VOL+ and VOL-): Press [VOL+] button to
increase the volume and press [VOL-] button to
decrease the volume.
3.4.2 PLAY Submenu
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
nd the following music submenus. Press [] and []
to choose, and then press MENU [M] key to conrm
each submenus. Use the same technique to navigate
inside each of the submenus.
O Local Folder:
Under this directory, you can choose to go up a
folder level by pressing MENU [M] to conrm. And
then you can choose the folder you want to play
O Setting:
- Repeat: Normal, Repeat one, Folfer, Repeat
folder, Repeat all, Random, Intro
- Tempo rate: You can alter the Tempo Rate of the
Song.
- Replay
O Delete File:
Delete specic voice le you want.
O Delete All:
Delete all voice les using this option.
3.5 FM (FM Radio)
When the FM Radio mode is activated it is
possible to hear radio programs.
This option allows us to enjoy FM radio
programs. To use it, please follow here below
instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu
2. By using [] or [] buttons, select FM option
then press [M] button to conrm.
3. If there are preset channels, press PLAY []
button to play the rst channel, press again for the
next channel.
3.5.1 FM Submenu
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
nd the following FM submenus. Press [] and [] to
choose, and then press MENU [M]key to conrm each
submenus. Use the same technique to navigate inside
each of the submenus.
Here below you will nd the FM radio option list.
SAVE: Select this option to save radio channels
DELETE: Select this option to delete radio
channels.
DELETE ALL: Select this option to delete all radio
channels.
AUTO SEARCH: Select this option to start
auto-searching for radio channels.
NORMAL BAND: Select this option to activate
normal FM band.
3.5.2 Automatic Search
To scan automatically all
the available channels, please
follow here below instruction:
1. When the FM Mode is
activated, press MENU [M]
button to select AUTO SEARCH option.
2. Press [M] button to start the automatic search.
The MP3 Player will store the rst 20 radio programs
available.
3.5.3 Manual Search and Storing Channels
To scan manually the frequencies please follow
here below instruction:
1. When the FM Mode is activated, long pressing
the [] or [] buttons to start auto scanning.
Scanning stops as an available channel is found.
2. By short pressing the [] or [] buttons to
step-up scanning.
3. Press MENU [M] button to select SAVE option.
4. Press PLAY [] and this specic channel will
be saved as the last channel
5. Repeat the step from 1 to 4 for each desired
radio program by keeping in mind that the MP3 Player
has 20 memory positions.
3.5.4 FM Radio Record (REC)
To record FM radio program please follow here
below instruction:
1. When the FM Radio Mode is activated, press
MENU [M] button to select FINE REC option.
2. P
ress PLAY [] button to start the recording.
3. Press PLAY [] button to pause the
recording and press it again to restart the recording.
4. To stop and save the recording, long press [M]
button, will return to FM mode.
3.6 E-BooK
The Ebook option allows reading text le. To
activate this option please follow here below
instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu.
2. By using the [] or [] buttons select E-book,
and then press [M] button to conrm
3. Use [] or [] buttons to choose the le
4. Press PLAY [] button to start reading the
le
3.6.1 E-Book Submenu
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
nd the following music submenus. Press [] or []
to choose, and then press [M] key to conrm each
submenus. Use the same technique to navigate inside
each of the submenus.
Before you open any le, if you press M, it will
appears the following submenu:
O Local Folder:
Under this directory, you
can choose to go up a folder
level by pressing MENU [M] to
conrm. And then you can
choose to folder you want to
play
O Play Set:
You can choose between manual play and auto
play. For auto play, you can set the playing time from 1
to 10 seconds for each page of the E-book.
O Delete File:
Delete specic text le you want.
O Delete All:
Delete all text les using this option.
While reading, if you press and hold M, you can
select from:
- Bookmark select
- Bookmark delete
- Bookmark add
3.7 PHOTO
The Photo option allows browsing JPG le. To
activate this option please follow here below
instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu.
2. By using the [] or [] buttons select PHOTO,
and then press [M] button to conrm
3. Use [] or [] buttons to choose the le
4. Press PLAY [] button to start browsing the le
3.7.1 PHOTO Submenu
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
nd the following music submenus. Press [] or []
to choose, and then press [M] key to conrm each
submenus. Use the same technique to navigate inside
each of the submenus.
O Local Folder:
Under this directory, you can
choose to go up a folder level by
pressing PLAY [] to conrm.
And then you can choose to
folder you want to play
O Play Set:
You can choose between manual play and auto
play. For auto play, you can set the playing time from 1
to 10 seconds for each picture.
O Delete File:
Delete specic photo le you want.
O Delete All:
Delete all Photos using this option.
3.8 GAMES
The GAMES option allows playing games. To
activate this option please follow here below
instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu.
2. By using the [] or [] buttons to select
GAMES, and then press [M] button to enter the GAME
MENU.
Inside the game menu, there is one game for
you to use Russia Brick .and then press [M] button to
conrm
3.9 Setting
The SETTING option allows to access to MP3
Player setup system. To access at system setup please
follow here below instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 player, button, the screen
will display the main menu.
2. By using the [] or [] select SYSTEM option
then press [M] button to enter the SYSTEM MENU.
3. By using the [] or [] select the system
setup parameter and press MENU [M] button.
The parameters available in the setup system are:
Clock: This option allows setting of the system
date and time.
LCD set: This option allows setting the brightness,
darkly and black screen of the LCD panel.
Language: This option allows setting the
Language of the User Interface.
Power O: This option allows setting the o time
and sleep time.
Replay mode:
Online mode:
Memory Info: This option allows checking the
memory usage.
Firmware Ver: This
option allows checking the
rmware version.
Firmware Upg: This
option allows to upgrade the
rmware.
3.9.1 Clock
This option allows
setting of the system date
and time. The upper case display the date in Year :
Month : Day Format, and the lower case display the
Time in Hour : Minute : Second format. To change the
Date and time, please follow here below instruction:
1. Under the SYSTEM MENU, choose SYSTEM TIME
by pressing [] or [] and press [M] to conrm
2. Press [VOL+] and [VOL-] to choose the
parameter you want to adjust
3. press [] or [] to change the value. Press
MENU [M] to conrm.
3.9.2 Power O Set
This option allows setting the o time and sleep
time. By setting O Time, it is possible to enable (30s,
60s, 90s and 120s) or disable the power management
features to automatically shut down your player if it is
not used. By setting Sleep Time, it is possible to set
power o the unit after a specied time (30s, 60s, 90s,
120s) from the moment you conrm about this
selection.
To modify this parameter please follow here
below instruction:
1. Under the SYSTEM MENU, choose POWER OFF
by pressing [] or [] and press PLAY [].
2. By using the [] or [] buttons, select OFF
TIME or SLEEP TIME and press [M] button.
3. Choose the desired OFF TIME or SLEEP TIME
and press [M] to conrm.
Memory info
The gure presents the total volume of the disc,
the percentage present the percentage between used
space and total space.
Specication
Notice: You will not informed if the production design
and the specication.
16
3. Main Menu
After powering on the MP3 player, you can see
the main menu with 9 submenus (optional), which
allow you to select dierent functions and options.
By using the [] or [] buttons, you can select
the desire option, and then press M button to conrm
the selection.
To access at the main menu while you are inside
any of these submenus, press and hold MENU [M]
switch for a few seconds. (Short pressing the MENU
[M] switch usually opens the submenu option of each
submenus)
The available options are:
Music: Select this option to play song.
Movie: Select this option to play AMV video.
Record: Select this option to record voice
messages by the microphone inside.
Play: Select this option to play recorded voice
message.
Radio: Select this option to use the FM radio.
Text: Select this option to read text.
Games: Select this option to play game.
Picture: Select this option to browse and see
photos.
Setting: Select this option to access at system
setup.
3.1 Music Mode
The music player option allows playing songs. To
activate this option please follow here below
instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3
Player, the screen will display
the main menu
2. By using [] or []
buttons, select MUSIC PLAY
option then press [M] button.
3. Press PLAY []
button to start to play the
rst song available.
4. Press and hold M key to return to previous
menu.
3.1.1 Key Function at Music Mode
During the song play it is possible to activate the
following controls.
PLAY [Ź]: Press the play [] to start to play
a song. Press the play button again to pause the song.
To restart to play the song press play button again.
Hold the play button for longer time will
eventually turn o the player
REW & FFWD [] Press [] or [] to select the
previous or the next song.
Press and Hold the [] or [] buttons to rewind
or fast forward the song.
Volume (VOL+ and VOL-): Press [VOL+] button to
increase the volume and press [VOL-] button to
decrease the volume.
3.1.2 Music Mode
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
enter into each submenus. Press [] or [] to choose,
and then press MENU [M] key to conrm each
submenus. Use the same technique to navigate inside
each of the submenus.
In both modes (playing mode and stop mode)
you can nd the following submenus:
O Now playing
O All songs
O Album
O Artists
O Genre: Dance Music, Pop, Symphony,
Unknown Genre
O Local folder
O Create playlist
O Setting
- Repeat: Normal, Repeat one, Folder, Repeat
folder, Repeat all, Random, Intro
- Equalizer: Natural, Rock, Pop, Classic, Soft, Jazz,
DBB
- Tempo rate: ASS speed set, FFREV speed set
- Replay mode
- Bookmark: Bookmark select, Bookmark delete,
Bookmark add, Exit
O Delete le
O Delete all
3.2 Movie
The Movie MODE allows to play movies in AMV
Format. To activate this option please follow here
below
instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu.
2. By using [] or [] buttons,
select Movie option then press PLAY
[M] button.
3. Press PLAY [] button to
start to play the rst movie available.
Note:The Movie Player only
plays AMV les, you need conversion
from other le format in order to
watch the movie you like.
3.2.1 Key Function at Movie Mode
During the song play it is possible to activate the
following controls.
PLAY [Ź]: Press the PLAY [] to start to play
a movie. Press the play button again to pause the
movie. To restart to play the movie press play button
again.
Hold the play button for longer time will
eventually turn o the player
REW & FFWD [] Press [] or [] to select
the previous or the next movie.
Press and Hold the [] or [] buttons to rewind
or fast forward the movie.
Volume (VOL+ and VOL-): Press [VOL+] button to
increase the volume and press [VOL-] button to
decrease the volume.
3.2.2 AMV Submenu
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
nd the following AMV submenus. Press [] or []to
choose, and then press MENU [M] key to conrm each
submenus. Use the same technique to navigate inside
each of the submenus.
O Now playing
O Local Folder:
Under this directory, you can choose to go up a
folder level by pressing MENU [M] to conrm. And
then you can choose the folder you want to play
O Repeat
O Delete File:
Delete specic video you want.
O Delete All:
Delete all videos using this option.
3.3 Record (Voice messages recorder)
This option allows to record voice messages by
using the microphone inside. To record voice
message, please follow here below instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu.
2. By using [] or [] buttons, select RECORD
option then press PLAY [M] button.
3. Press PLAY [] button
to start to recording.
4. You can listen to your
wav le under the VOICE
submenu.
During recording, Press the
PLAY [] to start recording.
Press the play button again to
pause recording. Hold the PLAY
[] / M button for longer time will eventually stop
recording.
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
nd the LOCAL FOLDER and REC TYPE. Press [] or
[] to choose, and then press MENU [M] key to
conrm each submenus. Use the same technique to
navigate inside each of the submenus.
1. Under the LOCAL FOLDER submenu, you can
choose to go up a folder level by pressing [M] to
conrm. And then you can choose the folder you want
to play
2. Under the REC format submenu, you can
choose the recording format including
ACT/MP3/WAV/WMA .
3.4 Play (Voice Messages Player)
The play option allows to play the voice
messages recorded by the MP3 Player. To activate this
option, please follow here below instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu.
2. By using [] or [] buttons, select VOICE
option then press PLAY [M] button.
3. Press PLAY [] button to start to play the
rst recording available.
3.4.1 Key Function at PLAY
Mode
During the recording play it is
possible to activate the following
controls.
PLAY [Ź]: Press the PLAY
[] to start to play a recording.
Press the play button again to pause the recording. To
restart to play the recording press play button again.
Hold the play button for longer time will
eventually turn o the player
REW & FFWD [] Press [] or [] to select
the previous or the next recording.
Press and Hold the [] or [] buttons to rewind
or fast forward the recording.
Volume (VOL+ and VOL-): Press [VOL+] button to
increase the volume and press [VOL-] button to
decrease the volume.
3.4.2 PLAY Submenu
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
nd the following music submenus. Press [] and []
to choose, and then press MENU [M] key to conrm
each submenus. Use the same technique to navigate
inside each of the submenus.
O Local Folder:
Under this directory, you can choose to go up a
folder level by pressing MENU [M] to conrm. And
then you can choose the folder you want to play
O Setting:
- Repeat: Normal, Repeat one, Folfer, Repeat
folder, Repeat all, Random, Intro
- Tempo rate: You can alter the Tempo Rate of the
Song.
- Replay
O Delete File:
Delete specic voice le you want.
O Delete All:
Delete all voice les using this option.
3.5 FM (FM Radio)
When the FM Radio mode is activated it is
possible to hear radio programs.
This option allows us to enjoy FM radio
programs. To use it, please follow here below
instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu
2. By using [] or [] buttons, select FM option
then press [M] button to conrm.
3. If there are preset channels, press PLAY []
button to play the rst channel, press again for the
next channel.
3.5.1 FM Submenu
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
nd the following FM submenus. Press [] and [] to
choose, and then press MENU [M]key to conrm each
submenus. Use the same technique to navigate inside
each of the submenus.
Here below you will nd the FM radio option list.
SAVE: Select this option to save radio channels
DELETE: Select this option to delete radio
channels.
DELETE ALL: Select this option to delete all radio
channels.
AUTO SEARCH: Select this option to start
auto-searching for radio channels.
NORMAL BAND: Select this option to activate
normal FM band.
3.5.2 Automatic Search
To scan automatically all
the available channels, please
follow here below instruction:
1. When the FM Mode is
activated, press MENU [M]
button to select AUTO SEARCH option.
2. Press [M] button to start the automatic search.
The MP3 Player will store the rst 20 radio programs
available.
3.5.3 Manual Search and Storing Channels
To scan manually the frequencies please follow
here below instruction:
1. When the FM Mode is activated, long pressing
the [] or [] buttons to start auto scanning.
Scanning stops as an available channel is found.
2. By short pressing the [] or [] buttons to
step-up scanning.
3. Press MENU [M] button to select SAVE option.
4. Press PLAY [] and this specic channel will
be saved as the last channel
5. Repeat the step from 1 to 4 for each desired
radio program by keeping in mind that the MP3 Player
has 20 memory positions.
3.5.4 FM Radio Record (REC)
To record FM radio program please follow here
below instruction:
1. When the FM Radio Mode is activated, press
MENU [M] button to select FINE REC option.
2. P
ress PLAY [] button to start the recording.
3. Press PLAY [] button to pause the
recording and press it again to restart the recording.
4. To stop and save the recording, long press [M]
button, will return to FM mode.
3.6 E-BooK
The Ebook option allows reading text le. To
activate this option please follow here below
instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu.
2. By using the [] or [] buttons select E-book,
and then press [M] button to conrm
3. Use [] or [] buttons to choose the le
4. Press PLAY [] button to start reading the
le
3.6.1 E-Book Submenu
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
nd the following music submenus. Press [] or []
to choose, and then press [M] key to conrm each
submenus. Use the same technique to navigate inside
each of the submenus.
Before you open any le, if you press M, it will
appears the following submenu:
O Local Folder:
Under this directory, you
can choose to go up a folder
level by pressing MENU [M] to
conrm. And then you can
choose to folder you want to
play
O Play Set:
You can choose between manual play and auto
play. For auto play, you can set the playing time from 1
to 10 seconds for each page of the E-book.
O Delete File:
Delete specic text le you want.
O Delete All:
Delete all text les using this option.
While reading, if you press and hold M, you can
select from:
- Bookmark select
- Bookmark delete
- Bookmark add
3.7 PHOTO
The Photo option allows browsing JPG le. To
activate this option please follow here below
instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu.
2. By using the [] or [] buttons select PHOTO,
and then press [M] button to conrm
3. Use [] or [] buttons to choose the le
4. Press PLAY [] button to start browsing the le
3.7.1 PHOTO Submenu
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
nd the following music submenus. Press [] or []
to choose, and then press [M] key to conrm each
submenus. Use the same technique to navigate inside
each of the submenus.
O Local Folder:
Under this directory, you can
choose to go up a folder level by
pressing PLAY [] to conrm.
And then you can choose to
folder you want to play
O Play Set:
You can choose between manual play and auto
play. For auto play, you can set the playing time from 1
to 10 seconds for each picture.
O Delete File:
Delete specic photo le you want.
O Delete All:
Delete all Photos using this option.
3.8 GAMES
The GAMES option allows playing games. To
activate this option please follow here below
instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu.
2. By using the [] or [] buttons to select
GAMES, and then press [M] button to enter the GAME
MENU.
Inside the game menu, there is one game for
you to use Russia Brick .and then press [M] button to
conrm
3.9 Setting
The SETTING option allows to access to MP3
Player setup system. To access at system setup please
follow here below instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 player, button, the screen
will display the main menu.
2. By using the [] or [] select SYSTEM option
then press [M] button to enter the SYSTEM MENU.
3. By using the [] or [] select the system
setup parameter and press MENU [M] button.
The parameters available in the setup system are:
Clock: This option allows setting of the system
date and time.
LCD set: This option allows setting the brightness,
darkly and black screen of the LCD panel.
Language: This option allows setting the
Language of the User Interface.
Power O: This option allows setting the o time
and sleep time.
Replay mode:
Online mode:
Memory Info: This option allows checking the
memory usage.
Firmware Ver: This
option allows checking the
rmware version.
Firmware Upg: This
option allows to upgrade the
rmware.
3.9.1 Clock
This option allows
setting of the system date
and time. The upper case display the date in Year :
Month : Day Format, and the lower case display the
Time in Hour : Minute : Second format. To change the
Date and time, please follow here below instruction:
1. Under the SYSTEM MENU, choose SYSTEM TIME
by pressing [] or [] and press [M] to conrm
2. Press [VOL+] and [VOL-] to choose the
parameter you want to adjust
3. press [] or [] to change the value. Press
MENU [M] to conrm.
3.9.2 Power O Set
This option allows setting the o time and sleep
time. By setting O Time, it is possible to enable (30s,
60s, 90s and 120s) or disable the power management
features to automatically shut down your player if it is
not used. By setting Sleep Time, it is possible to set
power o the unit after a specied time (30s, 60s, 90s,
120s) from the moment you conrm about this
selection.
To modify this parameter please follow here
below instruction:
1. Under the SYSTEM MENU, choose POWER OFF
by pressing [] or [] and press PLAY [].
2. By using the [] or [] buttons, select OFF
TIME or SLEEP TIME and press [M] button.
3. Choose the desired OFF TIME or SLEEP TIME
and press [M] to conrm.
Memory info
The gure presents the total volume of the disc,
the percentage present the percentage between used
space and total space.
Specication
Notice: You will not informed if the production design
and the specication.
17
3. Main Menu
After powering on the MP3 player, you can see
the main menu with 9 submenus (optional), which
allow you to select dierent functions and options.
By using the [] or [] buttons, you can select
the desire option, and then press M button to conrm
the selection.
To access at the main menu while you are inside
any of these submenus, press and hold MENU [M]
switch for a few seconds. (Short pressing the MENU
[M] switch usually opens the submenu option of each
submenus)
The available options are:
Music: Select this option to play song.
Movie: Select this option to play AMV video.
Record: Select this option to record voice
messages by the microphone inside.
Play: Select this option to play recorded voice
message.
Radio: Select this option to use the FM radio.
Text: Select this option to read text.
Games: Select this option to play game.
Picture: Select this option to browse and see
photos.
Setting: Select this option to access at system
setup.
3.1 Music Mode
The music player option allows playing songs. To
activate this option please follow here below
instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3
Player, the screen will display
the main menu
2. By using [] or []
buttons, select MUSIC PLAY
option then press [M] button.
3. Press PLAY []
button to start to play the
rst song available.
4. Press and hold M key to return to previous
menu.
3.1.1 Key Function at Music Mode
During the song play it is possible to activate the
following controls.
PLAY [Ź]: Press the play [] to start to play
a song. Press the play button again to pause the song.
To restart to play the song press play button again.
Hold the play button for longer time will
eventually turn o the player
REW & FFWD [] Press [] or [] to select the
previous or the next song.
Press and Hold the [] or [] buttons to rewind
or fast forward the song.
Volume (VOL+ and VOL-): Press [VOL+] button to
increase the volume and press [VOL-] button to
decrease the volume.
3.1.2 Music Mode
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
enter into each submenus. Press [] or [] to choose,
and then press MENU [M] key to conrm each
submenus. Use the same technique to navigate inside
each of the submenus.
In both modes (playing mode and stop mode)
you can nd the following submenus:
O Now playing
O All songs
O Album
O Artists
O Genre: Dance Music, Pop, Symphony,
Unknown Genre
O Local folder
O Create playlist
O Setting
- Repeat: Normal, Repeat one, Folder, Repeat
folder, Repeat all, Random, Intro
- Equalizer: Natural, Rock, Pop, Classic, Soft, Jazz,
DBB
- Tempo rate: ASS speed set, FFREV speed set
- Replay mode
- Bookmark: Bookmark select, Bookmark delete,
Bookmark add, Exit
O Delete le
O Delete all
3.2 Movie
The Movie MODE allows to play movies in AMV
Format. To activate this option please follow here
below
instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu.
2. By using [] or [] buttons,
select Movie option then press PLAY
[M] button.
3. Press PLAY [] button to
start to play the rst movie available.
Note:The Movie Player only
plays AMV les, you need conversion
from other le format in order to
watch the movie you like.
3.2.1 Key Function at Movie Mode
During the song play it is possible to activate the
following controls.
PLAY [Ź]: Press the PLAY [] to start to play
a movie. Press the play button again to pause the
movie. To restart to play the movie press play button
again.
Hold the play button for longer time will
eventually turn o the player
REW & FFWD [] Press [] or [] to select
the previous or the next movie.
Press and Hold the [] or [] buttons to rewind
or fast forward the movie.
Volume (VOL+ and VOL-): Press [VOL+] button to
increase the volume and press [VOL-] button to
decrease the volume.
3.2.2 AMV Submenu
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
nd the following AMV submenus. Press [] or []to
choose, and then press MENU [M] key to conrm each
submenus. Use the same technique to navigate inside
each of the submenus.
O Now playing
O Local Folder:
Under this directory, you can choose to go up a
folder level by pressing MENU [M] to conrm. And
then you can choose the folder you want to play
O Repeat
O Delete File:
Delete specic video you want.
O Delete All:
Delete all videos using this option.
3.3 Record (Voice messages recorder)
This option allows to record voice messages by
using the microphone inside. To record voice
message, please follow here below instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu.
2. By using [] or [] buttons, select RECORD
option then press PLAY [M] button.
3. Press PLAY [] button
to start to recording.
4. You can listen to your
wav le under the VOICE
submenu.
During recording, Press the
PLAY [] to start recording.
Press the play button again to
pause recording. Hold the PLAY
[] / M button for longer time will eventually stop
recording.
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
nd the LOCAL FOLDER and REC TYPE. Press [] or
[] to choose, and then press MENU [M] key to
conrm each submenus. Use the same technique to
navigate inside each of the submenus.
1. Under the LOCAL FOLDER submenu, you can
choose to go up a folder level by pressing [M] to
conrm. And then you can choose the folder you want
to play
2. Under the REC format submenu, you can
choose the recording format including
ACT/MP3/WAV/WMA .
3.4 Play (Voice Messages Player)
The play option allows to play the voice
messages recorded by the MP3 Player. To activate this
option, please follow here below instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu.
2. By using [] or [] buttons, select VOICE
option then press PLAY [M] button.
3. Press PLAY [] button to start to play the
rst recording available.
3.4.1 Key Function at PLAY
Mode
During the recording play it is
possible to activate the following
controls.
PLAY [Ź]: Press the PLAY
[] to start to play a recording.
Press the play button again to pause the recording. To
restart to play the recording press play button again.
Hold the play button for longer time will
eventually turn o the player
REW & FFWD [] Press [] or [] to select
the previous or the next recording.
Press and Hold the [] or [] buttons to rewind
or fast forward the recording.
Volume (VOL+ and VOL-): Press [VOL+] button to
increase the volume and press [VOL-] button to
decrease the volume.
3.4.2 PLAY Submenu
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
nd the following music submenus. Press [] and []
to choose, and then press MENU [M] key to conrm
each submenus. Use the same technique to navigate
inside each of the submenus.
O Local Folder:
Under this directory, you can choose to go up a
folder level by pressing MENU [M] to conrm. And
then you can choose the folder you want to play
O Setting:
- Repeat: Normal, Repeat one, Folfer, Repeat
folder, Repeat all, Random, Intro
- Tempo rate: You can alter the Tempo Rate of the
Song.
- Replay
O Delete File:
Delete specic voice le you want.
O Delete All:
Delete all voice les using this option.
3.5 FM (FM Radio)
When the FM Radio mode is activated it is
possible to hear radio programs.
This option allows us to enjoy FM radio
programs. To use it, please follow here below
instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu
2. By using [] or [] buttons, select FM option
then press [M] button to conrm.
3. If there are preset channels, press PLAY []
button to play the rst channel, press again for the
next channel.
3.5.1 FM Submenu
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
nd the following FM submenus. Press [] and [] to
choose, and then press MENU [M]key to conrm each
submenus. Use the same technique to navigate inside
each of the submenus.
Here below you will nd the FM radio option list.
SAVE: Select this option to save radio channels
DELETE: Select this option to delete radio
channels.
DELETE ALL: Select this option to delete all radio
channels.
AUTO SEARCH: Select this option to start
auto-searching for radio channels.
NORMAL BAND: Select this option to activate
normal FM band.
3.5.2 Automatic Search
To scan automatically all
the available channels, please
follow here below instruction:
1. When the FM Mode is
activated, press MENU [M]
button to select AUTO SEARCH option.
2. Press [M] button to start the automatic search.
The MP3 Player will store the rst 20 radio programs
available.
3.5.3 Manual Search and Storing Channels
To scan manually the frequencies please follow
here below instruction:
1. When the FM Mode is activated, long pressing
the [] or [] buttons to start auto scanning.
Scanning stops as an available channel is found.
2. By short pressing the [] or [] buttons to
step-up scanning.
3. Press MENU [M] button to select SAVE option.
4. Press PLAY [] and this specic channel will
be saved as the last channel
5. Repeat the step from 1 to 4 for each desired
radio program by keeping in mind that the MP3 Player
has 20 memory positions.
3.5.4 FM Radio Record (REC)
To record FM radio program please follow here
below instruction:
1. When the FM Radio Mode is activated, press
MENU [M] button to select FINE REC option.
2. P
ress PLAY [] button to start the recording.
3. Press PLAY [] button to pause the
recording and press it again to restart the recording.
4. To stop and save the recording, long press [M]
button, will return to FM mode.
3.6 E-BooK
The Ebook option allows reading text le. To
activate this option please follow here below
instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu.
2. By using the [] or [] buttons select E-book,
and then press [M] button to conrm
3. Use [] or [] buttons to choose the le
4. Press PLAY [] button to start reading the
le
3.6.1 E-Book Submenu
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
nd the following music submenus. Press [] or []
to choose, and then press [M] key to conrm each
submenus. Use the same technique to navigate inside
each of the submenus.
Before you open any le, if you press M, it will
appears the following submenu:
O Local Folder:
Under this directory, you
can choose to go up a folder
level by pressing MENU [M] to
conrm. And then you can
choose to folder you want to
play
O Play Set:
You can choose between manual play and auto
play. For auto play, you can set the playing time from 1
to 10 seconds for each page of the E-book.
O Delete File:
Delete specic text le you want.
O Delete All:
Delete all text les using this option.
While reading, if you press and hold M, you can
select from:
- Bookmark select
- Bookmark delete
- Bookmark add
3.7 PHOTO
The Photo option allows browsing JPG le. To
activate this option please follow here below
instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu.
2. By using the [] or [] buttons select PHOTO,
and then press [M] button to conrm
3. Use [] or [] buttons to choose the le
4. Press PLAY [] button to start browsing the le
3.7.1 PHOTO Submenu
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
nd the following music submenus. Press [] or []
to choose, and then press [M] key to conrm each
submenus. Use the same technique to navigate inside
each of the submenus.
O Local Folder:
Under this directory, you can
choose to go up a folder level by
pressing PLAY [] to conrm.
And then you can choose to
folder you want to play
O Play Set:
You can choose between manual play and auto
play. For auto play, you can set the playing time from 1
to 10 seconds for each picture.
O Delete File:
Delete specic photo le you want.
O Delete All:
Delete all Photos using this option.
3.8 GAMES
The GAMES option allows playing games. To
activate this option please follow here below
instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu.
2. By using the [] or [] buttons to select
GAMES, and then press [M] button to enter the GAME
MENU.
Inside the game menu, there is one game for
you to use Russia Brick .and then press [M] button to
conrm
3.9 Setting
The SETTING option allows to access to MP3
Player setup system. To access at system setup please
follow here below instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 player, button, the screen
will display the main menu.
2. By using the [] or [] select SYSTEM option
then press [M] button to enter the SYSTEM MENU.
3. By using the [] or [] select the system
setup parameter and press MENU [M] button.
The parameters available in the setup system are:
Clock: This option allows setting of the system
date and time.
LCD set: This option allows setting the brightness,
darkly and black screen of the LCD panel.
Language: This option allows setting the
Language of the User Interface.
Power O: This option allows setting the o time
and sleep time.
Replay mode:
Online mode:
Memory Info: This option allows checking the
memory usage.
Firmware Ver: This
option allows checking the
rmware version.
Firmware Upg: This
option allows to upgrade the
rmware.
3.9.1 Clock
This option allows
setting of the system date
and time. The upper case display the date in Year :
Month : Day Format, and the lower case display the
Time in Hour : Minute : Second format. To change the
Date and time, please follow here below instruction:
1. Under the SYSTEM MENU, choose SYSTEM TIME
by pressing [] or [] and press [M] to conrm
2. Press [VOL+] and [VOL-] to choose the
parameter you want to adjust
3. press [] or [] to change the value. Press
MENU [M] to conrm.
3.9.2 Power O Set
This option allows setting the o time and sleep
time. By setting O Time, it is possible to enable (30s,
60s, 90s and 120s) or disable the power management
features to automatically shut down your player if it is
not used. By setting Sleep Time, it is possible to set
power o the unit after a specied time (30s, 60s, 90s,
120s) from the moment you conrm about this
selection.
To modify this parameter please follow here
below instruction:
1. Under the SYSTEM MENU, choose POWER OFF
by pressing [] or [] and press PLAY [].
2. By using the [] or [] buttons, select OFF
TIME or SLEEP TIME and press [M] button.
3. Choose the desired OFF TIME or SLEEP TIME
and press [M] to conrm.
Memory info
The gure presents the total volume of the disc,
the percentage present the percentage between used
space and total space.
Specication
Notice: You will not informed if the production design
and the specication.
18
3. Main Menu
After powering on the MP3 player, you can see
the main menu with 9 submenus (optional), which
allow you to select dierent functions and options.
By using the [] or [] buttons, you can select
the desire option, and then press M button to conrm
the selection.
To access at the main menu while you are inside
any of these submenus, press and hold MENU [M]
switch for a few seconds. (Short pressing the MENU
[M] switch usually opens the submenu option of each
submenus)
The available options are:
Music: Select this option to play song.
Movie: Select this option to play AMV video.
Record: Select this option to record voice
messages by the microphone inside.
Play: Select this option to play recorded voice
message.
Radio: Select this option to use the FM radio.
Text: Select this option to read text.
Games: Select this option to play game.
Picture: Select this option to browse and see
photos.
Setting: Select this option to access at system
setup.
3.1 Music Mode
The music player option allows playing songs. To
activate this option please follow here below
instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3
Player, the screen will display
the main menu
2. By using [] or []
buttons, select MUSIC PLAY
option then press [M] button.
3. Press PLAY []
button to start to play the
rst song available.
4. Press and hold M key to return to previous
menu.
3.1.1 Key Function at Music Mode
During the song play it is possible to activate the
following controls.
PLAY [Ź]: Press the play [] to start to play
a song. Press the play button again to pause the song.
To restart to play the song press play button again.
Hold the play button for longer time will
eventually turn o the player
REW & FFWD [] Press [] or [] to select the
previous or the next song.
Press and Hold the [] or [] buttons to rewind
or fast forward the song.
Volume (VOL+ and VOL-): Press [VOL+] button to
increase the volume and press [VOL-] button to
decrease the volume.
3.1.2 Music Mode
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
enter into each submenus. Press [] or [] to choose,
and then press MENU [M] key to conrm each
submenus. Use the same technique to navigate inside
each of the submenus.
In both modes (playing mode and stop mode)
you can nd the following submenus:
O Now playing
O All songs
O Album
O Artists
O Genre: Dance Music, Pop, Symphony,
Unknown Genre
O Local folder
O Create playlist
O Setting
- Repeat: Normal, Repeat one, Folder, Repeat
folder, Repeat all, Random, Intro
- Equalizer: Natural, Rock, Pop, Classic, Soft, Jazz,
DBB
- Tempo rate: ASS speed set, FFREV speed set
- Replay mode
- Bookmark: Bookmark select, Bookmark delete,
Bookmark add, Exit
O Delete le
O Delete all
3.2 Movie
The Movie MODE allows to play movies in AMV
Format. To activate this option please follow here
below
instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu.
2. By using [] or [] buttons,
select Movie option then press PLAY
[M] button.
3. Press PLAY [] button to
start to play the rst movie available.
Note:The Movie Player only
plays AMV les, you need conversion
from other le format in order to
watch the movie you like.
3.2.1 Key Function at Movie Mode
During the song play it is possible to activate the
following controls.
PLAY [Ź]: Press the PLAY [] to start to play
a movie. Press the play button again to pause the
movie. To restart to play the movie press play button
again.
Hold the play button for longer time will
eventually turn o the player
REW & FFWD [] Press [] or [] to select
the previous or the next movie.
Press and Hold the [] or [] buttons to rewind
or fast forward the movie.
Volume (VOL+ and VOL-): Press [VOL+] button to
increase the volume and press [VOL-] button to
decrease the volume.
3.2.2 AMV Submenu
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
nd the following AMV submenus. Press [] or []to
choose, and then press MENU [M] key to conrm each
submenus. Use the same technique to navigate inside
each of the submenus.
O Now playing
O Local Folder:
Under this directory, you can choose to go up a
folder level by pressing MENU [M] to conrm. And
then you can choose the folder you want to play
O Repeat
O Delete File:
Delete specic video you want.
O Delete All:
Delete all videos using this option.
3.3 Record (Voice messages recorder)
This option allows to record voice messages by
using the microphone inside. To record voice
message, please follow here below instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu.
2. By using [] or [] buttons, select RECORD
option then press PLAY [M] button.
3. Press PLAY [] button
to start to recording.
4. You can listen to your
wav le under the VOICE
submenu.
During recording, Press the
PLAY [] to start recording.
Press the play button again to
pause recording. Hold the PLAY
[] / M button for longer time will eventually stop
recording.
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
nd the LOCAL FOLDER and REC TYPE. Press [] or
[] to choose, and then press MENU [M] key to
conrm each submenus. Use the same technique to
navigate inside each of the submenus.
1. Under the LOCAL FOLDER submenu, you can
choose to go up a folder level by pressing [M] to
conrm. And then you can choose the folder you want
to play
2. Under the REC format submenu, you can
choose the recording format including
ACT/MP3/WAV/WMA .
3.4 Play (Voice Messages Player)
The play option allows to play the voice
messages recorded by the MP3 Player. To activate this
option, please follow here below instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu.
2. By using [] or [] buttons, select VOICE
option then press PLAY [M] button.
3. Press PLAY [] button to start to play the
rst recording available.
3.4.1 Key Function at PLAY
Mode
During the recording play it is
possible to activate the following
controls.
PLAY [Ź]: Press the PLAY
[] to start to play a recording.
Press the play button again to pause the recording. To
restart to play the recording press play button again.
Hold the play button for longer time will
eventually turn o the player
REW & FFWD [] Press [] or [] to select
the previous or the next recording.
Press and Hold the [] or [] buttons to rewind
or fast forward the recording.
Volume (VOL+ and VOL-): Press [VOL+] button to
increase the volume and press [VOL-] button to
decrease the volume.
3.4.2 PLAY Submenu
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
nd the following music submenus. Press [] and []
to choose, and then press MENU [M] key to conrm
each submenus. Use the same technique to navigate
inside each of the submenus.
O Local Folder:
Under this directory, you can choose to go up a
folder level by pressing MENU [M] to conrm. And
then you can choose the folder you want to play
O Setting:
- Repeat: Normal, Repeat one, Folfer, Repeat
folder, Repeat all, Random, Intro
- Tempo rate: You can alter the Tempo Rate of the
Song.
- Replay
O Delete File:
Delete specic voice le you want.
O Delete All:
Delete all voice les using this option.
3.5 FM (FM Radio)
When the FM Radio mode is activated it is
possible to hear radio programs.
This option allows us to enjoy FM radio
programs. To use it, please follow here below
instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu
2. By using [] or [] buttons, select FM option
then press [M] button to conrm.
3. If there are preset channels, press PLAY []
button to play the rst channel, press again for the
next channel.
3.5.1 FM Submenu
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
nd the following FM submenus. Press [] and [] to
choose, and then press MENU [M]key to conrm each
submenus. Use the same technique to navigate inside
each of the submenus.
Here below you will nd the FM radio option list.
SAVE: Select this option to save radio channels
DELETE: Select this option to delete radio
channels.
DELETE ALL: Select this option to delete all radio
channels.
AUTO SEARCH: Select this option to start
auto-searching for radio channels.
NORMAL BAND: Select this option to activate
normal FM band.
3.5.2 Automatic Search
To scan automatically all
the available channels, please
follow here below instruction:
1. When the FM Mode is
activated, press MENU [M]
button to select AUTO SEARCH option.
2. Press [M] button to start the automatic search.
The MP3 Player will store the rst 20 radio programs
available.
3.5.3 Manual Search and Storing Channels
To scan manually the frequencies please follow
here below instruction:
1. When the FM Mode is activated, long pressing
the [] or [] buttons to start auto scanning.
Scanning stops as an available channel is found.
2. By short pressing the [] or [] buttons to
step-up scanning.
3. Press MENU [M] button to select SAVE option.
4. Press PLAY [] and this specic channel will
be saved as the last channel
5. Repeat the step from 1 to 4 for each desired
radio program by keeping in mind that the MP3 Player
has 20 memory positions.
3.5.4 FM Radio Record (REC)
To record FM radio program please follow here
below instruction:
1. When the FM Radio Mode is activated, press
MENU [M] button to select FINE REC option.
2. P
ress PLAY [] button to start the recording.
3. Press PLAY [] button to pause the
recording and press it again to restart the recording.
4. To stop and save the recording, long press [M]
button, will return to FM mode.
3.6 E-BooK
The Ebook option allows reading text le. To
activate this option please follow here below
instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu.
2. By using the [] or [] buttons select E-book,
and then press [M] button to conrm
3. Use [] or [] buttons to choose the le
4. Press PLAY [] button to start reading the
le
3.6.1 E-Book Submenu
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
nd the following music submenus. Press [] or []
to choose, and then press [M] key to conrm each
submenus. Use the same technique to navigate inside
each of the submenus.
Before you open any le, if you press M, it will
appears the following submenu:
O Local Folder:
Under this directory, you
can choose to go up a folder
level by pressing MENU [M] to
conrm. And then you can
choose to folder you want to
play
O Play Set:
You can choose between manual play and auto
play. For auto play, you can set the playing time from 1
to 10 seconds for each page of the E-book.
O Delete File:
Delete specic text le you want.
O Delete All:
Delete all text les using this option.
While reading, if you press and hold M, you can
select from:
- Bookmark select
- Bookmark delete
- Bookmark add
3.7 PHOTO
The Photo option allows browsing JPG le. To
activate this option please follow here below
instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu.
2. By using the [] or [] buttons select PHOTO,
and then press [M] button to conrm
3. Use [] or [] buttons to choose the le
4. Press PLAY [] button to start browsing the le
3.7.1 PHOTO Submenu
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
nd the following music submenus. Press [] or []
to choose, and then press [M] key to conrm each
submenus. Use the same technique to navigate inside
each of the submenus.
O Local Folder:
Under this directory, you can
choose to go up a folder level by
pressing PLAY [] to conrm.
And then you can choose to
folder you want to play
O Play Set:
You can choose between manual play and auto
play. For auto play, you can set the playing time from 1
to 10 seconds for each picture.
O Delete File:
Delete specic photo le you want.
O Delete All:
Delete all Photos using this option.
3.8 GAMES
The GAMES option allows playing games. To
activate this option please follow here below
instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu.
2. By using the [] or [] buttons to select
GAMES, and then press [M] button to enter the GAME
MENU.
Inside the game menu, there is one game for
you to use Russia Brick .and then press [M] button to
conrm
3.9 Setting
The SETTING option allows to access to MP3
Player setup system. To access at system setup please
follow here below instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 player, button, the screen
will display the main menu.
2. By using the [] or [] select SYSTEM option
then press [M] button to enter the SYSTEM MENU.
3. By using the [] or [] select the system
setup parameter and press MENU [M] button.
The parameters available in the setup system are:
Clock: This option allows setting of the system
date and time.
LCD set: This option allows setting the brightness,
darkly and black screen of the LCD panel.
Language: This option allows setting the
Language of the User Interface.
Power O: This option allows setting the o time
and sleep time.
Replay mode:
Online mode:
Memory Info: This option allows checking the
memory usage.
Firmware Ver: This
option allows checking the
rmware version.
Firmware Upg: This
option allows to upgrade the
rmware.
3.9.1 Clock
This option allows
setting of the system date
and time. The upper case display the date in Year :
Month : Day Format, and the lower case display the
Time in Hour : Minute : Second format. To change the
Date and time, please follow here below instruction:
1. Under the SYSTEM MENU, choose SYSTEM TIME
by pressing [] or [] and press [M] to conrm
2. Press [VOL+] and [VOL-] to choose the
parameter you want to adjust
3. press [] or [] to change the value. Press
MENU [M] to conrm.
3.9.2 Power O Set
This option allows setting the o time and sleep
time. By setting O Time, it is possible to enable (30s,
60s, 90s and 120s) or disable the power management
features to automatically shut down your player if it is
not used. By setting Sleep Time, it is possible to set
power o the unit after a specied time (30s, 60s, 90s,
120s) from the moment you conrm about this
selection.
To modify this parameter please follow here
below instruction:
1. Under the SYSTEM MENU, choose POWER OFF
by pressing [] or [] and press PLAY [].
2. By using the [] or [] buttons, select OFF
TIME or SLEEP TIME and press [M] button.
3. Choose the desired OFF TIME or SLEEP TIME
and press [M] to conrm.
Memory info
The gure presents the total volume of the disc,
the percentage present the percentage between used
space and total space.
Specication
Notice: You will not informed if the production design
and the specication.
19
the percentage present the percentage between used
space and total space.
20
Notice: You will not informed if the production design
Size 76*39*8MM
Weight 36.5g
Screen Full color display, 1.8 inch screen, 262K color
Comaputer connection High-speed USB 2.0 FSFlash disk
Build-in memory 512MB.1GB, 2GB,4GB ,8GB
Supply power The longest playing time is 10hours
REC Sample ratio 8KHz
Recording format WAV(64K bps)󵚞
TCA (8K bps)
Recording time 35hoursACT
128M Flash
MP3󵚞WMA󵚞ASF The biggest (L)10mW(R)
outputting ratio 10mW(32Ohm)
MP3 bit rate 8K bps – 320K bps
WMA󵚞ASF bit rate 5K bps – 384K bps
Frequency corresponding 20Hz-20KHz
Bd58 RNS
<+_0.05
FM radio Frequency scope 76 MHz-90MHz/
zHM801 - zHM78
Radio stations 20+20
The biggest output (L) 10mW +(R)
rate of earphone 10mW (320)
Bd54 RNS
Music format MP1󵚞MP2󵚞MP3󵚞WMA󵚞WAVAPE
Temperature -5 to 40 degree centigrade
Multi languages Traditional Chinese, English, simple Chinese,
German, French, Italian and Spanish etc
Operation system Windows98/SE/ME/2K/XP󵚞Mac OS 10󵚞
Linux 2.4.2
21
3. Main Menu
After powering on the MP3 player, you can see
the main menu with 9 submenus (optional), which
allow you to select dierent functions and options.
By using the [] or [] buttons, you can select
the desire option, and then press M button to conrm
the selection.
To access at the main menu while you are inside
any of these submenus, press and hold MENU [M]
switch for a few seconds. (Short pressing the MENU
[M] switch usually opens the submenu option of each
submenus)
The available options are:
Music: Select this option to play song.
Movie: Select this option to play AMV video.
Record: Select this option to record voice
messages by the microphone inside.
Play: Select this option to play recorded voice
message.
Radio: Select this option to use the FM radio.
Text: Select this option to read text.
Games: Select this option to play game.
Picture: Select this option to browse and see
photos.
Setting: Select this option to access at system
setup.
3.1 Music Mode
The music player option allows playing songs. To
activate this option please follow here below
instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3
Player, the screen will display
the main menu
2. By using [] or []
buttons, select MUSIC PLAY
option then press [M] button.
3. Press PLAY []
button to start to play the
rst song available.
4. Press and hold M key to return to previous
menu.
3.1.1 Key Function at Music Mode
During the song play it is possible to activate the
following controls.
PLAY [Ź]: Press the play [] to start to play
a song. Press the play button again to pause the song.
To restart to play the song press play button again.
Hold the play button for longer time will
eventually turn o the player
REW & FFWD [] Press [] or [] to select the
previous or the next song.
Press and Hold the [] or [] buttons to rewind
or fast forward the song.
Volume (VOL+ and VOL-): Press [VOL+] button to
increase the volume and press [VOL-] button to
decrease the volume.
3.1.2 Music Mode
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
enter into each submenus. Press [] or [] to choose,
and then press MENU [M] key to conrm each
submenus. Use the same technique to navigate inside
each of the submenus.
In both modes (playing mode and stop mode)
you can nd the following submenus:
O Now playing
O All songs
O Album
O Artists
O Genre: Dance Music, Pop, Symphony,
Unknown Genre
O Local folder
O Create playlist
O Setting
- Repeat: Normal, Repeat one, Folder, Repeat
folder, Repeat all, Random, Intro
- Equalizer: Natural, Rock, Pop, Classic, Soft, Jazz,
DBB
- Tempo rate: ASS speed set, FFREV speed set
- Replay mode
- Bookmark: Bookmark select, Bookmark delete,
Bookmark add, Exit
O Delete le
O Delete all
3.2 Movie
The Movie MODE allows to play movies in AMV
Format. To activate this option please follow here
below
instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu.
2. By using [] or [] buttons,
select Movie option then press PLAY
[M] button.
3. Press PLAY [] button to
start to play the rst movie available.
Note:The Movie Player only
plays AMV les, you need conversion
from other le format in order to
watch the movie you like.
3.2.1 Key Function at Movie Mode
During the song play it is possible to activate the
following controls.
PLAY [Ź]: Press the PLAY [] to start to play
a movie. Press the play button again to pause the
movie. To restart to play the movie press play button
again.
Hold the play button for longer time will
eventually turn o the player
REW & FFWD [] Press [] or [] to select
the previous or the next movie.
Press and Hold the [] or [] buttons to rewind
or fast forward the movie.
Volume (VOL+ and VOL-): Press [VOL+] button to
increase the volume and press [VOL-] button to
decrease the volume.
3.2.2 AMV Submenu
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
nd the following AMV submenus. Press [] or []to
choose, and then press MENU [M] key to conrm each
submenus. Use the same technique to navigate inside
each of the submenus.
O Now playing
O Local Folder:
Under this directory, you can choose to go up a
folder level by pressing MENU [M] to conrm. And
then you can choose the folder you want to play
O Repeat
O Delete File:
Delete specic video you want.
O Delete All:
Delete all videos using this option.
3.3 Record (Voice messages recorder)
This option allows to record voice messages by
using the microphone inside. To record voice
message, please follow here below instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu.
2. By using [] or [] buttons, select RECORD
option then press PLAY [M] button.
3. Press PLAY [] button
to start to recording.
4. You can listen to your
wav le under the VOICE
submenu.
During recording, Press the
PLAY [] to start recording.
Press the play button again to
pause recording. Hold the PLAY
[] / M button for longer time will eventually stop
recording.
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
nd the LOCAL FOLDER and REC TYPE. Press [] or
[] to choose, and then press MENU [M] key to
conrm each submenus. Use the same technique to
navigate inside each of the submenus.
1. Under the LOCAL FOLDER submenu, you can
choose to go up a folder level by pressing [M] to
conrm. And then you can choose the folder you want
to play
2. Under the REC format submenu, you can
choose the recording format including
ACT/MP3/WAV/WMA .
3.4 Play (Voice Messages Player)
The play option allows to play the voice
messages recorded by the MP3 Player. To activate this
option, please follow here below instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu.
2. By using [] or [] buttons, select VOICE
option then press PLAY [M] button.
3. Press PLAY [] button to start to play the
rst recording available.
3.4.1 Key Function at PLAY
Mode
During the recording play it is
possible to activate the following
controls.
PLAY [Ź]: Press the PLAY
[] to start to play a recording.
Press the play button again to pause the recording. To
restart to play the recording press play button again.
Hold the play button for longer time will
eventually turn o the player
REW & FFWD [] Press [] or [] to select
the previous or the next recording.
Press and Hold the [] or [] buttons to rewind
or fast forward the recording.
Volume (VOL+ and VOL-): Press [VOL+] button to
increase the volume and press [VOL-] button to
decrease the volume.
3.4.2 PLAY Submenu
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
nd the following music submenus. Press [] and []
to choose, and then press MENU [M] key to conrm
each submenus. Use the same technique to navigate
inside each of the submenus.
O Local Folder:
Under this directory, you can choose to go up a
folder level by pressing MENU [M] to conrm. And
then you can choose the folder you want to play
O Setting:
- Repeat: Normal, Repeat one, Folfer, Repeat
folder, Repeat all, Random, Intro
- Tempo rate: You can alter the Tempo Rate of the
Song.
- Replay
O Delete File:
Delete specic voice le you want.
O Delete All:
Delete all voice les using this option.
3.5 FM (FM Radio)
When the FM Radio mode is activated it is
possible to hear radio programs.
This option allows us to enjoy FM radio
programs. To use it, please follow here below
instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu
2. By using [] or [] buttons, select FM option
then press [M] button to conrm.
3. If there are preset channels, press PLAY []
button to play the rst channel, press again for the
next channel.
3.5.1 FM Submenu
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
nd the following FM submenus. Press [] and [] to
choose, and then press MENU [M]key to conrm each
submenus. Use the same technique to navigate inside
each of the submenus.
Here below you will nd the FM radio option list.
SAVE: Select this option to save radio channels
DELETE: Select this option to delete radio
channels.
DELETE ALL: Select this option to delete all radio
channels.
AUTO SEARCH: Select this option to start
auto-searching for radio channels.
NORMAL BAND: Select this option to activate
normal FM band.
3.5.2 Automatic Search
To scan automatically all
the available channels, please
follow here below instruction:
1. When the FM Mode is
activated, press MENU [M]
button to select AUTO SEARCH option.
2. Press [M] button to start the automatic search.
The MP3 Player will store the rst 20 radio programs
available.
3.5.3 Manual Search and Storing Channels
To scan manually the frequencies please follow
here below instruction:
1. When the FM Mode is activated, long pressing
the [] or [] buttons to start auto scanning.
Scanning stops as an available channel is found.
2. By short pressing the [] or [] buttons to
step-up scanning.
3. Press MENU [M] button to select SAVE option.
4. Press PLAY [] and this specic channel will
be saved as the last channel
5. Repeat the step from 1 to 4 for each desired
radio program by keeping in mind that the MP3 Player
has 20 memory positions.
3.5.4 FM Radio Record (REC)
To record FM radio program please follow here
below instruction:
1. When the FM Radio Mode is activated, press
MENU [M] button to select FINE REC option.
2. P
ress PLAY [] button to start the recording.
3. Press PLAY [] button to pause the
recording and press it again to restart the recording.
4. To stop and save the recording, long press [M]
button, will return to FM mode.
3.6 E-BooK
The Ebook option allows reading text le. To
activate this option please follow here below
instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu.
2. By using the [] or [] buttons select E-book,
and then press [M] button to conrm
3. Use [] or [] buttons to choose the le
4. Press PLAY [] button to start reading the
le
3.6.1 E-Book Submenu
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
nd the following music submenus. Press [] or []
to choose, and then press [M] key to conrm each
submenus. Use the same technique to navigate inside
each of the submenus.
Before you open any le, if you press M, it will
appears the following submenu:
O Local Folder:
Under this directory, you
can choose to go up a folder
level by pressing MENU [M] to
conrm. And then you can
choose to folder you want to
play
O Play Set:
You can choose between manual play and auto
play. For auto play, you can set the playing time from 1
to 10 seconds for each page of the E-book.
O Delete File:
Delete specic text le you want.
O Delete All:
Delete all text les using this option.
While reading, if you press and hold M, you can
select from:
- Bookmark select
- Bookmark delete
- Bookmark add
3.7 PHOTO
The Photo option allows browsing JPG le. To
activate this option please follow here below
instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu.
2. By using the [] or [] buttons select PHOTO,
and then press [M] button to conrm
3. Use [] or [] buttons to choose the le
4. Press PLAY [] button to start browsing the le
3.7.1 PHOTO Submenu
By short pressing the MENU [M] button, you can
nd the following music submenus. Press [] or []
to choose, and then press [M] key to conrm each
submenus. Use the same technique to navigate inside
each of the submenus.
O Local Folder:
Under this directory, you can
choose to go up a folder level by
pressing PLAY [] to conrm.
And then you can choose to
folder you want to play
O Play Set:
You can choose between manual play and auto
play. For auto play, you can set the playing time from 1
to 10 seconds for each picture.
O Delete File:
Delete specic photo le you want.
O Delete All:
Delete all Photos using this option.
3.8 GAMES
The GAMES option allows playing games. To
activate this option please follow here below
instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 Player, the screen will
display the main menu.
2. By using the [] or [] buttons to select
GAMES, and then press [M] button to enter the GAME
MENU.
Inside the game menu, there is one game for
you to use Russia Brick .and then press [M] button to
conrm
3.9 Setting
The SETTING option allows to access to MP3
Player setup system. To access at system setup please
follow here below instruction:
1. Power ON the MP3 player, button, the screen
will display the main menu.
2. By using the [] or [] select SYSTEM option
then press [M] button to enter the SYSTEM MENU.
3. By using the [] or [] select the system
setup parameter and press MENU [M] button.
The parameters available in the setup system are:
Clock: This option allows setting of the system
date and time.
LCD set: This option allows setting the brightness,
darkly and black screen of the LCD panel.
Language: This option allows setting the
Language of the User Interface.
Power O: This option allows setting the o time
and sleep time.
Replay mode:
Online mode:
Memory Info: This option allows checking the
memory usage.
Firmware Ver: This
option allows checking the
rmware version.
Firmware Upg: This
option allows to upgrade the
rmware.
3.9.1 Clock
This option allows
setting of the system date
and time. The upper case display the date in Year :
Month : Day Format, and the lower case display the
Time in Hour : Minute : Second format. To change the
Date and time, please follow here below instruction:
1. Under the SYSTEM MENU, choose SYSTEM TIME
by pressing [] or [] and press [M] to conrm
2. Press [VOL+] and [VOL-] to choose the
parameter you want to adjust
3. press [] or [] to change the value. Press
MENU [M] to conrm.
3.9.2 Power O Set
This option allows setting the o time and sleep
time. By setting O Time, it is possible to enable (30s,
60s, 90s and 120s) or disable the power management
features to automatically shut down your player if it is
not used. By setting Sleep Time, it is possible to set
power o the unit after a specied time (30s, 60s, 90s,
120s) from the moment you conrm about this
selection.
To modify this parameter please follow here
below instruction:
1. Under the SYSTEM MENU, choose POWER OFF
by pressing [] or [] and press PLAY [].
2. By using the [] or [] buttons, select OFF
TIME or SLEEP TIME and press [M] button.
3. Choose the desired OFF TIME or SLEEP TIME
and press [M] to conrm.
Memory info
The gure presents the total volume of the disc,
the percentage present the percentage between used
space and total space.
Specication
Notice: You will not informed if the production design
and the specication.
Warranty conditions
- The warranty of this product is for 2 years since
the purchase date.
- The warranty will exclude breakdowns caused
by bad use of the product, wrong installation or
installation in not desirable places for a proper
maintenance of the product, rips, updates of the
products that are not the supplied by the brand,
pieces wore away for its use or for not domestic or
inappropriate use. Also are excluded breakdowns
caused for manipulations of the products by people or
companies alien to our company.
- For any request regarding the warranty terms,
the purchase receipt must be attached.
22
THORN
Manual de instrucciones
Introducción
Enhorabuena por haber adquirido el
Reproductor THORN Su elevada integración reduce el
peso del dispositivo y sus dimensiones, haciendo que
sea muy fácil de utilizar. La gran pantalla con
tecnología TFT ofrece una información clara y nítida y
la interfaz USB 2.0 Alta Velocidad facilita las
operaciones de transferencia al ordenador y viceversa.
El Reproductor EM820 MP3 cuenta con una batería
recargable a través del puerto USB de su ordenador. A
través del micrófono integrado, se pueden grabar
mensajes de voz y reproducirlos directamente en el
dispositivo o en el ordenador.
Antes de utilizar este producto, lea este manual y
conserve las instrucciones para futuras consultas.
Descripción
Abajo encontrará una descripción del producto
1. Interruptor de encendido
ON/OFF
2. Play [] / Pause []
3. Anterior [] / Rebobinar []
4. Menú
5. Conexión de Auriculares
6. Conexión USB
7. VOL – (Bajar el Volumen)
8. Siguiente [] / Avanzar []
9. VOL + (Subir el Volumen)
10. Entrada tarjeta MICRO SD
1. Pantalla
Abajo encontrará una descripción de la pantalla
1. Número Total de Canciones
2. Localización de la Canción
Actual
3. Volumen
4. Formato del Fichero
5. Tiempo Transcurrido
6. Tiempo Total
7. Animación EQ
8. Nombre de la Canción
9. Modo Repetición
10. Batería restante
11. Modo EQ
12. Índice de Reproducción
2. Utilización
2.1 Interruptor de encendido ON/OFF
El reproductor MP3 cuenta con una batería
recargable. Antes de la primera utilización, se
recomienda cargar la batería durante un largo periodo
de tiempo (en torno a 8 horas). Para cargar la batería,
conecte el reproductor MP3 al puerto USB de su
ordenador.
Encender:
1. Coloque el botón On/O en posición On
Apagar:
1. Mantener pulsada la tecla Play [] / Pause []
hasta que comience la animación que precede al
apagado
2. Entonces, coloque el botón On/O en posición
O.
2.2 Cargar el Reproductor
El reproductor se puede cargar a través del cable
USB suministrado, conectándolo al PC. Mientras se
esté cargando, se encenderá un indicador en la parte
derecha. Primero debe encender
su PC y, luego, conectar el
reproductor al PC a través del cable
USB. El reproductor se habrá
cargado por completo al cabo de 2
o 3 horas.
3. Menú Principal
Al encender el reproductor
MP3, aparecerá el menú principal con submenús
(opcional), que le permitirá seleccionar diferentes
funciones y opciones.
Utilizando los botones [] o [], puede
seleccionar la opción deseada y a continuación pulsar
el botón M para conrmar su selección.
Para acceder al menú principal cuando esté
dentro de uno de esos submenús, pulse y mantenga
pulsada la tecla MENÚ [M] durante unos segundos.
(Pulsando brevemente la tecla MENÚ [M] se abre el
submenú de opciones de cada submenú).
Las opciones disponibles son:
Música: Seleccione esta opción para reproducir
música.
Vídeo: Seleccione esta opción para reproducir
vídeo AMV.
Grabación: Seleccione esta opción para grabar
mensajes de voz a través del micrófono interno.
Play: Seleccione esta opción para reproducir
mensajes de voz.
Radio: Seleccione esta opción para utilizar la
radio FM.
Texto: Seleccione esta opción para leer textos.
Juegos: Seleccione esta opción para jugar.
Imágenes: Seleccione esta opción para examinar
y ver fotos.
Ajustes: Seleccione esta opción para acceder a
la conguración del sistema.
3.1 Modo Música
La opción del reproductor de música permite
reproducir canciones. Para activar esta opción, siga las
siguientes instrucciones:
1. Encienda el Reproductor MP3 y en la pantalla
aparecerá el menú principal
2. Utilizando los botones [] o [], seleccione la
opción REPRODUCIR MÚSICA y pulse el botón [M].
3. Pulse el botón PLAY [] para iniciar la
reproducción de la primera canción disponible.
4. Pulse y mantenga pulsada la tecla M para
regresar al menú anterior.
3.1.1 Tecla de Función en
Modo Música
Durante la reproducción
de música, se pueden activar los
siguientes controles.
PLAY [Ź]: Pulse el botón
PLAY [] para empezar a
reproducir una canción. Pulse el botón PLAY de nuevo
para pausar la canción. Para reiniciar la reproducción
de la canción, pulse de nuevo el botón PLAY.
Si mantiene pulsado el botón PLAY durante más
tiempo, apagará el reproductor
REW & FFWD [] Pulsar [] o [] para
seleccionar la canción anterior o la siguiente.
Pulsar y Mantener pulsados los botones [] o
[] para rebobinar o avanzar de canción.
Volumen (VOL+ y VOL-): Pulse el botón [VOL+]
para subir el volumen y pulse el botón [VOL-] para
bajar el volumen.
3.1.2 Modo Música
Pulsando brevemente el botón MENÚ [M], se
entra en cada submenú. Pulse [] o [] para elegir y
luego pulse la tecla MENÚ [M] para conrmar cada
submenú. Siga los mismos pasos para navegar dentro
de cada submenú.
En ambos modos (modo reproducción y modo
stop), encontrará los siguientes submenús:
l En reproducción
l Todas las canciones
l Álbum
l Artistas
l Género: Normal, Rock, Pop, Clásico, Soft, Jazz y
DBB
l Carpeta Local
l Crear lista de reproducción
l Ajustes
- Modo repetición: Normal, Repetir1, Carpeta,
Repetir Carpeta, Repetir Todo, Aleatorio, Intro
- Ecualizador: Natural, Rock, Pop, Clásica, Soft,
Jazz, DBB
- Velocidad de reproducción: Velocidad ASS,
Velocidad FFREV
- Modo Repetición
- Selección etiqueta: Selección etiqueta, borrar
etiqueta, añadir etiqueta, Salir
l Borrar archivo
l Borrar todo
3.2 Vídeo
El MODO Vídeo permite reproducir vídeos en
formato AMV. Para activar esta opción, siga las
siguientes instrucciones:
Encienda el Reproductor MP3 y en la pantalla
aparecerá el menú principal.
1. Utilizando los botones [] o [], seleccione la
opción Vídeo y pulse el botón [M].
2. Pulse el botón PLAY [] para iniciar la
reproducción del primer video disponible.
3. Pulse y mantenga pulsada la tecla M para
regresar al menú anterior.
Nota: El Reproductor de Vídeo solo lee archivos
AMV, necesita convertir el resto de los formatos para
ver el vídeo deseado.
3.2.1 Tecla de Función en Modo Vídeo
Durante la reproducción de
música, se pueden activar los
siguientes controles.
PLAY [Ź]: Pulse el botón
PLAY [] para empezar a
reproducir un vídeo. Pulse el
botón PLAY de nuevo para pausar
el vídeo. Para reiniciar la
reproducción del vídeo, pulse el botón PLAY de
nuevo.
Si mantiene pulsado el botón PLAY durante más
tiempo, apagará el reproductor
REW & FFWD []: Pulsar [] o [] para
seleccionar el vídeo anterior o el siguiente.
Pulsar y Mantener pulsados los botones [] o
[] para rebobinar o avanzar de vídeo.
Volumen (VOL+ y VOL-): Pulse el botón [VOL+]
para subir el volumen y pulse el botón [VOL-] para
bajar el volumen.
3.2.2 Submenú AMV
Pulsando brevemente el botón MENÚ [M],
desplegará los siguientes submenús AMV. Pulse [] o
[] para elegir y luego pulse la tecla MENÚ [M] para
conrmar cada submenú. Siga los mismos pasos para
navegar dentro de cada submenú.
l Reproduciendo
l Carpeta Local: En este directorio, puede elegir
subir un nivel de carpeta pulsando la tecla MENÚ [M]
para conrmar. Y luego puede elegir la carpeta que
quiere reproducir
l Repetición
l Borrar archivo:Eliminar vídeo especíco.
l Borrar todo: Eliminar todos los vídeos utilizando
esta opción.
3.3 Grabar (grabador de mensajes de voz)
Esta opción permite grabar mensajes de voz
utilizando el micrófono integrado. Para grabar
mensajes, siga las siguientes instrucciones:
1. Encienda el Reproductor MP3 y en la pantalla
aparecerá el menú principal.
2. Utilizando los botones [] o [], seleccione la
opción RECORD y pulse el botón [M].
3. Pulse el botón PLAY [] para iniciar la
grabación.
4. Puede escuchar su chero wav en el submenú
VOZ.
Durante la grabación, Pulse el botón PLAY []
para iniciar la grabación. Pulsar el
botón PLAY de nuevo para pausar la
grabación. Si mantiene el botón PLAY
[] / M pulsado durante más
tiempo, detendrá la grabación.
Pulsando brevemente el botón
MENÚ [M], encontrará la CARPETA
LOCAL y el TIPO DE GRABACIÓN. Pulse [] o [] para
elegir y luego pulse la tecla MENÚ [M] para conrmar
cada submenú. Siga los mismos pasos para navegar
dentro de cada submenú.
1. En el submenú CARPETA LOCAL, puede elegir
subir un nivel de carpeta pulsando [M] para conrmar.
Y luego puede elegir la carpeta que quiere reproducir
2. En el submenú formato GRABACIÓN, puede
elegir el formato de grabación, que incluye
ACT/MP3/WAV/WMA.
3.4 Play (Reproductor de Mensajes de Voz)
La opción play permite reproducir mensajes de
voz grabados por el Reproductor MP3. Para activar
esta opción, siga las siguientes instrucciones:
1. Encienda el Reproductor MP3 y en la pantalla
aparecerá el menú principal.
2. Utilizando los botones [] o [], seleccione la
opción VOZ y pulse el botón [M].
3. Pulse el botón PLAY [] para iniciar la
reproducción de la primera grabación disponible.
3.4.1 Función Clave del Modo PLAY
Durante la reproducción de la grabación, se
pueden activar los siguientes controles.
PLAY [Ź]:
P
ulse el botón PLAY [] para
empezar a reproducir una grabación. Pulse el botón
PLAY de nuevo para pausar la grabación. Para reiniciar
la reproducción, pulse el botón PLAY de nuevo.
Si mantiene pulsado el botón PLAY durante más
tiempo, apagará el reproductor
REW & FFWD []: Pulsar []
o [] para seleccionar la grabación
anterior o la siguiente.
Pulsar y Mantener pulsados los
botones [] o [] para rebobinar o
avanzar de grabación.
Volumen (VOL+ y VOL-): Pulse
el botón [VOL+] para subir el volumen y pulse el
botón [VOL-] para bajar el volumen.
3.4.2 Submenú PLAY
Pulsando brevemente el botón MENÚ [M],
desplegará los submenús de música siguientes. Pulse
[] y [] para elegir y luego pulse la tecla MENÚ [M]
para conrmar cada submenú. Siga los mismos pasos
para navegar dentro de cada submenú.
l Carpeta Local: En este directorio, puede elegir
subir un nivel de carpeta pulsando la tecla MENÚ [M]
para conrmar. Y luego puede elegir la carpeta que
quiere reproducir
l Conguración:
- Modo repetición: Normal, Repetir1, Carpeta,
Repetir carpeta, Repetir todas, Aleatorio, Intro
- Velocidad de reproducción: Puede alterar el
Tempo de la Canción.
- Modo repetición
l Borrar archivo: Eliminar cheros de voz
especícos.
l Borrar Todos:
Eliminar todos los cheros de voz utilizando esta
opción.
3.5 FM (FM Radio)
Cuando está activado el modo Radio FM, se
pueden escuchar programas de radio.
Esta opción permite disfrutar de programas de
radio FM. Para utilizarla, siga las siguientes
instrucciones:
1. Encienda el Reproductor MP3 y en la pantalla
aparecerá el menú principal
2. Utilizando los botones [] o [], seleccione la
opción FM y luego pulse el botón [M] para conrmar.
3. Si hay frecuencias predenidas, pulse el botón
PLAY [] para reproducir la primera frecuencia,
pulse de nuevo para pasar a la siguiente frecuencia.
3.5.1 Submenú FM
Pulsando brevemente el botón MENÚ [M],
desplegará los siguientes submenús FM. Pulse [] y
[] para elegir y luego pulse la tecla MENÚ [M] para
conrmar cada submenú. Siga los mismos pasos para
navegar dentro de cada submenú.
Abajo encontrará la lista de opciones de radio
FM.
GUARDAR EMISORA: Seleccione esta opción
para memorizar frecuencias de radio
BORRAR EMISORA: Seleccione esta opción para
eliminar frecuencias de radio.
BORRAR TODAS: Seleccionar esta opción para
eliminar todas las frecuencias de radio.
BÚSQUEDA AUTOMÁTICA: Seleccione esta
opción para iniciar la búsqueda automática de
frecuencias de radio.
FRECUENCIA NORMAL: Seleccione esta opción
para activar la banda normal FM.
3.5.2 Búsqueda Automática
Para activar la búsqueda automática de las
frecuencias disponibles, siga las siguientes
instrucciones:
1. Cuando esté activado el Modo FM, pulse el
botón MENÚ [M] para seleccionar la opción
BÚSQUEDA AUTOMÁTICA.
2. Pulse el botón [M] para iniciar la búsqueda
automática. El Reproductor
MP3 almacenará las 20
primeras emisoras de radio
disponibles.
3.5.3 B ú s q u e d a
Manual y Memorización de
Frecuencias
Para buscar
manualmente las frecuencias,
siga las siguientes instrucciones:
1. Cuando esté activado el Modo FM, pulse
prolongadamente los botones [] o [] para iniciar
la búsqueda automática. La sintonización se detendrá
al encontrar una frecuencia disponible.
2. Pulsando brevemente los botones [] o [],
congurará la búsqueda.
3. Pulse el botón MENÚ [M] para seleccionar la
opción GUARDAR.
4. Pulse PLAY [] y esa emisora especíca se
memorizará como último canal.
5. Repita los pasos 1 al 4 para sintonizar cada
emisora teniendo en cuenta que el Reproductor MP3
puede memorizar 20 frecuencias.
3.5.4 Grabación de Radio FM (REC)
Para grabar un programa de radio FM, siga las
siguientes instrucciones:
1. Cuando esté activado el Modo Radio FM, pulse
el botón MENÚ [M] para seleccionar la opción
GRABACIÓN DE CALIDAD
2. Pulse el botón PLAY [] para iniciar la
grabación.
3. Pulse el botón PLAY [] para pausar la
grabación y púlselo de nuevo para reiniciar la
grabación.
4. Para detener la grabación y memorizarla,
pulse prolongadamente el botón [M] y regresará al
modo FM.
3.6 E-Book
La opción E-Book permite leer archivos de texto.
Para activar esta opción, siga las siguientes
instrucciones:
1. Encienda el Reproductor MP3 y en la pantalla
aparecerá el menú principal.
2. Utilizando los botones [] o [], seleccione
E-Book y pulse el botón [M] para conrmar.
3. Utilice los botones [] o [] para elegir el
archivo
4. Pulse el botón PLAY [] para empezar a leer
el archivo.
3.6.1 Submenú E-Book
Pulsando brevemente el botón MENÚ [M],
desplegará los submenús de música siguientes. Pulse
[] o [] para elegir y luego pulse la tecla [M] para
conrmar cada submenú. Siga los mismos pasos para
navegar dentro de cada submenú.
Antes de abrir un archivo, si pulsa M, aparecerá el
siguiente submenú:
l Carpeta Local: En este directorio, puede elegir
subir un nivel de carpeta pulsando la tecla MENÚ [M]
para conrmar. Y entonces podrá elegir la carpeta que
quiere reproducir
l Ajustes de reproducción:
Puede elegir entre reproducción
manual y reproducción
automática. Para la reproducción
automática, puede congurar el
tiempo de reproducción entre 1 y
10 segundos por página del E-Book.
l Borrar archivo: Eliminar archivos de texto
especícos.
l Borrar Todo: Eliminar todos los archivos de
texto utilizando esta opción.
Durante la lectura, si pulsa y mantiene pulsada la
tecla M, podrá seleccionar entre:
- Selección etiqueta
- Borrar etiqueta
- Añadir etiqueta
3.7 FOTO
La opción Foto permite visualizar cheros JPG.
Para activar esta opción, siga las siguientes
instrucciones:
1. Encienda el Reproductor MP3 y en la pantalla
aparecerá el menú principal.
2. Utilizando los botones [] o [], seleccione
FOTO y pulse el botón [M] para conrmar.
3. Utilice los botones [] o [] para elegir el
archivo
4. Pulse el botón PLAY [] para iniciar la
presentación del archivo
3.7.1 Submenú FOTO
Pulsando brevemente el botón MENÚ [M],
desplegará los submenús de música siguientes. Pulse
[] o [] para elegir y luego pulse la tecla –[M] para
conrmar cada submenú. Siga los mismos pasos para
navegar dentro de cada submenú.
l Carpeta Local: En este directorio, puede elegir
subir un nivel de carpeta pulsando PLAY [] para
conrmar. Y entonces podrá elegir la carpeta que
quiere reproducir
l Ajustes de reproducción: Puede elegir entre
reproducción manual y reproducción automática.
Para la reproducción
automática, puede denir el
tiempo de reproducción
entre 1 y 10 segundos por
fotografía.
l Borrar archivo:
Eliminar cheros de fotos
especícos.
l Borrar Todo: Eliminar
Todas las Fotos utilizando
esta opción
3.8 JUEGOS
La opción JUEGOS permite jugar a juegos. Para
activar esta opción, siga las siguientes instrucciones:
1. Encienda el Reproductor MP3 y en la pantalla
aparecerá el menú principal.
2. Utilizando los botones [] o [] para
seleccionar JUEGOS, pulse el botón [M] para entrar en
el MENÚ JUEGOS.
Dentro del menú Juegos, solo hay un juego que
puede utilizar, el Russia Brick, pulse el botón [M] para
conrmar
3.9 Ajustes
Las opciones de AJUSTES permiten acceder al
sistema de conguración del Reproductor. Para
acceder al sistema de conguración, siga las
instrucciones:
1. Encienda el reproductor MP3 y en la pantalla
aparecerá el menú principal.
2. Utilizando [] o [], seleccione la opción de
SISTEMA y luego pulse el botón [M] para entrar en el
MENÚ SISTEMA.
3. Utilizando [] o [], seleccione los
parámetros de conguración del sistema y pulse el
botón MENÚ [M].
Los parámetros disponibles en el sistema de
conguración son:
Ajustar reloj: Esta opción permite congurar la
fecha y la hora del sistema.
Ajuste LCD: Esta opción permite congurar el
brillo, el contraste y la pantalla negra en el panel LCD.
Idioma: Esta opción permite congurar el Idioma
de la Interfaz del Usuario.
Desconex.automática: Esta opción permite
congurar el tiempo de apagado y de inactividad.
Modo Repetición:
Modo en línea:
Info de Memoria: Esta opción permite vericar el
uso de la memoria.
Versión Firmware: Esta opción permite vericar
la versión del rmware.
Actualización Firmware:
Esta opción permite actualizar el
rmware.
3.9.1 Ajustar reloj
Esta opción permite
congurar la fecha y la hora del
sistema. Los dígitos superiores
muestran la fecha en formato
Año: Mes: Formato Día y los dígitos inferiores
muestran la Hora en formato Hora: Minutos: Formato
Segundos. Para cambiar de fecha y hora, siga las
siguientes instrucciones:
1. En el MENÚ DE INSTALACIÓN, elija RELOJ
pulsando [] o [] y pulse [M] para conrmar
2. Pulse [VOL+] y [VOL-] para elegir el parámetro
que quiere ajustar
3. Pulse [] o [] para cambiar el valor. Pulse
MENÚ [M] para conrmar.
3.9.2 Congurar Apagado
Esta opción permite congurar el tiempo de
apagado y de inactividad. Al congurar el Tiempo de
apagado, se pueden activar (30s, 60s, 90s y 120s) o
desactivar las funciones de gestión de la energía para
que su reproductor se apague automáticamente si no
lo está utilizando. Al denir el Tiempo de Inactividad,
se puede congurar el reproductor para que se
apague al pasar cierto tiempo (30s, 60s, 90s, 120s)
desde el momento en que conrme esta selección.
Para modicar este parámetro, siga las
siguientes instrucciones:
1. En el MENÚ DE INSTALACIÓN, elija
DESCONEXIÓN AUTOMÁTICA pulsando [] o [] y
pulse PLA
Y [].
2. Utilizando los botones [] o [], seleccione
INACTIVO (tiempo de apagado) o AUTO APAGADO
(tiempo de inactividad) y pulse el botón [M].
3. Elija el DESCONEXIÓN AUTOMÁTICA o
INACTIVO deseado y pulse [M] para conrmar.
Información de la Memoria
La imagen muestra el volumen total del disco, el
porcentaje utilizado y el porcentaje de espacio
utilizado respecto al espacio total.
Especicaciones
Aviso: No será informado en caso de cambios en el
diseño de producción y en las especicaciones.
Condiciones de Garantía
- Este equipo tiene garantía de 2 años a partir de la
fecha original de compra.
- Serán exentas de la garantía las averías producidas
por un uso incorrecto del aparato, mala instalación o
instalados en lugares inapropiados para su buena
conservación, roturas, actualizaciones de software que
no sean los facilitados por la marca, piezas desgastadas
por su propio uso o por un uso no doméstico o
inadecuado, así como, por manipulación por personas o
talleres ajenos a nuestra empresa.
- Para que la garantía tenga validez, se deberá
adjuntar la factura o tíquet de caja que corrobore la
adquisición y fecha de venta de este producto.
Introducción
Enhorabuena por haber adquirido el
Reproductor THORN Su elevada integración reduce el
peso del dispositivo y sus dimensiones, haciendo que
sea muy fácil de utilizar. La gran pantalla con
tecnología TFT ofrece una información clara y nítida y
la interfaz USB 2.0 Alta Velocidad facilita las
operaciones de transferencia al ordenador y viceversa.
El Reproductor EM820 MP3 cuenta con una batería
recargable a través del puerto USB de su ordenador. A
través del micrófono integrado, se pueden grabar
mensajes de voz y reproducirlos directamente en el
dispositivo o en el ordenador.
Antes de utilizar este producto, lea este manual y
conserve las instrucciones para futuras consultas.
Descripción
Abajo encontrará una descripción del producto
1. Interruptor de encendido
ON/OFF
2. Play [] / Pause []
3. Anterior [] / Rebobinar []
4. Menú
5. Conexión de Auriculares
6. Conexión USB
7. VOL – (Bajar el Volumen)
8. Siguiente [] / Avanzar []
9. VOL + (Subir el Volumen)
10. Entrada tarjeta MICRO SD
1. Pantalla
Abajo encontrará una descripción de la pantalla
1. Número Total de Canciones
2. Localización de la Canción
Actual
3. Volumen
4. Formato del Fichero
5. Tiempo Transcurrido
6. Tiempo Total
7. Animación EQ
8. Nombre de la Canción
9. Modo Repetición
10. Batería restante
11. Modo EQ
12. Índice de Reproducción
2. Utilización
2.1 Interruptor de encendido ON/OFF
El reproductor MP3 cuenta con una batería
recargable. Antes de la primera utilización, se
recomienda cargar la batería durante un largo periodo
de tiempo (en torno a 8 horas). Para cargar la batería,
conecte el reproductor MP3 al puerto USB de su
ordenador.
Encender:
1. Coloque el botón On/O en posición On
Apagar:
1. Mantener pulsada la tecla Play [] / Pause []
hasta que comience la animación que precede al
apagado
2. Entonces, coloque el botón On/O en posición
O.
2.2 Cargar el Reproductor
El reproductor se puede cargar a través del cable
USB suministrado, conectándolo al PC. Mientras se
esté cargando, se encenderá un indicador en la parte
derecha. Primero debe encender
su PC y, luego, conectar el
reproductor al PC a través del cable
USB. El reproductor se habrá
cargado por completo al cabo de 2
o 3 horas.
3. Menú Principal
Al encender el reproductor
MP3, aparecerá el menú principal con submenús
(opcional), que le permitirá seleccionar diferentes
funciones y opciones.
Utilizando los botones [] o [], puede
seleccionar la opción deseada y a continuación pulsar
el botón M para conrmar su selección.
Para acceder al menú principal cuando esté
dentro de uno de esos submenús, pulse y mantenga
pulsada la tecla MENÚ [M] durante unos segundos.
(Pulsando brevemente la tecla MENÚ [M] se abre el
submenú de opciones de cada submenú).
Las opciones disponibles son:
Música: Seleccione esta opción para reproducir
música.
Vídeo: Seleccione esta opción para reproducir
vídeo AMV.
Grabación: Seleccione esta opción para grabar
mensajes de voz a través del micrófono interno.
Play: Seleccione esta opción para reproducir
mensajes de voz.
Radio: Seleccione esta opción para utilizar la
radio FM.
Texto: Seleccione esta opción para leer textos.
Juegos: Seleccione esta opción para jugar.
Imágenes: Seleccione esta opción para examinar
y ver fotos.
Ajustes: Seleccione esta opción para acceder a
la conguración del sistema.
3.1 Modo Música
La opción del reproductor de música permite
reproducir canciones. Para activar esta opción, siga las
siguientes instrucciones:
1. Encienda el Reproductor MP3 y en la pantalla
aparecerá el menú principal
2. Utilizando los botones [] o [], seleccione la
opción REPRODUCIR MÚSICA y pulse el botón [M].
3. Pulse el botón PLAY [] para iniciar la
reproducción de la primera canción disponible.
4. Pulse y mantenga pulsada la tecla M para
regresar al menú anterior.
3.1.1 Tecla de Función en
Modo Música
Durante la reproducción
de música, se pueden activar los
siguientes controles.
PLAY [Ź]: Pulse el botón
PLAY [] para empezar a
reproducir una canción. Pulse el botón PLAY de nuevo
para pausar la canción. Para reiniciar la reproducción
de la canción, pulse de nuevo el botón PLAY.
Si mantiene pulsado el botón PLAY durante más
tiempo, apagará el reproductor
REW & FFWD [] Pulsar [] o [] para
seleccionar la canción anterior o la siguiente.
Pulsar y Mantener pulsados los botones [] o
[] para rebobinar o avanzar de canción.
Volumen (VOL+ y VOL-): Pulse el botón [VOL+]
para subir el volumen y pulse el botón [VOL-] para
bajar el volumen.
3.1.2 Modo Música
Pulsando brevemente el botón MENÚ [M], se
entra en cada submenú. Pulse [] o [] para elegir y
luego pulse la tecla MENÚ [M] para conrmar cada
submenú. Siga los mismos pasos para navegar dentro
de cada submenú.
En ambos modos (modo reproducción y modo
stop), encontrará los siguientes submenús:
l En reproducción
l Todas las canciones
l Álbum
l Artistas
l Género: Normal, Rock, Pop, Clásico, Soft, Jazz y
DBB
l Carpeta Local
l Crear lista de reproducción
l Ajustes
- Modo repetición: Normal, Repetir1, Carpeta,
Repetir Carpeta, Repetir Todo, Aleatorio, Intro
- Ecualizador: Natural, Rock, Pop, Clásica, Soft,
Jazz, DBB
- Velocidad de reproducción: Velocidad ASS,
Velocidad FFREV
- Modo Repetición
- Selección etiqueta: Selección etiqueta, borrar
etiqueta, añadir etiqueta, Salir
l Borrar archivo
l Borrar todo
3.2 Vídeo
El MODO Vídeo permite reproducir vídeos en
formato AMV. Para activar esta opción, siga las
siguientes instrucciones:
Encienda el Reproductor MP3 y en la pantalla
aparecerá el menú principal.
1. Utilizando los botones [] o [], seleccione la
opción Vídeo y pulse el botón [M].
2. Pulse el botón PLAY [] para iniciar la
reproducción del primer video disponible.
3. Pulse y mantenga pulsada la tecla M para
regresar al menú anterior.
Nota: El Reproductor de Vídeo solo lee archivos
AMV, necesita convertir el resto de los formatos para
ver el vídeo deseado.
3.2.1 Tecla de Función en Modo Vídeo
Durante la reproducción de
música, se pueden activar los
siguientes controles.
PLAY [Ź]: Pulse el botón
PLAY [] para empezar a
reproducir un vídeo. Pulse el
botón PLAY de nuevo para pausar
el vídeo. Para reiniciar la
reproducción del vídeo, pulse el botón PLAY de
nuevo.
Si mantiene pulsado el botón PLAY durante más
tiempo, apagará el reproductor
REW & FFWD []: Pulsar [] o [] para
seleccionar el vídeo anterior o el siguiente.
Pulsar y Mantener pulsados los botones [] o
[] para rebobinar o avanzar de vídeo.
Volumen (VOL+ y VOL-): Pulse el botón [VOL+]
para subir el volumen y pulse el botón [VOL-] para
bajar el volumen.
3.2.2 Submenú AMV
Pulsando brevemente el botón MENÚ [M],
desplegará los siguientes submenús AMV. Pulse [] o
[] para elegir y luego pulse la tecla MENÚ [M] para
conrmar cada submenú. Siga los mismos pasos para
navegar dentro de cada submenú.
l Reproduciendo
l Carpeta Local: En este directorio, puede elegir
subir un nivel de carpeta pulsando la tecla MENÚ [M]
para conrmar. Y luego puede elegir la carpeta que
quiere reproducir
l Repetición
l Borrar archivo:Eliminar vídeo especíco.
l Borrar todo: Eliminar todos los vídeos utilizando
esta opción.
3.3 Grabar (grabador de mensajes de voz)
Esta opción permite grabar mensajes de voz
utilizando el micrófono integrado. Para grabar
mensajes, siga las siguientes instrucciones:
1. Encienda el Reproductor MP3 y en la pantalla
aparecerá el menú principal.
2. Utilizando los botones [] o [], seleccione la
opción RECORD y pulse el botón [M].
3. Pulse el botón PLAY [] para iniciar la
grabación.
4. Puede escuchar su chero wav en el submenú
VOZ.
Durante la grabación, Pulse el botón PLAY []
para iniciar la grabación. Pulsar el
botón PLAY de nuevo para pausar la
grabación. Si mantiene el botón PLAY
[] / M pulsado durante más
tiempo, detendrá la grabación.
Pulsando brevemente el botón
MENÚ [M], encontrará la CARPETA
LOCAL y el TIPO DE GRABACIÓN. Pulse [] o [] para
elegir y luego pulse la tecla MENÚ [M] para conrmar
cada submenú. Siga los mismos pasos para navegar
dentro de cada submenú.
1. En el submenú CARPETA LOCAL, puede elegir
subir un nivel de carpeta pulsando [M] para conrmar.
Y luego puede elegir la carpeta que quiere reproducir
2. En el submenú formato GRABACIÓN, puede
elegir el formato de grabación, que incluye
ACT/MP3/WAV/WMA.
3.4 Play (Reproductor de Mensajes de Voz)
La opción play permite reproducir mensajes de
voz grabados por el Reproductor MP3. Para activar
esta opción, siga las siguientes instrucciones:
1. Encienda el Reproductor MP3 y en la pantalla
aparecerá el menú principal.
2. Utilizando los botones [] o [], seleccione la
opción VOZ y pulse el botón [M].
3. Pulse el botón PLAY [] para iniciar la
reproducción de la primera grabación disponible.
3.4.1 Función Clave del Modo PLAY
Durante la reproducción de la grabación, se
pueden activar los siguientes controles.
PLAY [Ź]: Pulse el botón PLAY [] para
empezar a reproducir una grabación. Pulse el botón
PLAY de nuevo para pausar la grabación. Para reiniciar
la reproducción, pulse el botón PLAY de nuevo.
Si mantiene pulsado el botón PLAY durante más
tiempo, apagará el reproductor
REW & FFWD []: Pulsar [
]
o [
] para seleccionar la grabación
anterior o la siguiente.
Pulsar y Mantener pulsados los
botones [] o [] para rebobinar o
avanzar de grabación.
Volumen (VOL+ y VOL-): Pulse
el botón [VOL+] para subir el volumen y pulse el
botón [VOL-] para bajar el volumen.
3.4.2 Submenú PLAY
Pulsando brevemente el botón MENÚ [M],
desplegará los submenús de música siguientes. Pulse
[] y [] para elegir y luego pulse la tecla MENÚ [M]
para conrmar cada submenú. Siga los mismos pasos
para navegar dentro de cada submenú.
l Carpeta Local: En este directorio, puede elegir
subir un nivel de carpeta pulsando la tecla MENÚ [M]
para conrmar. Y luego puede elegir la carpeta que
quiere reproducir
l Conguración:
- Modo repetición: Normal, Repetir1, Carpeta,
Repetir carpeta, Repetir todas, Aleatorio, Intro
- Velocidad de reproducción: Puede alterar el
Tempo de la Canción.
- Modo repetición
l Borrar archivo: Eliminar cheros de voz
especícos.
l Borrar Todos:
Eliminar todos los cheros de voz utilizando esta
opción.
3.5 FM (FM Radio)
Cuando está activado el modo Radio FM, se
pueden escuchar programas de radio.
Esta opción permite disfrutar de programas de
radio FM. Para utilizarla, siga las siguientes
instrucciones:
1. Encienda el Reproductor MP3 y en la pantalla
aparecerá el menú principal
2. Utilizando los botones [] o [], seleccione la
opción FM y luego pulse el botón [M] para conrmar.
3. Si hay frecuencias predenidas, pulse el botón
PLAY [] para reproducir la primera frecuencia,
pulse de nuevo para pasar a la siguiente frecuencia.
3.5.1 Submenú FM
Pulsando brevemente el botón MENÚ [M],
desplegará los siguientes submenús FM. Pulse [] y
[] para elegir y luego pulse la tecla MENÚ [M] para
conrmar cada submenú. Siga los mismos pasos para
navegar dentro de cada submenú.
Abajo encontrará la lista de opciones de radio
FM.
GUARDAR EMISORA: Seleccione esta opción
para memorizar frecuencias de radio
BORRAR EMISORA: Seleccione esta opción para
eliminar frecuencias de radio.
BORRAR TODAS: Seleccionar esta opción para
eliminar todas las frecuencias de radio.
BÚSQUEDA AUTOMÁTICA: Seleccione esta
opción para iniciar la búsqueda automática de
frecuencias de radio.
FRECUENCIA NORMAL: Seleccione esta opción
para activar la banda normal FM.
3.5.2 Búsqueda Automática
Para activar la búsqueda automática de las
frecuencias disponibles, siga las siguientes
instrucciones:
1. Cuando esté activado el Modo FM, pulse el
botón MENÚ [M] para seleccionar la opción
BÚSQUEDA AUTOMÁTICA.
2. Pulse el botón [M] para iniciar la búsqueda
automática. El Reproductor
MP3 almacenará las 20
primeras emisoras de radio
disponibles.
3.5.3 B ú s q u e d a
Manual y Memorización de
Frecuencias
Para buscar
manualmente las frecuencias,
siga las siguientes instrucciones:
1. Cuando esté activado el Modo FM, pulse
prolongadamente los botones [] o [] para iniciar
la búsqueda automática. La sintonización se detendrá
al encontrar una frecuencia disponible.
2. Pulsando brevemente los botones [] o [],
congurará la búsqueda.
3. Pulse el botón MENÚ [M] para seleccionar la
opción GUARDAR.
4. Pulse PLAY [] y esa emisora especíca se
memorizará como último canal.
5. Repita los pasos 1 al 4 para sintonizar cada
emisora teniendo en cuenta que el Reproductor MP3
puede memorizar 20 frecuencias.
3.5.4 Grabación de Radio FM (REC)
Para grabar un programa de radio FM, siga las
siguientes instrucciones:
1. Cuando esté activado el Modo Radio FM, pulse
el botón MENÚ [M] para seleccionar la opción
GRABACIÓN DE CALIDAD
2. Pulse el botón PLAY [] para iniciar la
grabación.
3. Pulse el botón PLAY [] para pausar la
grabación y púlselo de nuevo para reiniciar la
grabación.
4. Para detener la grabación y memorizarla,
pulse prolongadamente el botón [M] y regresará al
modo FM.
3.6 E-Book
La opción E-Book permite leer archivos de texto.
Para activar esta opción, siga las siguientes
instrucciones:
1. Encienda el Reproductor MP3 y en la pantalla
aparecerá el menú principal.
2. Utilizando los botones [] o [], seleccione
E-Book y pulse el botón [M] para conrmar.
3. Utilice los botones [] o [] para elegir el
archivo
4. Pulse el botón PLAY [] para empezar a leer
el archivo.
3.6.1 Submenú E-Book
Pulsando brevemente el botón MENÚ [M],
desplegará los submenús de música siguientes. Pulse
[] o [] para elegir y luego pulse la tecla [M] para
conrmar cada submenú. Siga los mismos pasos para
navegar dentro de cada submenú.
Antes de abrir un archivo, si pulsa M, aparecerá el
siguiente submenú:
l Carpeta Local: En este directorio, puede elegir
subir un nivel de carpeta pulsando la tecla MENÚ [M]
para conrmar. Y entonces podrá elegir la carpeta que
quiere reproducir
l Ajustes de reproducción:
Puede elegir entre reproducción
manual y reproducción
automática. Para la reproducción
automática, puede congurar el
tiempo de reproducción entre 1 y
10 segundos por página del E-Book.
l Borrar archivo: Eliminar archivos de texto
especícos.
l Borrar Todo: Eliminar todos los archivos de
texto utilizando esta opción.
Durante la lectura, si pulsa y mantiene pulsada la
tecla M, podrá seleccionar entre:
- Selección etiqueta
- Borrar etiqueta
- Añadir etiqueta
3.7 FOTO
La opción Foto permite visualizar cheros JPG.
Para activar esta opción, siga las siguientes
instrucciones:
1. Encienda el Reproductor MP3 y en la pantalla
aparecerá el menú principal.
2. Utilizando los botones [] o [], seleccione
FOTO y pulse el botón [M] para conrmar.
3. Utilice los botones [] o [] para elegir el
archivo
4. Pulse el botón PLAY [] para iniciar la
presentación del archivo
3.7.1 Submenú FOTO
Pulsando brevemente el botón MENÚ [M],
desplegará los submenús de música siguientes. Pulse
[] o [] para elegir y luego pulse la tecla –[M] para
conrmar cada submenú. Siga los mismos pasos para
navegar dentro de cada submenú.
l Carpeta Local: En este directorio, puede elegir
subir un nivel de carpeta pulsando PLAY [] para
conrmar. Y entonces podrá elegir la carpeta que
quiere reproducir
l Ajustes de reproducción: Puede elegir entre
reproducción manual y reproducción automática.
Para la reproducción
automática, puede denir el
tiempo de reproducción
entre 1 y 10 segundos por
fotografía.
l Borrar archivo:
Eliminar cheros de fotos
especícos.
l Borrar Todo: Eliminar
Todas las Fotos utilizando
esta opción
3.8 JUEGOS
La opción JUEGOS permite jugar a juegos. Para
activar esta opción, siga las siguientes instrucciones:
1. Encienda el Reproductor MP3 y en la pantalla
aparecerá el menú principal.
2. Utilizando los botones [] o [] para
seleccionar JUEGOS, pulse el botón [M] para entrar en
el MENÚ JUEGOS.
Dentro del menú Juegos, solo hay un juego que
puede utilizar, el Russia Brick, pulse el botón [M] para
conrmar
3.9 Ajustes
Las opciones de AJUSTES permiten acceder al
sistema de conguración del Reproductor. Para
acceder al sistema de conguración, siga las
instrucciones:
1. Encienda el reproductor MP3 y en la pantalla
aparecerá el menú principal.
2. Utilizando [] o [], seleccione la opción de
SISTEMA y luego pulse el botón [M] para entrar en el
MENÚ SISTEMA.
3. Utilizando [] o [], seleccione los
parámetros de conguración del sistema y pulse el
botón MENÚ [M].
Los parámetros disponibles en el sistema de
conguración son:
Ajustar reloj: Esta opción permite congurar la
fecha y la hora del sistema.
Ajuste LCD: Esta opción permite congurar el
brillo, el contraste y la pantalla negra en el panel LCD.
Idioma: Esta opción permite congurar el Idioma
de la Interfaz del Usuario.
Desconex.automática: Esta opción permite
congurar el tiempo de apagado y de inactividad.
Modo Repetición:
Modo en línea:
Info de Memoria: Esta opción permite vericar el
uso de la memoria.
Versión Firmware: Esta opción permite vericar
la versión del rmware.
Actualización Firmware:
Esta opción permite actualizar el
rmware.
3.9.1 Ajustar reloj
Esta opción permite
congurar la fecha y la hora del
sistema. Los dígitos superiores
muestran la fecha en formato
Año: Mes: Formato Día y los dígitos inferiores
muestran la Hora en formato Hora: Minutos: Formato
Segundos. Para cambiar de fecha y hora, siga las
siguientes instrucciones:
1. En el MENÚ DE INSTALACIÓN, elija RELOJ
pulsando [] o [] y pulse [M] para conrmar
2. Pulse [VOL+] y [VOL-] para elegir el parámetro
que quiere ajustar
3. Pulse [] o [] para cambiar el valor. Pulse
MENÚ [M] para conrmar.
3.9.2 Congurar Apagado
Esta opción permite congurar el tiempo de
apagado y de inactividad. Al congurar el Tiempo de
apagado, se pueden activar (30s, 60s, 90s y 120s) o
desactivar las funciones de gestión de la energía para
que su reproductor se apague automáticamente si no
lo está utilizando. Al denir el Tiempo de Inactividad,
se puede congurar el reproductor para que se
apague al pasar cierto tiempo (30s, 60s, 90s, 120s)
desde el momento en que conrme esta selección.
Para modicar este parámetro, siga las
siguientes instrucciones:
1. En el MENÚ DE INSTALACIÓN, elija
DESCONEXIÓN AUTOMÁTICA pulsando [] o [] y
pulse PLAY [].
2. Utilizando los botones [] o [], seleccione
INACTIVO (tiempo de apagado) o AUTO APAGADO
(tiempo de inactividad) y pulse el botón [M].
3. Elija el DESCONEXIÓN AUTOMÁTICA o
INA
CTIVO deseado y pulse [M] para conrmar.
Información de la Memoria
La imagen muestra el volumen total del disco, el
porcentaje utilizado y el porcentaje de espacio
utilizado respecto al espacio total.
Especicaciones
Aviso: No será informado en caso de cambios en el
diseño de producción y en las especicaciones.
Condiciones de Garantía
- Este equipo tiene garantía de 2 años a partir de la
fecha original de compra.
- Serán exentas de la garantía las averías producidas
por un uso incorrecto del aparato, mala instalación o
instalados en lugares inapropiados para su buena
conservación, roturas, actualizaciones de software que
no sean los facilitados por la marca, piezas desgastadas
por su propio uso o por un uso no doméstico o
inadecuado, así como, por manipulación por personas o
talleres ajenos a nuestra empresa.
- Para que la garantía tenga validez, se deberá
adjuntar la factura o tíquet de caja que corrobore la
adquisición y fecha de venta de este producto.
Descripción
Abajo encontrará una descripción del producto
1. Interruptor de encendido
ON/OFF
2. Play [] / Pause []
3. Anterior [] / Rebobinar []
4. Menú
5. Conexión de Auriculares
6. Conexión USB
7. VOL – (Bajar el Volumen)
8. Siguiente [] / Avanzar []
9. VOL + (Subir el Volumen)
10. Entrada tarjeta MICRO SD
1. Pantalla
Abajo encontrará una descripción de la pantalla
1. Número Total de Canciones
2. Localización de la Canción
Actual
3. Volumen
4. Formato del Fichero
5. Tiempo Transcurrido
6. Tiempo Total
7. Animación EQ
8. Nombre de la Canción
9. Modo Repetición
10. Batería restante
11. Modo EQ
12. Índice de Reproducción
1
2.1 Interruptor de encendido ON/OFF
El reproductor MP3 cuenta con una batería
recargable. Antes de la primera utilización, se
recomienda cargar la batería durante un largo periodo
de tiempo (en torno a 8 horas). Para cargar la batería,
conecte el reproductor MP3 al puerto USB de su
ordenador.
Encender:
Apagar:
1. Mantener pulsada la tecla Play [] / Pause []
hasta que comience la animación que precede al
apagado
2.2 Cargar el Reproductor
El reproductor se puede cargar a través del cable
USB suministrado, conectándolo al PC. Mientras se
esté cargando, se encenderá un indicador en la parte
derecha. Primero debe encender
su PC y, luego, conectar el
reproductor al PC a través del cable
USB. El reproductor se habrá
cargado por completo al cabo de 2
o 3 horas.
3. Menú Principal
Al encender el reproductor
MP3, aparecerá el menú principal con submenús
2
2. Utilización
Introducción
Enhorabuena por haber adquirido el
Reproductor THORN Su elevada integración reduce el
peso del dispositivo y sus dimensiones, haciendo que
sea muy fácil de utilizar. La gran pantalla con
tecnología TFT ofrece una información clara y nítida y
la interfaz USB 2.0 Alta Velocidad facilita las
operaciones de transferencia al ordenador y viceversa.
El Reproductor EM820 MP3 cuenta con una batería
recargable a través del puerto USB de su ordenador. A
través del micrófono integrado, se pueden grabar
mensajes de voz y reproducirlos directamente en el
dispositivo o en el ordenador.
Antes de utilizar este producto, lea este manual y
conserve las instrucciones para futuras consultas.
Descripción
Abajo encontrará una descripción del producto
1. Interruptor de encendido
ON/OFF
2. Play [] / Pause []
3. Anterior [] / Rebobinar []
4. Menú
5. Conexión de Auriculares
6. Conexión USB
7. VOL – (Bajar el Volumen)
8. Siguiente [] / Avanzar []
9. VOL + (Subir el Volumen)
10. Entrada tarjeta MICRO SD
1. Pantalla
Abajo encontrará una descripción de la pantalla
1. Número Total de Canciones
2. Localización de la Canción
Actual
3. Volumen
4. Formato del Fichero
5. Tiempo Transcurrido
6. Tiempo Total
7. Animación EQ
8. Nombre de la Canción
9. Modo Repetición
10. Batería restante
11. Modo EQ
12. Índice de Reproducción
2. Utilización
2.1 Interruptor de encendido ON/OFF
El reproductor MP3 cuenta con una batería
recargable. Antes de la primera utilización, se
recomienda cargar la batería durante un largo periodo
de tiempo (en torno a 8 horas). Para cargar la batería,
conecte el reproductor MP3 al puerto USB de su
ordenador.
Encender:
1. Coloque el botón On/O en posición On
Apagar:
1. Mantener pulsada la tecla Play [] / Pause []
hasta que comience la animación que precede al
apagado
2. Entonces, coloque el botón On/O en posición
O.
2.2 Cargar el Reproductor
El reproductor se puede cargar a través del cable
USB suministrado, conectándolo al PC. Mientras se
esté cargando, se encenderá un indicador en la parte
derecha. Primero debe encender
su PC y, luego, conectar el
reproductor al PC a través del cable
USB. El reproductor se habrá
cargado por completo al cabo de 2
o 3 horas.
3. Menú Principal
Al encender el reproductor
MP3, aparecerá el menú principal con submenús
(opcional), que le permitirá seleccionar diferentes
funciones y opciones.
Utilizando los botones [] o [], puede
seleccionar la opción deseada y a continuación pulsar
el botón M para conrmar su selección.
Para acceder al menú principal cuando esté
dentro de uno de esos submenús, pulse y mantenga
pulsada la tecla MENÚ [M] durante unos segundos.
(Pulsando brevemente la tecla MENÚ [M] se abre el
submenú de opciones de cada submenú).
Las opciones disponibles son:
Música: Seleccione esta opción para reproducir
música.
Vídeo: Seleccione esta opción para reproducir
vídeo AMV.
Grabación: Seleccione esta opción para grabar
mensajes de voz a través del micrófono interno.
Play: Seleccione esta opción para reproducir
mensajes de voz.
Radio: Seleccione esta opción para utilizar la
radio FM.
Texto: Seleccione esta opción para leer textos.
Juegos: Seleccione esta opción para jugar.
Imágenes: Seleccione esta opción para examinar
y ver fotos.
Ajustes: Seleccione esta opción para acceder a
la conguración del sistema.
3.1 Modo Música
La opción del reproductor de música permite
reproducir canciones. Para activar esta opción, siga las
siguientes instrucciones:
1. Encienda el Reproductor MP3 y en la pantalla
aparecerá el menú principal
2. Utilizando los botones [] o [], seleccione la
opción REPRODUCIR MÚSICA y pulse el botón [M].
3. Pulse el botón PLAY [] para iniciar la
reproducción de la primera canción disponible.
4. Pulse y mantenga pulsada la tecla M para
regresar al menú anterior.
3.1.1 Tecla de Función en
Modo Música
Durante la reproducción
de música, se pueden activar los
siguientes controles.
PLAY [Ź]: Pulse el botón
PLAY [] para empezar a
reproducir una canción. Pulse el botón PLAY de nuevo
para pausar la canción. Para reiniciar la reproducción
de la canción, pulse de nuevo el botón PLAY.
Si mantiene pulsado el botón PLAY durante más
tiempo, apagará el reproductor
REW & FFWD [] Pulsar [] o [] para
seleccionar la canción anterior o la siguiente.
Pulsar y Mantener pulsados los botones [] o
[] para rebobinar o avanzar de canción.
Volumen (VOL+ y VOL-): Pulse el botón [VOL+]
para subir el volumen y pulse el botón [VOL-] para
bajar el volumen.
3.1.2 Modo Música
Pulsando brevemente el botón MENÚ [M], se
entra en cada submenú. Pulse [] o [] para elegir y
luego pulse la tecla MENÚ [M] para conrmar cada
submenú. Siga los mismos pasos para navegar dentro
de cada submenú.
En ambos modos (modo reproducción y modo
stop), encontrará los siguientes submenús:
l En reproducción
l Todas las canciones
l Álbum
l Artistas
l Género: Normal, Rock, Pop, Clásico, Soft, Jazz y
DBB
l Carpeta Local
l Crear lista de reproducción
l Ajustes
- Modo repetición: Normal, Repetir1, Carpeta,
Repetir Carpeta, Repetir Todo, Aleatorio, Intro
- Ecualizador: Natural, Rock, Pop, Clásica, Soft,
Jazz, DBB
- Velocidad de reproducción: Velocidad ASS,
Velocidad FFREV
- Modo Repetición
- Selección etiqueta: Selección etiqueta, borrar
etiqueta, añadir etiqueta, Salir
l Borrar archivo
l Borrar todo
3.2 Vídeo
El MODO Vídeo permite reproducir vídeos en
formato AMV. Para activar esta opción, siga las
siguientes instrucciones:
Encienda el Reproductor MP3 y en la pantalla
aparecerá el menú principal.
1. Utilizando los botones [] o [], seleccione la
opción Vídeo y pulse el botón [M].
2. Pulse el botón PLAY [] para iniciar la
reproducción del primer video disponible.
3. Pulse y mantenga pulsada la tecla M para
regresar al menú anterior.
Nota: El Reproductor de Vídeo solo lee archivos
AMV, necesita convertir el resto de los formatos para
ver el vídeo deseado.
3.2.1 Tecla de Función en Modo Vídeo
Durante la reproducción de
música, se pueden activar los
siguientes controles.
PLAY [Ź]: Pulse el botón
PLAY [] para empezar a
reproducir un vídeo. Pulse el
botón PLAY de nuevo para pausar
el vídeo. Para reiniciar la
reproducción del vídeo, pulse el botón PLAY de
nuevo.
Si mantiene pulsado el botón PLAY durante más
tiempo, apagará el reproductor
REW & FFWD []: Pulsar [] o [] para
seleccionar el vídeo anterior o el siguiente.
Pulsar y Mantener pulsados los botones [] o
[] para rebobinar o avanzar de vídeo.
Volumen (VOL+ y VOL-): Pulse el botón [VOL+]
para subir el volumen y pulse el botón [VOL-] para
bajar el volumen.
3.2.2 Submenú AMV
Pulsando brevemente el botón MENÚ [M],
desplegará los siguientes submenús AMV. Pulse [] o
[] para elegir y luego pulse la tecla MENÚ [M] para
conrmar cada submenú. Siga los mismos pasos para
navegar dentro de cada submenú.
l Reproduciendo
l Carpeta Local: En este directorio, puede elegir
subir un nivel de carpeta pulsando la tecla MENÚ [M]
para conrmar. Y luego puede elegir la carpeta que
quiere reproducir
l Repetición
l Borrar archivo:Eliminar vídeo especíco.
l Borrar todo: Eliminar todos los vídeos utilizando
esta opción.
3.3 Grabar (grabador de mensajes de voz)
Esta opción permite grabar mensajes de voz
utilizando el micrófono integrado. Para grabar
mensajes, siga las siguientes instrucciones:
1. Encienda el Reproductor MP3 y en la pantalla
aparecerá el menú principal.
2. Utilizando los botones [] o [], seleccione la
opción RECORD y pulse el botón [M].
3. Pulse el botón PLAY [] para iniciar la
grabación.
4. Puede escuchar su chero wav en el submenú
VOZ.
Durante la grabación, Pulse el botón PLAY []
para iniciar la grabación. Pulsar el
botón PLAY de nuevo para pausar la
grabación. Si mantiene el botón PLAY
[] / M pulsado durante más
tiempo, detendrá la grabación.
Pulsando brevemente el botón
MENÚ [M], encontrará la CARPETA
LOCAL y el TIPO DE GRABACIÓN. Pulse [] o [] para
elegir y luego pulse la tecla MENÚ [M] para conrmar
cada submenú. Siga los mismos pasos para navegar
dentro de cada submenú.
1. En el submenú CARPETA LOCAL, puede elegir
subir un nivel de carpeta pulsando [M] para conrmar.
Y luego puede elegir la carpeta que quiere reproducir
2. En el submenú formato GRABACIÓN, puede
elegir el formato de grabación, que incluye
ACT/MP3/WAV/WMA.
3.4 Play (Reproductor de Mensajes de Voz)
La opción play permite reproducir mensajes de
voz grabados por el Reproductor MP3. Para activar
esta opción, siga las siguientes instrucciones:
1. Encienda el Reproductor MP3 y en la pantalla
aparecerá el menú principal.
2. Utilizando los botones [] o [], seleccione la
opción VOZ y pulse el botón [M].
3. Pulse el botón PLAY [] para iniciar la
reproducción de la primera grabación disponible.
3.4.1 Función Clave del Modo PLAY
Durante la reproducción de la grabación, se
pueden activar los siguientes controles.
PLAY [Ź]: Pulse el botón PLAY [] para
empezar a reproducir una grabación. Pulse el botón
PLAY de nuevo para pausar la grabación. Para reiniciar
la reproducción, pulse el botón PLAY de nuevo.
Si mantiene pulsado el botón PLAY durante más
tiempo, apagará el reproductor
REW & FFWD []: Pulsar []
o [] para seleccionar la grabación
anterior o la siguiente.
Pulsar y Mantener pulsados los
botones [] o [] para rebobinar o
avanzar de grabación.
Volumen (VOL+ y VOL-): Pulse
el botón [VOL+] para subir el volumen y pulse el
botón [VOL-] para bajar el volumen.
3.4.2 Submenú PLAY
Pulsando brevemente el botón MENÚ [M],
desplegará los submenús de música siguientes. Pulse
[] y [] para elegir y luego pulse la tecla MENÚ [M]
para conrmar cada submenú. Siga los mismos pasos
para navegar dentro de cada submenú.
l Carpeta Local: En este directorio, puede elegir
subir un nivel de carpeta pulsando la tecla MENÚ [M]
para conrmar. Y luego puede elegir la carpeta que
quiere reproducir
l Conguración:
- Modo repetición: Normal, Repetir1, Carpeta,
Repetir carpeta, Repetir todas, Aleatorio, Intro
- Velocidad de reproducción: Puede alterar el
Tempo de la Canción.
- Modo repetición
l Borrar archivo: Eliminar cheros de voz
especícos.
l Borrar Todos:
Eliminar todos los cheros de voz utilizando esta
opción.
3.5 FM (FM Radio)
Cuando está activado el modo Radio FM, se
pueden escuchar programas de radio.
Esta opción permite disfrutar de programas de
radio FM. Para utilizarla, siga las siguientes
instrucciones:
1. Encienda el Reproductor MP3 y en la pantalla
aparecerá el menú principal
2. Utilizando los botones [] o [], seleccione la
opción FM y luego pulse el botón [M] para conrmar.
3. Si hay frecuencias predenidas, pulse el botón
PLAY [] para reproducir la primera frecuencia,
pulse de nuevo para pasar a la siguiente frecuencia.
3.5.1 Submenú FM
Pulsando brevemente el botón MENÚ [M],
desplegará los siguientes submenús FM. Pulse [] y
[] para elegir y luego pulse la tecla MENÚ [M] para
conrmar cada submenú. Siga los mismos pasos para
navegar dentro de cada submenú.
Abajo encontrará la lista de opciones de radio
FM.
GUARDAR EMISORA: Seleccione esta opción
para memorizar frecuencias de radio
BORRAR EMISORA: Seleccione esta opción para
eliminar frecuencias de radio.
BORRAR TODAS: Seleccionar esta opción para
eliminar todas las frecuencias de radio.
BÚSQUEDA AUTOMÁTICA: Seleccione esta
opción para iniciar la búsqueda automática de
frecuencias de radio.
FRECUENCIA NORMAL: Seleccione esta opción
para activar la banda normal FM.
3.5.2 Búsqueda Automática
Para activar la búsqueda automática de las
frecuencias disponibles, siga las siguientes
instrucciones:
1. Cuando esté activado el Modo FM, pulse el
botón MENÚ [M] para seleccionar la opción
BÚSQUED
A AUTOMÁTICA.
2. Pulse el botón [M] para iniciar la búsqueda
automática. El Reproductor
MP3 almacenará las 20
primeras emisoras de radio
disponibles.
3.5.3 B ú s q u e d a
Manual y Memorización de
Frecuencias
Para buscar
manualmente las frecuencias,
siga las siguientes instrucciones:
1. Cuando esté activado el Modo FM, pulse
prolongadamente los botones [] o [] para iniciar
la búsqueda automática. La sintonización se detendrá
al encontrar una frecuencia disponible.
2. Pulsando brevemente los botones [] o [],
congurará la búsqueda.
3. Pulse el botón MENÚ [M] para seleccionar la
opción GUARDAR.
4. Pulse PLAY [] y esa emisora especíca se
memorizará como último canal.
5. Repita los pasos 1 al 4 para sintonizar cada
emisora teniendo en cuenta que el Reproductor MP3
puede memorizar 20 frecuencias.
3.5.4 Grabación de Radio FM (REC)
Para grabar un programa de radio FM, siga las
siguientes instrucciones:
1. Cuando esté activado el Modo Radio FM, pulse
el botón MENÚ [M] para seleccionar la opción
GRABACIÓN DE CALIDAD
2. Pulse el botón PLAY [] para iniciar la
grabación.
3. Pulse el botón PLAY [] para pausar la
grabación y púlselo de nuevo para reiniciar la
grabación.
4. Para detener la grabación y memorizarla,
pulse prolongadamente el botón [M] y regresará al
modo FM.
3.6 E-Book
La opción E-Book permite leer archivos de texto.
Para activar esta opción, siga las siguientes
instrucciones:
1. Encienda el Reproductor MP3 y en la pantalla
aparecerá el menú principal.
2. Utilizando los botones [] o [], seleccione
E-Book y pulse el botón [M] para conrmar.
3. Utilice los botones [] o [] para elegir el
archivo
4. Pulse el botón PLAY [] para empezar a leer
el archivo.
3.6.1 Submenú E-Book
Pulsando brevemente el botón MENÚ [M],
desplegará los submenús de música siguientes. Pulse
[] o [] para elegir y luego pulse la tecla [M] para
conrmar cada submenú. Siga los mismos pasos para
navegar dentro de cada submenú.
Antes de abrir un archivo, si pulsa M, aparecerá el
siguiente submenú:
l Carpeta Local: En este directorio, puede elegir
subir un nivel de carpeta pulsando la tecla MENÚ [M]
para conrmar. Y entonces podrá elegir la carpeta que
quiere reproducir
l Ajustes de reproducción:
Puede elegir entre reproducción
manual y reproducción
automática. Para la reproducción
automática, puede congurar el
tiempo de reproducción entre 1 y
10 segundos por página del E-Book.
l Borrar archivo: Eliminar archivos de texto
especícos.
l Borrar Todo: Eliminar todos los archivos de
texto utilizando esta opción.
Durante la lectura, si pulsa y mantiene pulsada la
tecla M, podrá seleccionar entre:
- Selección etiqueta
- Borrar etiqueta
- Añadir etiqueta
3.7 FOTO
La opción Foto permite visualizar cheros JPG.
Para activar esta opción, siga las siguientes
instrucciones:
1. Encienda el Reproductor MP3 y en la pantalla
aparecerá el menú principal.
2. Utilizando los botones [] o [], seleccione
FOTO y pulse el botón [M] para conrmar.
3. Utilice los botones [] o [] para elegir el
archivo
4. Pulse el botón PLAY [] para iniciar la
presentación del archivo
3.7.1 Submenú FOTO
Pulsando brevemente el botón MENÚ [M],
desplegará los submenús de música siguientes. Pulse
[] o [] para elegir y luego pulse la tecla –[M] para
conrmar cada submenú. Siga los mismos pasos para
navegar dentro de cada submenú.
l Carpeta Local: En este directorio, puede elegir
subir un nivel de carpeta pulsando PLAY [] para
conrmar. Y entonces podrá elegir la carpeta que
quiere reproducir
l Ajustes de reproducción: Puede elegir entre
reproducción manual y reproducción automática.
Para la reproducción
automática, puede denir el
tiempo de reproducción
entre 1 y 10 segundos por
fotografía.
l Borrar archivo:
Eliminar cheros de fotos
especícos.
l Borrar Todo: Eliminar
Todas las Fotos utilizando
esta opción
3.8 JUEGOS
La opción JUEGOS permite jugar a juegos. Para
activar esta opción, siga las siguientes instrucciones:
1. Encienda el Reproductor MP3 y en la pantalla
aparecerá el menú principal.
2. Utilizando los botones [] o [] para
seleccionar JUEGOS, pulse el botón [M] para entrar en
el MENÚ JUEGOS.
Dentro del menú Juegos, solo hay un juego que
puede utilizar, el Russia Brick, pulse el botón [M] para
conrmar
3.9 Ajustes
Las opciones de AJUSTES permiten acceder al
sistema de conguración del Reproductor. Para
acceder al sistema de conguración, siga las
instrucciones:
1. Encienda el reproductor MP3 y en la pantalla
aparecerá el menú principal.
2. Utilizando [] o [], seleccione la opción de
SISTEMA y luego pulse el botón [M] para entrar en el
MENÚ SISTEMA.
3. Utilizando [] o [], seleccione los
parámetros de conguración del sistema y pulse el
botón MENÚ [M].
Los parámetros disponibles en el sistema de
conguración son:
Ajustar reloj: Esta opción permite congurar la
fecha y la hora del sistema.
Ajuste LCD: Esta opción permite congurar el
brillo, el contraste y la pantalla negra en el panel LCD.
Idioma: Esta opción permite congurar el Idioma
de la Interfaz del Usuario.
Desconex.automática: Esta opción permite
congurar el tiempo de apagado y de inactividad.
Modo Repetición:
Modo en línea:
Info de Memoria: Esta opción permite vericar el
uso de la memoria.
Versión Firmware: Esta opción permite vericar
la versión del rmware.
Actualización Firmware:
Esta opción permite actualizar el
rmware.
3.9.1 Ajustar reloj
Esta opción permite
congurar la fecha y la hora del
sistema. Los dígitos superiores
muestran la fecha en formato
Año: Mes: Formato Día y los dígitos inferiores
muestran la Hora en formato Hora: Minutos: Formato
Segundos. Para cambiar de fecha y hora, siga las
siguientes instrucciones:
1. En el MENÚ DE INSTALACIÓN, elija RELOJ
pulsando [] o [] y pulse [M] para conrmar
2. Pulse [VOL+] y [VOL-] para elegir el parámetro
que quiere ajustar
3. Pulse [] o [] para cambiar el valor. Pulse
MENÚ [M] para conrmar.
3.9.2 Congurar Apagado
Esta opción permite congurar el tiempo de
apagado y de inactividad. Al congurar el Tiempo de
apagado, se pueden activar (30s, 60s, 90s y 120s) o
desactivar las funciones de gestión de la energía para
que su reproductor se apague automáticamente si no
lo está utilizando. Al denir el Tiempo de Inactividad,
se puede congurar el reproductor para que se
apague al pasar cierto tiempo (30s, 60s, 90s, 120s)
desde el momento en que conrme esta selección.
Para modicar este parámetro, siga las
siguientes instrucciones:
1. En el MENÚ DE INSTALACIÓN, elija
DESCONEXIÓN AUTOMÁTICA pulsando [] o [] y
pulse PLAY [].
2. Utilizando los botones [] o [], seleccione
INACTIVO (tiempo de apagado) o AUTO APAGADO
(tiempo de inactividad) y pulse el botón [M].
3. Elija el DESCONEXIÓN AUTOMÁTICA o
INACTIVO deseado y pulse [M] para conrmar.
Información de la Memoria
La imagen muestra el volumen total del disco, el
porcentaje utilizado y el porcentaje de espacio
utilizado respecto al espacio total.
Especicaciones
Aviso: No será informado en caso de cambios en el
diseño de producción y en las especicaciones.
Condiciones de Garantía
- Este equipo tiene garantía de 2 años a partir de la
fecha original de compra.
- Serán exentas de la garantía las averías producidas
por un uso incorrecto del aparato, mala instalación o
instalados en lugares inapropiados para su buena
conservación, roturas, actualizaciones de software que
no sean los facilitados por la marca, piezas desgastadas
por su propio uso o por un uso no doméstico o
inadecuado, así como, por manipulación por personas o
talleres ajenos a nuestra empresa.
- Para que la garantía tenga validez, se deberá
adjuntar la factura o tíquet de caja que corrobore la
adquisición y fecha de venta de este producto.
3
Introducción
Enhorabuena por haber adquirido el
Reproductor THORN Su elevada integración reduce el
peso del dispositivo y sus dimensiones, haciendo que
sea muy fácil de utilizar. La gran pantalla con
tecnología TFT ofrece una información clara y nítida y
la interfaz USB 2.0 Alta Velocidad facilita las
operaciones de transferencia al ordenador y viceversa.
El Reproductor EM820 MP3 cuenta con una batería
recargable a través del puerto USB de su ordenador. A
través del micrófono integrado, se pueden grabar
mensajes de voz y reproducirlos directamente en el
dispositivo o en el ordenador.
Antes de utilizar este producto, lea este manual y
conserve las instrucciones para futuras consultas.
Descripción
Abajo encontrará una descripción del producto
1. Interruptor de encendido
ON/OFF
2. Play [] / Pause []
3. Anterior [] / Rebobinar []
4. Menú
5. Conexión de Auriculares
6. Conexión USB
7. VOL – (Bajar el Volumen)
8. Siguiente [] / Avanzar []
9. VOL + (Subir el Volumen)
10. Entrada tarjeta MICRO SD
1. Pantalla
Abajo encontrará una descripción de la pantalla
1. Número Total de Canciones
2. Localización de la Canción
Actual
3. Volumen
4. Formato del Fichero
5. Tiempo Transcurrido
6. Tiempo Total
7. Animación EQ
8. Nombre de la Canción
9. Modo Repetición
10. Batería restante
11. Modo EQ
12. Índice de Reproducción
2. Utilización
2.1 Interruptor de encendido ON/OFF
El reproductor MP3 cuenta con una batería
recargable. Antes de la primera utilización, se
recomienda cargar la batería durante un largo periodo
de tiempo (en torno a 8 horas). Para cargar la batería,
conecte el reproductor MP3 al puerto USB de su
ordenador.
Encender:
1. Coloque el botón On/O en posición On
Apagar:
1. Mantener pulsada la tecla Play [] / Pause []
hasta que comience la animación que precede al
apagado
2. Entonces, coloque el botón On/O en posición
O.
2.2 Cargar el Reproductor
El reproductor se puede cargar a través del cable
USB suministrado, conectándolo al PC. Mientras se
esté cargando, se encenderá un indicador en la parte
derecha. Primero debe encender
su PC y, luego, conectar el
reproductor al PC a través del cable
USB. El reproductor se habrá
cargado por completo al cabo de 2
o 3 horas.
3. Menú Principal
Al encender el reproductor
MP3, aparecerá el menú principal con submenús
(opcional), que le permitirá seleccionar diferentes
funciones y opciones.
Utilizando los botones [] o [], puede
seleccionar la opción deseada y a continuación pulsar
el botón M para conrmar su selección.
Para acceder al menú principal cuando esté
dentro de uno de esos submenús, pulse y mantenga
pulsada la tecla MENÚ [M] durante unos segundos.
(Pulsando brevemente la tecla MENÚ [M] se abre el
submenú de opciones de cada submenú).
Las opciones disponibles son:
Música: Seleccione esta opción para reproducir
música.
Vídeo: Seleccione esta opción para reproducir
vídeo AMV.
Grabación: Seleccione esta opción para grabar
mensajes de voz a través del micrófono interno.
Play: Seleccione esta opción para reproducir
mensajes de voz.
Radio: Seleccione esta opción para utilizar la
radio FM.
Texto: Seleccione esta opción para leer textos.
Juegos: Seleccione esta opción para jugar.
Imágenes: Seleccione esta opción para examinar
y ver fotos.
Ajustes: Seleccione esta opción para acceder a
la conguración del sistema.
3.1 Modo Música
La opción del reproductor de música permite
reproducir canciones. Para activar esta opción, siga las
siguientes instrucciones:
1. Encienda el Reproductor MP3 y en la pantalla
aparecerá el menú principal
2. Utilizando los botones [] o [], seleccione la
opción REPRODUCIR MÚSICA y pulse el botón [M].
3. Pulse el botón PLAY [] para iniciar la
reproducción de la primera canción disponible.
4. Pulse y mantenga pulsada la tecla M para
regresar al menú anterior.
3.1.1 Tecla de Función en
Modo Música
Durante la reproducción
de música, se pueden activar los
siguientes controles.
PLAY [Ź]: Pulse el botón
PLAY [] para empezar a
reproducir una canción. Pulse el botón PLAY de nuevo
para pausar la canción. Para reiniciar la reproducción
de la canción, pulse de nuevo el botón PLAY.
Si mantiene pulsado el botón PLAY durante más
tiempo, apagará el reproductor
REW & FFWD [] Pulsar [] o [] para
seleccionar la canción anterior o la siguiente.
Pulsar y Mantener pulsados los botones [] o
[] para rebobinar o avanzar de canción.
Volumen (VOL+ y VOL-): Pulse el botón [VOL+]
para subir el volumen y pulse el botón [VOL-] para
bajar el volumen.
3.1.2 Modo Música
Pulsando brevemente el botón MENÚ [M], se
entra en cada submenú. Pulse [] o [] para elegir y
luego pulse la tecla MENÚ [M] para conrmar cada
submenú. Siga los mismos pasos para navegar dentro
de cada submenú.
En ambos modos (modo reproducción y modo
stop), encontrará los siguientes submenús:
l En reproducción
l Todas las canciones
l Álbum
l Artistas
l Género: Normal, Rock, Pop, Clásico, Soft, Jazz y
DBB
l Carpeta Local
l Crear lista de reproducción
l Ajustes
- Modo repetición: Normal, Repetir1, Carpeta,
Repetir Carpeta, Repetir Todo, Aleatorio, Intro
- Ecualizador: Natural, Rock, Pop, Clásica, Soft,
Jazz, DBB
- Velocidad de reproducción: Velocidad ASS,
Velocidad FFREV
- Modo Repetición
- Selección etiqueta: Selección etiqueta, borrar
etiqueta, añadir etiqueta, Salir
l Borrar archivo
l Borrar todo
3.2 Vídeo
El MODO Vídeo permite reproducir vídeos en
formato AMV. Para activar esta opción, siga las
siguientes instrucciones:
Encienda el Reproductor MP3 y en la pantalla
aparecerá el menú principal.
1. Utilizando los botones [] o [], seleccione la
opción Vídeo y pulse el botón [M].
2. Pulse el botón PLAY [] para iniciar la
reproducción del primer video disponible.
3. Pulse y mantenga pulsada la tecla M para
regresar al menú anterior.
Nota: El Reproductor de Vídeo solo lee archivos
AMV, necesita convertir el resto de los formatos para
ver el vídeo deseado.
3.2.1 Tecla de Función en Modo Vídeo
Durante la reproducción de
música, se pueden activar los
siguientes controles.
PLAY [Ź]: Pulse el botón
PLAY [] para empezar a
reproducir un vídeo. Pulse el
botón PLAY de nuevo para pausar
el vídeo. Para reiniciar la
reproducción del vídeo, pulse el botón PLAY de
nuevo.
Si mantiene pulsado el botón PLAY durante más
tiempo, apagará el reproductor
REW & FFWD []: Pulsar [] o [] para
seleccionar el vídeo anterior o el siguiente.
Pulsar y Mantener pulsados los botones [] o
[] para rebobinar o avanzar de vídeo.
Volumen (VOL+ y VOL-): Pulse el botón [VOL+]
para subir el volumen y pulse el botón [VOL-] para
bajar el volumen.
3.2.2 Submenú AMV
Pulsando brevemente el botón MENÚ [M],
desplegará los siguientes submenús AMV. Pulse [] o
[] para elegir y luego pulse la tecla MENÚ [M] para
conrmar cada submenú. Siga los mismos pasos para
navegar dentro de cada submenú.
l Reproduciendo
l Carpeta Local: En este directorio, puede elegir
subir un nivel de carpeta pulsando la tecla MENÚ [M]
para conrmar. Y luego puede elegir la carpeta que
quiere reproducir
l Repetición
l Borrar archivo:Eliminar vídeo especíco.
l Borrar todo: Eliminar todos los vídeos utilizando
esta opción.
3.3 Grabar (grabador de mensajes de voz)
Esta opción permite grabar mensajes de voz
utilizando el micrófono integrado. Para grabar
mensajes, siga las siguientes instrucciones:
1. Encienda el Reproductor MP3 y en la pantalla
aparecerá el menú principal.
2. Utilizando los botones [] o [], seleccione la
opción RECORD y pulse el botón [M].
3. Pulse el botón PLAY [] para iniciar la
grabación.
4. Puede escuchar su chero wav en el submenú
VOZ.
Durante la grabación, Pulse el botón PLAY []
para iniciar la grabación. Pulsar el
botón PLAY de nuevo para pausar la
grabación. Si mantiene el botón PLAY
[] / M pulsado durante más
tiempo, detendrá la grabación.
Pulsando brevemente el botón
MENÚ [M], encontrará la CARPETA
LOCAL y el TIPO DE GRABACIÓN. Pulse [] o [] para
elegir y luego pulse la tecla MENÚ [M] para conrmar
cada submenú. Siga los mismos pasos para navegar
dentro de cada submenú.
1. En el submenú CARPETA LOCAL, puede elegir
subir un nivel de carpeta pulsando [M] para conrmar.
Y luego puede elegir la carpeta que quiere reproducir
2. En el submenú formato GRABACIÓN, puede
elegir el formato de grabación, que incluye
ACT/MP3/WAV/WMA.
3.4 Play (Reproductor de Mensajes de Voz)
La opción play permite reproducir mensajes de
voz grabados por el Reproductor MP3. Para activar
esta opción, siga las siguientes instrucciones:
1. Encienda el Reproductor MP3 y en la pantalla
aparecerá el menú principal.
2. Utilizando los botones [] o [], seleccione la
opción VOZ y pulse el botón [M].
3. Pulse el botón PLAY [] para iniciar la
reproducción de la primera grabación disponible.
3.4.1 Función Clave del Modo PLAY
Durante la reproducción de la grabación, se
pueden activar los siguientes controles.
PLAY [Ź]: Pulse el botón PLAY [] para
empezar a reproducir una grabación. Pulse el botón
PLAY de nuevo para pausar la grabación. Para reiniciar
la reproducción, pulse el botón PLAY de nuevo.
Si mantiene pulsado el botón PLAY durante más
tiempo, apagará el reproductor
REW & FFWD []: Pulsar []
o [] para seleccionar la grabación
anterior o la siguiente.
Pulsar y Mantener pulsados los
botones [] o [] para rebobinar o
avanzar de grabación.
Volumen (VOL+ y VOL-): Pulse
el botón [VOL+] para subir el volumen y pulse el
botón [VOL-] para bajar el volumen.
3.4.2 Submenú PLAY
Pulsando brevemente el botón MENÚ [M],
desplegará los submenús de música siguientes. Pulse
[] y [] para elegir y luego pulse la tecla MENÚ [M]
para conrmar cada submenú. Siga los mismos pasos
para navegar dentro de cada submenú.
l Carpeta Local: En este directorio, puede elegir
subir un nivel de carpeta pulsando la tecla MENÚ [M]
para conrmar. Y luego puede elegir la carpeta que
quiere reproducir
l Conguración:
- Modo repetición: Normal, Repetir1, Carpeta,
Repetir carpeta, Repetir todas, Aleatorio, Intro
- Velocidad de reproducción: Puede alterar el
Tempo de la Canción.
- Modo repetición
l Borrar archivo: Eliminar cheros de voz
especícos.
l Borrar Todos:
Eliminar todos los cheros de voz utilizando esta
opción.
3.5 FM (FM Radio)
Cuando está activado el modo Radio FM, se
pueden escuchar programas de radio.
Esta opción permite disfrutar de programas de
radio FM. Para utilizarla, siga las siguientes
instrucciones:
1. Encienda el Reproductor MP3 y en la pantalla
aparecerá el menú principal
2. Utilizando los botones [] o [], seleccione la
opción FM y luego pulse el botón [M] para conrmar.
3. Si hay frecuencias predenidas, pulse el botón
PLAY [] para reproducir la primera frecuencia,
pulse de nuevo para pasar a la siguiente frecuencia.
3.5.1 Submenú FM
Pulsando brevemente el botón MENÚ [M],
desplegará los siguientes submenús FM. Pulse [] y
[] para elegir y luego pulse la tecla MENÚ [M] para
conrmar cada submenú. Siga los mismos pasos para
navegar dentro de cada submenú.
Abajo encontrará la lista de opciones de radio
FM.
GUARDAR EMISORA: Seleccione esta opción
para memorizar frecuencias de radio
BORRAR EMISORA: Seleccione esta opción para
eliminar frecuencias de radio.
BORRAR TODAS: Seleccionar esta opción para
eliminar todas las frecuencias de radio.
BÚSQUEDA AUTOMÁTICA: Seleccione esta
opción para iniciar la búsqueda automática de
frecuencias de radio.
FRECUENCIA NORMAL: Seleccione esta opción
para activar la banda normal FM.
3.5.2 Búsqueda Automática
Para activar la búsqueda automática de las
frecuencias disponibles, siga las siguientes
instrucciones:
1. Cuando esté activado el Modo FM, pulse el
botón MENÚ [M] para seleccionar la opción
BÚSQUEDA AUTOMÁTICA.
2. Pulse el botón [M] para iniciar la búsqueda
automática. El Reproductor
MP3 almacenará las 20
primeras emisoras de radio
disponibles.
3.5.3 B ú s q u e d a
Manual y Memorización de
Frecuencias
Para buscar
manualmente las frecuencias,
siga las siguientes instrucciones:
1. Cuando esté activado el Modo FM, pulse
prolongadamente los botones [] o [] para iniciar
la búsqueda automática. La sintonización se detendrá
al encontrar una frecuencia disponible.
2. Pulsando brevemente los botones [] o [],
congurará la búsqueda.
3. Pulse el botón MENÚ [M] para seleccionar la
opción GUARDAR.
4. Pulse PLAY [] y esa emisora especíca se
memorizará como último canal.
5. Repita los pasos 1 al 4 para sintonizar cada
emisora teniendo en cuenta que el Reproductor MP3
puede memorizar 20 frecuencias.
3.5.4 Grabación de Radio FM (REC)
Para grabar un programa de radio FM, siga las
siguientes instrucciones:
1. Cuando esté activado el Modo Radio FM, pulse
el botón MENÚ [M] para seleccionar la opción
GRABACIÓN DE CALIDAD
2. Pulse el botón PLAY [] para iniciar la
grabación.
3. Pulse el botón PLAY [] para pausar la
grabación y púlselo de nuevo para reiniciar la
grabación.
4. Para detener la grabación y memorizarla,
pulse prolongadamente el botón [M] y regresará al
modo F
M.
3.6 E-Book
La opción E-Book permite leer archivos de texto.
Para activar esta opción, siga las siguientes
instrucciones:
1. Encienda el Reproductor MP3 y en la pantalla
aparecerá el menú principal.
2. Utilizando los botones [] o [], seleccione
E-Book y pulse el botón [M] para conrmar.
3. Utilice los botones [] o [] para elegir el
archivo
4. Pulse el botón PLAY [] para empezar a leer
el archivo.
3.6.1 Submenú E-Book
Pulsando brevemente el botón MENÚ [M],
desplegará los submenús de música siguientes. Pulse
[] o [] para elegir y luego pulse la tecla [M] para
conrmar cada submenú. Siga los mismos pasos para
navegar dentro de cada submenú.
Antes de abrir un archivo, si pulsa M, aparecerá el
siguiente submenú:
l Carpeta Local: En este directorio, puede elegir
subir un nivel de carpeta pulsando la tecla MENÚ [M]
para conrmar. Y entonces podrá elegir la carpeta que
quiere reproducir
l Ajustes de reproducción:
Puede elegir entre reproducción
manual y reproducción
automática. Para la reproducción
automática, puede congurar el
tiempo de reproducción entre 1 y
10 segundos por página del E-Book.
l Borrar archivo: Eliminar archivos de texto
especícos.
l Borrar Todo: Eliminar todos los archivos de
texto utilizando esta opción.
Durante la lectura, si pulsa y mantiene pulsada la
tecla M, podrá seleccionar entre:
- Selección etiqueta
- Borrar etiqueta
- Añadir etiqueta
3.7 FOTO
La opción Foto permite visualizar cheros JPG.
Para activar esta opción, siga las siguientes
instrucciones:
1. Encienda el Reproductor MP3 y en la pantalla
aparecerá el menú principal.
2. Utilizando los botones [] o [], seleccione
FOTO y pulse el botón [M] para conrmar.
3. Utilice los botones [] o [] para elegir el
archivo
4. Pulse el botón PLAY [] para iniciar la
presentación del archivo
3.7.1 Submenú FOTO
Pulsando brevemente el botón MENÚ [M],
desplegará los submenús de música siguientes. Pulse
[] o [] para elegir y luego pulse la tecla –[M] para
conrmar cada submenú. Siga los mismos pasos para
navegar dentro de cada submenú.
l Carpeta Local: En este directorio, puede elegir
subir un nivel de carpeta pulsando PLAY [] para
conrmar. Y entonces podrá elegir la carpeta que
quiere reproducir
l Ajustes de reproducción: Puede elegir entre
reproducción manual y reproducción automática.
Para la reproducción
automática, puede denir el
tiempo de reproducción
entre 1 y 10 segundos por
fotografía.
l Borrar archivo:
Eliminar cheros de fotos
especícos.
l Borrar Todo: Eliminar
Todas las Fotos utilizando
esta opción
3.8 JUEGOS
La opción JUEGOS permite jugar a juegos. Para
activar esta opción, siga las siguientes instrucciones:
1. Encienda el Reproductor MP3 y en la pantalla
aparecerá el menú principal.
2. Utilizando los botones [] o [] para
seleccionar JUEGOS, pulse el botón [M] para entrar en
el MENÚ JUEGOS.
Dentro del menú Juegos, solo hay un juego que
puede utilizar, el Russia Brick, pulse el botón [M] para
conrmar
3.9 Ajustes
Las opciones de AJUSTES permiten acceder al
sistema de conguración del Reproductor. Para
acceder al sistema de conguración, siga las
instrucciones:
1. Encienda el reproductor MP3 y en la pantalla
aparecerá el menú principal.
2. Utilizando [] o [], seleccione la opción de
SISTEMA y luego pulse el botón [M] para entrar en el
MENÚ SISTEMA.
3. Utilizando [] o [], seleccione los
parámetros de conguración del sistema y pulse el
botón MENÚ [M].
Los parámetros disponibles en el sistema de
conguración son:
Ajustar reloj: Esta opción permite congurar la
fecha y la hora del sistema.
Ajuste LCD: Esta opción permite congurar el
brillo, el contraste y la pantalla negra en el panel LCD.
Idioma: Esta opción permite congurar el Idioma
de la Interfaz del Usuario.
Desconex.automática: Esta opción permite
congurar el tiempo de apagado y de inactividad.
Modo Repetición:
Modo en línea:
Info de Memoria: Esta opción permite vericar el
uso de la memoria.
Versión Firmware: Esta opción permite vericar
la versión del rmware.
Actualización Firmware:
Esta opción permite actualizar el
rmware.
3.9.1 Ajustar reloj
Esta opción permite
congurar la fecha y la hora del
sistema. Los dígitos superiores
muestran la fecha en formato
Año: Mes: Formato Día y los dígitos inferiores
muestran la Hora en formato Hora: Minutos: Formato
Segundos. Para cambiar de fecha y hora, siga las
siguientes instrucciones:
1. En el MENÚ DE INSTALACIÓN, elija RELOJ
pulsando [] o [] y pulse [M] para conrmar
2. Pulse [VOL+] y [VOL-] para elegir el parámetro
que quiere ajustar
3. Pulse [] o [] para cambiar el valor. Pulse
MENÚ [M] para conrmar.
3.9.2 Congurar Apagado
Esta opción permite congurar el tiempo de
apagado y de inactividad. Al congurar el Tiempo de
apagado, se pueden activar (30s, 60s, 90s y 120s) o
desactivar las funciones de gestión de la energía para
que su reproductor se apague automáticamente si no
lo está utilizando. Al denir el Tiempo de Inactividad,
se puede congurar el reproductor para que se
apague al pasar cierto tiempo (30s, 60s, 90s, 120s)
desde el momento en que conrme esta selección.
Para modicar este parámetro, siga las
siguientes instrucciones:
1. En el MENÚ DE INSTALACIÓN, elija
DESCONEXIÓN AUTOMÁTICA pulsando [] o [] y
pulse PLAY [].
2. Utilizando los botones [] o [], seleccione
INACTIVO (tiempo de apagado) o AUTO APAGADO
(tiempo de inactividad) y pulse el botón [M].
3. Elija el DESCONEXIÓN AUTOMÁTICA o
INACTIVO deseado y pulse [M] para conrmar.
Información de la Memoria
La imagen muestra el volumen total del disco, el
porcentaje utilizado y el porcentaje de espacio
utilizado respecto al espacio total.
Especicaciones
Aviso: No será informado en caso de cambios en el
diseño de producción y en las especicaciones.
Condiciones de Garantía
- Este equipo tiene garantía de 2 años a partir de la
fecha original de compra.
- Serán exentas de la garantía las averías producidas
por un uso incorrecto del aparato, mala instalación o
instalados en lugares inapropiados para su buena
conservación, roturas, actualizaciones de software que
no sean los facilitados por la marca, piezas desgastadas
por su propio uso o por un uso no doméstico o
inadecuado, así como, por manipulación por personas o
talleres ajenos a nuestra empresa.
- Para que la garantía tenga validez, se deberá
adjuntar la factura o tíquet de caja que corrobore la
adquisición y fecha de venta de este producto.
4
Introducción
Enhorabuena por haber adquirido el
Reproductor THORN Su elevada integración reduce el
peso del dispositivo y sus dimensiones, haciendo que
sea muy fácil de utilizar. La gran pantalla con
tecnología TFT ofrece una información clara y nítida y
la interfaz USB 2.0 Alta Velocidad facilita las
operaciones de transferencia al ordenador y viceversa.
El Reproductor EM820 MP3 cuenta con una batería
recargable a través del puerto USB de su ordenador. A
través del micrófono integrado, se pueden grabar
mensajes de voz y reproducirlos directamente en el
dispositivo o en el ordenador.
Antes de utilizar este producto, lea este manual y
conserve las instrucciones para futuras consultas.
Descripción
Abajo encontrará una descripción del producto
1. Interruptor de encendido
ON/OFF
2. Play [] / Pause []
3. Anterior [] / Rebobinar []
4. Menú
5. Conexión de Auriculares
6. Conexión USB
7. VOL – (Bajar el Volumen)
8. Siguiente [] / Avanzar []
9. VOL + (Subir el Volumen)
10. Entrada tarjeta MICRO SD
1. Pantalla
Abajo encontrará una descripción de la pantalla
1. Número Total de Canciones
2. Localización de la Canción
Actual
3. Volumen
4. Formato del Fichero
5. Tiempo Transcurrido
6. Tiempo Total
7. Animación EQ
8. Nombre de la Canción
9. Modo Repetición
10. Batería restante
11. Modo EQ
12. Índice de Reproducción
2. Utilización
2.1 Interruptor de encendido ON/OFF
El reproductor MP3 cuenta con una batería
recargable. Antes de la primera utilización, se
recomienda cargar la batería durante un largo periodo
de tiempo (en torno a 8 horas). Para cargar la batería,
conecte el reproductor MP3 al puerto USB de su
ordenador.
Encender:
1. Coloque el botón On/O en posición On
Apagar:
1. Mantener pulsada la tecla Play [] / Pause []
hasta que comience la animación que precede al
apagado
2. Entonces, coloque el botón On/O en posición
O.
2.2 Cargar el Reproductor
El reproductor se puede cargar a través del cable
USB suministrado, conectándolo al PC. Mientras se
esté cargando, se encenderá un indicador en la parte
derecha. Primero debe encender
su PC y, luego, conectar el
reproductor al PC a través del cable
USB. El reproductor se habrá
cargado por completo al cabo de 2
o 3 horas.
3. Menú Principal
Al encender el reproductor
MP3, aparecerá el menú principal con submenús
(opcional), que le permitirá seleccionar diferentes
funciones y opciones.
Utilizando los botones [] o [], puede
seleccionar la opción deseada y a continuación pulsar
el botón M para conrmar su selección.
Para acceder al menú principal cuando esté
dentro de uno de esos submenús, pulse y mantenga
pulsada la tecla MENÚ [M] durante unos segundos.
(Pulsando brevemente la tecla MENÚ [M] se abre el
submenú de opciones de cada submenú).
Las opciones disponibles son:
Música: Seleccione esta opción para reproducir
música.
Vídeo: Seleccione esta opción para reproducir
vídeo AMV.
Grabación: Seleccione esta opción para grabar
mensajes de voz a través del micrófono interno.
Play: Seleccione esta opción para reproducir
mensajes de voz.
Radio: Seleccione esta opción para utilizar la
radio FM.
Texto: Seleccione esta opción para leer textos.
Juegos: Seleccione esta opción para jugar.
Imágenes: Seleccione esta opción para examinar
y ver fotos.
Ajustes: Seleccione esta opción para acceder a
la conguración del sistema.
3.1 Modo Música
La opción del reproductor de música permite
reproducir canciones. Para activar esta opción, siga las
siguientes instrucciones:
1. Encienda el Reproductor MP3 y en la pantalla
aparecerá el menú principal
2. Utilizando los botones [] o [], seleccione la
opción REPRODUCIR MÚSICA y pulse el botón [M].
3. Pulse el botón PLAY [] para iniciar la
reproducción de la primera canción disponible.
4. Pulse y mantenga pulsada la tecla M para
regresar al menú anterior.
3.1.1 Tecla de Función en
Modo Música
Durante la reproducción
de música, se pueden activar los
siguientes controles.
PLAY [Ź]: Pulse el botón
PLAY [] para empezar a
reproducir una canción. Pulse el botón PLAY de nuevo
para pausar la canción. Para reiniciar la reproducción
de la canción, pulse de nuevo el botón PLAY.
Si mantiene pulsado el botón PLAY durante más
tiempo, apagará el reproductor
REW & FFWD [] Pulsar [] o [] para
seleccionar la canción anterior o la siguiente.
Pulsar y Mantener pulsados los botones [] o
[] para rebobinar o avanzar de canción.
Volumen (VOL+ y VOL-): Pulse el botón [VOL+]
para subir el volumen y pulse el botón [VOL-] para
bajar el volumen.
3.1.2 Modo Música
Pulsando brevemente el botón MENÚ [M], se
entra en cada submenú. Pulse [] o [] para elegir y
luego pulse la tecla MENÚ [M] para conrmar cada
submenú. Siga los mismos pasos para navegar dentro
de cada submenú.
En ambos modos (modo reproducción y modo
stop), encontrará los siguientes submenús:
l En reproducción
l Todas las canciones
l Álbum
l Artistas
l Género: Normal, Rock, Pop, Clásico, Soft, Jazz y
DBB
l Carpeta Local
l Crear lista de reproducción
l Ajustes
- Modo repetición: Normal, Repetir1, Carpeta,
Repetir Carpeta, Repetir Todo, Aleatorio, Intro
- Ecualizador: Natural, Rock, Pop, Clásica, Soft,
Jazz, DBB
- Velocidad de reproducción: Velocidad ASS,
Velocidad FFREV
- Modo Repetición
- Selección etiqueta: Selección etiqueta, borrar
etiqueta, añadir etiqueta, Salir
l Borrar archivo
l Borrar todo
3.2 Vídeo
El MODO Vídeo permite reproducir vídeos en
formato AMV. Para activar esta opción, siga las
siguientes instrucciones:
Encienda el Reproductor MP3 y en la pantalla
aparecerá el menú principal.
1. Utilizando los botones [] o [], seleccione la
opción Vídeo y pulse el botón [M].
2. Pulse el botón PLAY [] para iniciar la
reproducción del primer video disponible.
3. Pulse y mantenga pulsada la tecla M para
regresar al menú anterior.
Nota: El Reproductor de Vídeo solo lee archivos
AMV, necesita convertir el resto de los formatos para
ver el vídeo deseado.
3.2.1 Tecla de Función en Modo Vídeo
Durante la reproducción de
música, se pueden activar los
siguientes controles.
PLAY [Ź]: Pulse el botón
PLAY [] para empezar a
reproducir un vídeo. Pulse el
botón PLAY de nuevo para pausar
el vídeo. Para reiniciar la
reproducción del vídeo, pulse el botón PLAY de
nuevo.
Si mantiene pulsado el botón PLAY durante más
tiempo, apagará el reproductor
REW & FFWD []: Pulsar [] o [] para
seleccionar el vídeo anterior o el siguiente.
Pulsar y Mantener pulsados los botones [] o
[] para rebobinar o avanzar de vídeo.
Volumen (VOL+ y VOL-): Pulse el botón [VOL+]
para subir el volumen y pulse el botón [VOL-] para
bajar el volumen.
3.2.2 Submenú AMV
Pulsando brevemente el botón MENÚ [M],
desplegará los siguientes submenús AMV. Pulse [] o
[] para elegir y luego pulse la tecla MENÚ [M] para
conrmar cada submenú. Siga los mismos pasos para
navegar dentro de cada submenú.
l Reproduciendo
l Carpeta Local: En este directorio, puede elegir
subir un nivel de carpeta pulsando la tecla MENÚ [M]
para conrmar. Y luego puede elegir la carpeta que
quiere reproducir
l Repetición
l Borrar archivo:Eliminar vídeo especíco.
l Borrar todo: Eliminar todos los vídeos utilizando
esta opción.
3.3 Grabar (grabador de mensajes de voz)
Esta opción permite grabar mensajes de voz
utilizando el micrófono integrado. Para grabar
mensajes, siga las siguientes instrucciones:
1. Encienda el Reproductor MP3 y en la pantalla
aparecerá el menú principal.
2. Utilizando los botones [] o [], seleccione la
opción RECORD y pulse el botón [M].
3. Pulse el botón PLAY [] para iniciar la
grabación.
4. Puede escuchar su chero wav en el submenú
VOZ.
Durante la grabación, Pulse el botón PLAY []
para iniciar la grabación. Pulsar el
botón PLAY de nuevo para pausar la
grabación. Si mantiene el botón PLAY
[] / M pulsado durante más
tiempo, detendrá la grabación.
Pulsando brevemente el botón
MENÚ [M], encontrará la CARPETA
LOCAL y el TIPO DE GRABACIÓN. Pulse [] o [] para
elegir y luego pulse la tecla MENÚ [M] para conrmar
cada submenú. Siga los mismos pasos para navegar
dentro de cada submenú.
1. En el submenú CARPETA LOCAL, puede elegir
subir un nivel de carpeta pulsando [M] para conrmar.
Y luego puede elegir la carpeta que quiere reproducir
2. En el submenú formato GRABACIÓN, puede
elegir el formato de grabación, que incluye
ACT/MP3/WAV/WMA.
3.4 Play (Reproductor de Mensajes de Voz)
La opción play permite reproducir mensajes de
voz grabados por el Reproductor MP3. Para activar
esta opción, siga las siguientes instrucciones:
1. Encienda el Reproductor MP3 y en la pantalla
aparecerá el menú principal.
2. Utilizando los botones [] o [], seleccione la
opción VOZ y pulse el botón [M].
3. Pulse el botón PLAY [] para iniciar la
reproducción de la primera grabación disponible.
3.4.1 Función Clave del Modo PLAY
Durante la reproducción de la grabación, se
pueden activar los siguientes controles.
PLAY [Ź]: Pulse el botón PLAY [] para
empezar a reproducir una grabación. Pulse el botón
PLAY de nuevo para pausar la grabación. Para reiniciar
la reproducción, pulse el botón PLAY de nuevo.
Si mantiene pulsado el botón PLAY durante más
tiempo, apagará el reproductor
REW & FFWD []: Pulsar []
o [] para seleccionar la grabación
anterior o la siguiente.
Pulsar y Mantener pulsados los
botones [] o [] para rebobinar o
avanzar de grabación.
Volumen (VOL+ y VOL-): Pulse
el botón [VOL+] para subir el volumen y pulse el
botón [VOL-] para bajar el volumen.
3.4.2 Submenú PLAY
Pulsando brevemente el botón MENÚ [M],
desplegará los submenús de música siguientes. Pulse
[] y [] para elegir y luego pulse la tecla MENÚ [M]
para conrmar cada submenú. Siga los mismos pasos
para navegar dentro de cada submenú.
l Carpeta Local: En este directorio, puede elegir
subir un nivel de carpeta pulsando la tecla MENÚ [M]
para conrmar. Y luego puede elegir la carpeta que
quiere reproducir
l Conguración:
- Modo repetición: Normal, Repetir1, Carpeta,
Repetir carpeta, Repetir todas, Aleatorio, Intro
- Velocidad de reproducción: Puede alterar el
Tempo de la Canción.
- Modo repetición
l Borrar archivo: Eliminar cheros de voz
especícos.
l Borrar Todos:
Eliminar todos los cheros de voz utilizando esta
opción.
3.5 FM (FM Radio)
Cuando está activado el modo Radio FM, se
pueden escuchar programas de radio.
Esta opción permite disfrutar de programas de
radio FM. Para utilizarla, siga las siguientes
instrucciones:
1. Encienda el Reproductor MP3 y en la pantalla
aparecerá el menú principal
2. Utilizando los botones [] o [], seleccione la
opción FM y luego pulse el botón [M] para conrmar.
3. Si hay frecuencias predenidas, pulse el botón
PLAY [] para reproducir la primera frecuencia,
pulse de nuevo para pasar a la siguiente frecuencia.
3.5.1 Submenú FM
Pulsando brevemente el botón MENÚ [M],
desplegará los siguientes submenús FM. Pulse [] y
[] para elegir y luego pulse la tecla MENÚ [M] para
conrmar cada submenú. Siga los mismos pasos para
navegar dentro de cada submenú.
Abajo encontrará la lista de opciones de radio
FM.
GUARDAR EMISORA: Seleccione esta opción
para memorizar frecuencias de radio
BORRAR EMISORA: Seleccione esta opción para
eliminar frecuencias de radio.
BORRAR TODAS: Seleccionar esta opción para
eliminar todas las frecuencias de radio.
BÚSQUEDA AUTOMÁTICA: Seleccione esta
opción para iniciar la búsqueda automática de
frecuencias de radio.
FRECUENCIA NORMAL: Seleccione esta opción
para activar la banda normal FM.
3.5.2 Búsqueda Automática
Para activar la búsqueda automática de las
frecuencias disponibles, siga las siguientes
instrucciones:
1. Cuando esté activado el Modo FM, pulse el
botón MENÚ [M] para seleccionar la opción
BÚSQUEDA AUTOMÁTICA.
2. Pulse el botón [M] para iniciar la búsqueda
automática. El Reproductor
MP3 almacenará las 20
primeras emisoras de radio
disponibles.
3.5.3 B ú s q u e d a
Manual y Memorización de
Frecuencias
Para buscar
manualmente las frecuencias,
siga las siguientes instrucciones:
1. Cuando esté activado el Modo FM, pulse
prolongadamente los botones [] o [] para iniciar
la búsqueda automática. La sintonización se detendrá
al encontrar una frecuencia disponible.
2. Pulsando brevemente los botones [] o [],
congurará la búsqueda.
3. Pulse el botón MENÚ [M] para seleccionar la
opción GUARDAR.
4. Pulse PLAY [] y esa emisora especíca se
memorizará como último canal.
5. Repita los pasos 1 al 4 para sintonizar cada
emisora teniendo en cuenta que el Reproductor MP3
puede memorizar 20 frecuencias.
3.5.4 Grabación de Radio FM (REC)
Para grabar un programa de radio FM, siga las
siguientes instrucciones:
1. Cuando esté activado el Modo Radio FM, pulse
el botón MENÚ [M] para seleccionar la opción
GRABACIÓN DE CALIDAD
2. Pulse el botón PLAY [] para iniciar la
grabación.
3. Pulse el botón PLAY [] para pausar la
grabación y púlselo de nuevo para reiniciar la
grabación.
4. Para detener la grabación y memorizarla,
pulse prolongadamente el botón [M] y regresará al
modo FM.
3.6 E-Book
La opción E-Book permite leer archivos de texto.
Para activar esta opción, siga las siguientes
instrucciones:
1. Encienda el Reproductor MP3 y en la pantalla
aparecerá el menú principal.
2. Utilizando los botones [] o [], seleccione
E-Book y pulse el botón [M] para conrmar.
3. Utilice los botones [] o [] para elegir el
archivo
4. Pulse el botón PLAY [] para empezar a leer
el archivo.
3.6.1 Submenú E-Book
Pulsando brevemente el botón MENÚ [M],
desplegará los submenús de música siguientes. Pulse
[] o [] para elegir y luego pulse la tecla [M] para
conrmar cada submenú. Siga los mismos pasos para
navegar dentro de cada submenú.
Antes de abrir un archivo, si pulsa M, aparecerá el
siguiente submenú:
l Carpeta Local: En este directorio, puede elegir
subir un nivel de carpeta pulsando la tecla MENÚ [M]
para conrmar. Y entonces podrá elegir la carpeta que
quiere reproducir
l Ajustes de reproducción:
Puede elegir entre reproducción
manual y reproducción
automática. Para la reproducción
automática, puede congurar el
tiempo de reproducción entre 1 y
10 segundos por página del E-Book.
l Borrar archivo: Eliminar archivos de texto
especícos.
l B
orrar Todo: Eliminar todos los archivos de
texto utilizando esta opción.
Durante la lectura, si pulsa y mantiene pulsada la
tecla M, podrá seleccionar entre:
- Selección etiqueta
- Borrar etiqueta
- Añadir etiqueta
3.7 FOTO
La opción Foto permite visualizar cheros JPG.
Para activar esta opción, siga las siguientes
instrucciones:
1. Encienda el Reproductor MP3 y en la pantalla
aparecerá el menú principal.
2. Utilizando los botones [] o [], seleccione
FOTO y pulse el botón [M] para conrmar.
3. Utilice los botones [] o [] para elegir el
archivo
4. Pulse el botón PLAY [] para iniciar la
presentación del archivo
3.7.1 Submenú FOTO
Pulsando brevemente el botón MENÚ [M],
desplegará los submenús de música siguientes. Pulse
[] o [] para elegir y luego pulse la tecla –[M] para
conrmar cada submenú. Siga los mismos pasos para
navegar dentro de cada submenú.
l Carpeta Local: En este directorio, puede elegir
subir un nivel de carpeta pulsando PLAY [] para
conrmar. Y entonces podrá elegir la carpeta que
quiere reproducir
l Ajustes de reproducción: Puede elegir entre
reproducción manual y reproducción automática.
Para la reproducción
automática, puede denir el
tiempo de reproducción
entre 1 y 10 segundos por
fotografía.
l Borrar archivo:
Eliminar cheros de fotos
especícos.
l Borrar Todo: Eliminar
Todas las Fotos utilizando
esta opción
3.8 JUEGOS
La opción JUEGOS permite jugar a juegos. Para
activar esta opción, siga las siguientes instrucciones:
1. Encienda el Reproductor MP3 y en la pantalla
aparecerá el menú principal.
2. Utilizando los botones [] o [] para
seleccionar JUEGOS, pulse el botón [M] para entrar en
el MENÚ JUEGOS.
Dentro del menú Juegos, solo hay un juego que
puede utilizar, el Russia Brick, pulse el botón [M] para
conrmar
3.9 Ajustes
Las opciones de AJUSTES permiten acceder al
sistema de conguración del Reproductor. Para
acceder al sistema de conguración, siga las
instrucciones:
1. Encienda el reproductor MP3 y en la pantalla
aparecerá el menú principal.
2. Utilizando [] o [], seleccione la opción de
SISTEMA y luego pulse el botón [M] para entrar en el
MENÚ SISTEMA.
3. Utilizando [] o [], seleccione los
parámetros de conguración del sistema y pulse el
botón MENÚ [M].
Los parámetros disponibles en el sistema de
conguración son:
Ajustar reloj: Esta opción permite congurar la
fecha y la hora del sistema.
Ajuste LCD: Esta opción permite congurar el
brillo, el contraste y la pantalla negra en el panel LCD.
Idioma: Esta opción permite congurar el Idioma
de la Interfaz del Usuario.
Desconex.automática: Esta opción permite
congurar el tiempo de apagado y de inactividad.
Modo Repetición:
Modo en línea:
Info de Memoria: Esta opción permite vericar el
uso de la memoria.
Versión Firmware: Esta opción permite vericar
la versión del rmware.
Actualización Firmware:
Esta opción permite actualizar el
rmware.
3.9.1 Ajustar reloj
Esta opción permite
congurar la fecha y la hora del
sistema. Los dígitos superiores
muestran la fecha en formato
Año: Mes: Formato Día y los dígitos inferiores
muestran la Hora en formato Hora: Minutos: Formato
Segundos. Para cambiar de fecha y hora, siga las
siguientes instrucciones:
1. En el MENÚ DE INSTALACIÓN, elija RELOJ
pulsando [] o [] y pulse [M] para conrmar
2. Pulse [VOL+] y [VOL-] para elegir el parámetro
que quiere ajustar
3. Pulse [] o [] para cambiar el valor. Pulse
MENÚ [M] para conrmar.
3.9.2 Congurar Apagado
Esta opción permite congurar el tiempo de
apagado y de inactividad. Al congurar el Tiempo de
apagado, se pueden activar (30s, 60s, 90s y 120s) o
desactivar las funciones de gestión de la energía para
que su reproductor se apague automáticamente si no
lo está utilizando. Al denir el Tiempo de Inactividad,
se puede congurar el reproductor para que se
apague al pasar cierto tiempo (30s, 60s, 90s, 120s)
desde el momento en que conrme esta selección.
Para modicar este parámetro, siga las
siguientes instrucciones:
1. En el MENÚ DE INSTALACIÓN, elija
DESCONEXIÓN AUTOMÁTICA pulsando [] o [] y
pulse PLAY [].
2. Utilizando los botones [] o [], seleccione
INACTIVO (tiempo de apagado) o AUTO APAGADO
(tiempo de inactividad) y pulse el botón [M].
3. Elija el DESCONEXIÓN AUTOMÁTICA o
INACTIVO deseado y pulse [M] para conrmar.
Información de la Memoria
La imagen muestra el volumen total del disco, el
porcentaje utilizado y el porcentaje de espacio
utilizado respecto al espacio total.
Especicaciones
Aviso: No será informado en caso de cambios en el
diseño de producción y en las especicaciones.
Condiciones de Garantía
- Este equipo tiene garantía de 2 años a partir de la
fecha original de compra.
- Serán exentas de la garantía las averías producidas
por un uso incorrecto del aparato, mala instalación o
instalados en lugares inapropiados para su buena
conservación, roturas, actualizaciones de software que
no sean los facilitados por la marca, piezas desgastadas
por su propio uso o por un uso no doméstico o
inadecuado, así como, por manipulación por personas o
talleres ajenos a nuestra empresa.
- Para que la garantía tenga validez, se deberá
adjuntar la factura o tíquet de caja que corrobore la
adquisición y fecha de venta de este producto.
5
Introducción
Enhorabuena por haber adquirido el
Reproductor THORN Su elevada integración reduce el
peso del dispositivo y sus dimensiones, haciendo que
sea muy fácil de utilizar. La gran pantalla con
tecnología TFT ofrece una información clara y nítida y
la interfaz USB 2.0 Alta Velocidad facilita las
operaciones de transferencia al ordenador y viceversa.
El Reproductor EM820 MP3 cuenta con una batería
recargable a través del puerto USB de su ordenador. A
través del micrófono integrado, se pueden grabar
mensajes de voz y reproducirlos directamente en el
dispositivo o en el ordenador.
Antes de utilizar este producto, lea este manual y
conserve las instrucciones para futuras consultas.
Descripción
Abajo encontrará una descripción del producto
1. Interruptor de encendido
ON/OFF
2. Play [] / Pause []
3. Anterior [] / Rebobinar []
4. Menú
5. Conexión de Auriculares
6. Conexión USB
7. VOL – (Bajar el Volumen)
8. Siguiente [] / Avanzar []
9. VOL + (Subir el Volumen)
10. Entrada tarjeta MICRO SD
1. Pantalla
Abajo encontrará una descripción de la pantalla
1. Número Total de Canciones
2. Localización de la Canción
Actual
3. Volumen
4. Formato del Fichero
5. Tiempo Transcurrido
6. Tiempo Total
7. Animación EQ
8. Nombre de la Canción
9. Modo Repetición
10. Batería restante
11. Modo EQ
12. Índice de Reproducción
2. Utilización
2.1 Interruptor de encendido ON/OFF
El reproductor MP3 cuenta con una batería
recargable. Antes de la primera utilización, se
recomienda cargar la batería durante un largo periodo
de tiempo (en torno a 8 horas). Para cargar la batería,
conecte el reproductor MP3 al puerto USB de su
ordenador.
Encender:
1. Coloque el botón On/O en posición On
Apagar:
1. Mantener pulsada la tecla Play [] / Pause []
hasta que comience la animación que precede al
apagado
2. Entonces, coloque el botón On/O en posición
O.
2.2 Cargar el Reproductor
El reproductor se puede cargar a través del cable
USB suministrado, conectándolo al PC. Mientras se
esté cargando, se encenderá un indicador en la parte
derecha. Primero debe encender
su PC y, luego, conectar el
reproductor al PC a través del cable
USB. El reproductor se habrá
cargado por completo al cabo de 2
o 3 horas.
3. Menú Principal
Al encender el reproductor
MP3, aparecerá el menú principal con submenús
(opcional), que le permitirá seleccionar diferentes
funciones y opciones.
Utilizando los botones [] o [], puede
seleccionar la opción deseada y a continuación pulsar
el botón M para conrmar su selección.
Para acceder al menú principal cuando esté
dentro de uno de esos submenús, pulse y mantenga
pulsada la tecla MENÚ [M] durante unos segundos.
(Pulsando brevemente la tecla MENÚ [M] se abre el
submenú de opciones de cada submenú).
Las opciones disponibles son:
Música: Seleccione esta opción para reproducir
música.
Vídeo: Seleccione esta opción para reproducir
vídeo AMV.
Grabación: Seleccione esta opción para grabar
mensajes de voz a través del micrófono interno.
Play: Seleccione esta opción para reproducir
mensajes de voz.
Radio: Seleccione esta opción para utilizar la
radio FM.
Texto: Seleccione esta opción para leer textos.
Juegos: Seleccione esta opción para jugar.
Imágenes: Seleccione esta opción para examinar
y ver fotos.
Ajustes: Seleccione esta opción para acceder a
la conguración del sistema.
3.1 Modo Música
La opción del reproductor de música permite
reproducir canciones. Para activar esta opción, siga las
siguientes instrucciones:
1. Encienda el Reproductor MP3 y en la pantalla
aparecerá el menú principal
2. Utilizando los botones [] o [], seleccione la
opción REPRODUCIR MÚSICA y pulse el botón [M].
3. Pulse el botón PLAY [] para iniciar la
reproducción de la primera canción disponible.
4. Pulse y mantenga pulsada la tecla M para
regresar al menú anterior.
3.1.1 Tecla de Función en
Modo Música
Durante la reproducción
de música, se pueden activar los
siguientes controles.
PLAY [Ź]: Pulse el botón
PLAY [] para empezar a
reproducir una canción. Pulse el botón PLAY de nuevo
para pausar la canción. Para reiniciar la reproducción
de la canción, pulse de nuevo el botón PLAY.
Si mantiene pulsado el botón PLAY durante más
tiempo, apagará el reproductor
REW & FFWD [] Pulsar [] o [] para
seleccionar la canción anterior o la siguiente.
Pulsar y Mantener pulsados los botones [] o
[] para rebobinar o avanzar de canción.
Volumen (VOL+ y VOL-): Pulse el botón [VOL+]
para subir el volumen y pulse el botón [VOL-] para
bajar el volumen.
3.1.2 Modo Música
Pulsando brevemente el botón MENÚ [M], se
entra en cada submenú. Pulse [] o [] para elegir y
luego pulse la tecla MENÚ [M] para conrmar cada
submenú. Siga los mismos pasos para navegar dentro
de cada submenú.
En ambos modos (modo reproducción y modo
stop), encontrará los siguientes submenús:
l En reproducción
l Todas las canciones
l Álbum
l Artistas
l Género: Normal, Rock, Pop, Clásico, Soft, Jazz y
DBB
l Carpeta Local
l Crear lista de reproducción
l Ajustes
- Modo repetición: Normal, Repetir1, Carpeta,
Repetir Carpeta, Repetir Todo, Aleatorio, Intro
- Ecualizador: Natural, Rock, Pop, Clásica, Soft,
Jazz, DBB
- Velocidad de reproducción: Velocidad ASS,
Velocidad FFREV
- Modo Repetición
- Selección etiqueta: Selección etiqueta, borrar
etiqueta, añadir etiqueta, Salir
l Borrar archivo
l Borrar todo
3.2 Vídeo
El MODO Vídeo permite reproducir vídeos en
formato AMV. Para activar esta opción, siga las
siguientes instrucciones:
Encienda el Reproductor MP3 y en la pantalla
aparecerá el menú principal.
1. Utilizando los botones [] o [], seleccione la
opción Vídeo y pulse el botón [M].
2. Pulse el botón PLAY [] para iniciar la
reproducción del primer video disponible.
3. Pulse y mantenga pulsada la tecla M para
regresar al menú anterior.
Nota: El Reproductor de Vídeo solo lee archivos
AMV, necesita convertir el resto de los formatos para
ver el vídeo deseado.
3.2.1 Tecla de Función en Modo Vídeo
Durante la reproducción de
música, se pueden activar los
siguientes controles.
PLAY [Ź]: Pulse el botón
PLAY [] para empezar a
reproducir un vídeo. Pulse el
botón PLAY de nuevo para pausar
el vídeo. Para reiniciar la
reproducción del vídeo, pulse el botón PLAY de
nuevo.
Si mantiene pulsado el botón PLAY durante más
tiempo, apagará el reproductor
REW & FFWD []: Pulsar [] o [] para
seleccionar el vídeo anterior o el siguiente.
Pulsar y Mantener pulsados los botones [] o
[] para rebobinar o avanzar de vídeo.
Volumen (VOL+ y VOL-): Pulse el botón [VOL+]
para subir el volumen y pulse el botón [VOL-] para
bajar el volumen.
3.2.2 Submenú AMV
Pulsando brevemente el botón MENÚ [M],
desplegará los siguientes submenús AMV. Pulse [] o
[] para elegir y luego pulse la tecla MENÚ [M] para
conrmar cada submenú. Siga los mismos pasos para
navegar dentro de cada submenú.
l Reproduciendo
l Carpeta Local: En este directorio, puede elegir
subir un nivel de carpeta pulsando la tecla MENÚ [M]
para conrmar. Y luego puede elegir la carpeta que
quiere reproducir
l Repetición
l Borrar archivo:Eliminar vídeo especíco.
l Borrar todo: Eliminar todos los vídeos utilizando
esta opción.
3.3 Grabar (grabador de mensajes de voz)
Esta opción permite grabar mensajes de voz
utilizando el micrófono integrado. Para grabar
mensajes, siga las siguientes instrucciones:
1. Encienda el Reproductor MP3 y en la pantalla
aparecerá el menú principal.
2. Utilizando los botones [] o [], seleccione la
opción RECORD y pulse el botón [M].
3. Pulse el botón PLAY [] para iniciar la
grabación.
4. Puede escuchar su chero wav en el submenú
VOZ.
Durante la grabación, Pulse el botón PLAY []
para iniciar la grabación. Pulsar el
botón PLAY de nuevo para pausar la
grabación. Si mantiene el botón PLAY
[] / M pulsado durante más
tiempo, detendrá la grabación.
Pulsando brevemente el botón
MENÚ [M], encontrará la CARPETA
LOCAL y el TIPO DE GRABACIÓN. Pulse [] o [] para
elegir y luego pulse la tecla MENÚ [M] para conrmar
cada submenú. Siga los mismos pasos para navegar
dentro de cada submenú.
1. En el submenú CARPETA LOCAL, puede elegir
subir un nivel de carpeta pulsando [M] para conrmar.
Y luego puede elegir la carpeta que quiere reproducir
2. En el submenú formato GRABACIÓN, puede
elegir el formato de grabación, que incluye
ACT/MP3/WAV/WMA.
3.4 Play (Reproductor de Mensajes de Voz)
La opción play permite reproducir mensajes de
voz grabados por el Reproductor MP3. Para activar
esta opción, siga las siguientes instrucciones:
1. Encienda el Reproductor MP3 y en la pantalla
aparecerá el menú principal.
2. Utilizando los botones [] o [], seleccione la
opción VOZ y pulse el botón [M].
3. Pulse el botón PLAY [] para iniciar la
reproducción de la primera grabación disponible.
3.4.1 Función Clave del Modo PLAY
Durante la reproducción de la grabación, se
pueden activar los siguientes controles.
PLAY [Ź]: Pulse el botón PLAY [] para
empezar a reproducir una grabación. Pulse el botón
PLAY de nuevo para pausar la grabación. Para reiniciar
la reproducción, pulse el botón PLAY de nuevo.
Si mantiene pulsado el botón PLAY durante más
tiempo, apagará el reproductor
REW & FFWD []: Pulsar []
o [] para seleccionar la grabación
anterior o la siguiente.
Pulsar y Mantener pulsados los
botones [] o [] para rebobinar o
avanzar de grabación.
Volumen (VOL+ y VOL-): Pulse
el botón [VOL+] para subir el volumen y pulse el
botón [VOL-] para bajar el volumen.
3.4.2 Submenú PLAY
Pulsando brevemente el botón MENÚ [M],
desplegará los submenús de música siguientes. Pulse
[] y [] para elegir y luego pulse la tecla MENÚ [M]
para conrmar cada submenú. Siga los mismos pasos
para navegar dentro de cada submenú.
l Carpeta Local: En este directorio, puede elegir
subir un nivel de carpeta pulsando la tecla MENÚ [M]
para conrmar. Y luego puede elegir la carpeta que
quiere reproducir
l Conguración:
- Modo repetición: Normal, Repetir1, Carpeta,
Repetir carpeta, Repetir todas, Aleatorio, Intro
- Velocidad de reproducción: Puede alterar el
Tempo de la Canción.
- Modo repetición
l Borrar archivo: Eliminar cheros de voz
especícos.
l Borrar Todos:
Eliminar todos los cheros de voz utilizando esta
opción.
3.5 FM (FM Radio)
Cuando está activado el modo Radio FM, se
pueden escuchar programas de radio.
Esta opción permite disfrutar de programas de
radio FM. Para utilizarla, siga las siguientes
instrucciones:
1. Encienda el Reproductor MP3 y en la pantalla
aparecerá el menú principal
2. Utilizando los botones [] o [], seleccione la
opción FM y luego pulse el botón [M] para conrmar.
3. Si hay frecuencias predenidas, pulse el botón
PLAY [] para reproducir la primera frecuencia,
pulse de nuevo para pasar a la siguiente frecuencia.
3.5.1 Submenú FM
Pulsando brevemente el botón MENÚ [M],
desplegará los siguientes submenús FM. Pulse [] y
[] para elegir y luego pulse la tecla MENÚ [M] para
conrmar cada submenú. Siga los mismos pasos para
navegar dentro de cada submenú.
Abajo encontrará la lista de opciones de radio
FM.
GUARDAR EMISORA: Seleccione esta opción
para memorizar frecuencias de radio
BORRAR EMISORA: Seleccione esta opción para
eliminar frecuencias de radio.
BORRAR TODAS: Seleccionar esta opción para
eliminar todas las frecuencias de radio.
BÚSQUEDA AUTOMÁTICA: Seleccione esta
opción para iniciar la búsqueda automática de
frecuencias de radio.
FRECUENCIA NORMAL: Seleccione esta opción
para activar la banda normal FM.
3.5.2 Búsqueda Automática
Para activar la búsqueda automática de las
frecuencias disponibles, siga las siguientes
instrucciones:
1. Cuando esté activado el Modo FM, pulse el
botón MENÚ [M] para seleccionar la opción
BÚSQUEDA AUTOMÁTICA.
2. Pulse el botón [M] para iniciar la búsqueda
automática. El Reproductor
MP3 almacenará las 20
primeras emisoras de radio
disponibles.
3.5.3 B ú s q u e d a
Manual y Memorización de
Frecuencias
Para buscar
manualmente las frecuencias,
siga las siguientes instrucciones:
1. Cuando esté activado el Modo FM, pulse
prolongadamente los botones [] o [] para iniciar
la búsqueda automática. La sintonización se detendrá
al encontrar una frecuencia disponible.
2. Pulsando brevemente los botones [] o [],
congurará la búsqueda.
3. Pulse el botón MENÚ [M] para seleccionar la
opción GUARDAR.
4. Pulse PLAY [] y esa emisora especíca se
memorizará como último canal.
5. Repita los pasos 1 al 4 para sintonizar cada
emisora teniendo en cuenta que el Reproductor MP3
puede memorizar 20 frecuencias.
3.5.4 Grabación de Radio FM (REC)
Para grabar un programa de radio FM, siga las
siguientes instrucciones:
1. Cuando esté activado el Modo Radio FM, pulse
el botón MENÚ [M] para seleccionar la opción
GRABACIÓN DE CALIDAD
2. Pulse el botón PLAY [] para iniciar la
grabación.
3. Pulse el botón PLAY [] para pausar la
grabación y púlselo de nuevo para reiniciar la
grabación.
4. Para detener la grabación y memorizarla,
pulse prolongadamente el botón [M] y regresará al
modo FM.
3.6 E-Book
La opción E-Book permite leer archivos de texto.
Para activar esta opción, siga las siguientes
instrucciones:
1. Encienda el Reproductor MP3 y en la pantalla
aparecerá el menú principal.
2. Utilizando los botones [] o [], seleccione
E-Book y pulse el botón [M] para conrmar.
3. Utilice los botones [] o [] para elegir el
archivo
4. Pulse el botón PLAY [] para empezar a leer
el archivo.
3.6.1 Submenú E-Book
Pulsando brevemente el botón MENÚ [M],
desplegará los submenús de música siguientes. Pulse
[] o [] para elegir y luego pulse la tecla [M] para
conrmar cada submenú. Siga los mismos pasos para
navegar dentro de cada submenú.
Antes de abrir un archivo, si pulsa M, aparecerá el
siguiente submenú:
l Carpeta Local: En este directorio, puede elegir
subir un nivel de carpeta pulsando la tecla MENÚ [M]
para conrmar. Y entonces podrá elegir la carpeta que
quiere reproducir
l Ajustes de reproducción:
Puede elegir entre reproducción
manual y reproducción
automática. Para la reproducción
automática, puede congurar el
tiempo de reproducción entre 1 y
10 segundos por página del E-Book.
l Borrar archivo: Eliminar archivos de texto
especícos.
l Borrar Todo: Eliminar todos los archivos de
texto utilizando esta opción.
Durante la lectura, si pulsa y mantiene pulsada la
tecla M, podrá seleccionar entre:
- Selección etiqueta
- Borrar etiqueta
- Añadir etiqueta
3.7 FOTO
La opción Foto permite visualizar cheros JPG.
Para activar esta opción, siga las siguientes
instrucciones:
1. Encienda el Reproductor MP3 y en la pantalla
aparecerá el menú principal.
2. Utilizando los botones [] o [], seleccione
FOTO y pulse el botón [M] para conrmar.
3. Utilice los botones [] o [] para elegir el
archivo
4. Pulse el botón PLAY [] para iniciar la
presentación del archivo
3.7.1 Submenú FOTO
Pulsando brevemente el botón MENÚ [M],
desplegará los submenús de música siguientes. Pulse
[
] o [] para elegir y luego pulse la tecla –[M] para
c
onrmar cada submenú. Siga los mismos pasos para
navegar dentro de cada submenú.
l Carpeta Local: En este directorio, puede elegir
subir un nivel de carpeta pulsando PLAY [] para
conrmar. Y entonces podrá elegir la carpeta que
quiere reproducir
l Ajustes de reproducción: Puede elegir entre
reproducción manual y reproducción automática.
Para la reproducción
automática, puede denir el
tiempo de reproducción
entre 1 y 10 segundos por
fotografía.
l Borrar archivo:
Eliminar cheros de fotos
especícos.
l Borrar Todo: Eliminar
Todas las Fotos utilizando
esta opción
3.8 JUEGOS
La opción JUEGOS permite jugar a juegos. Para
activar esta opción, siga las siguientes instrucciones:
1. Encienda el Reproductor MP3 y en la pantalla
aparecerá el menú principal.
2. Utilizando los botones [] o [] para
seleccionar JUEGOS, pulse el botón [M] para entrar en
el MENÚ JUEGOS.
Dentro del menú Juegos, solo hay un juego que
puede utilizar, el Russia Brick, pulse el botón [M] para
conrmar
3.9 Ajustes
Las opciones de AJUSTES permiten acceder al
sistema de conguración del Reproductor. Para
acceder al sistema de conguración, siga las
instrucciones:
1. Encienda el reproductor MP3 y en la pantalla
aparecerá el menú principal.
2. Utilizando [] o [], seleccione la opción de
SISTEMA y luego pulse el botón [M] para entrar en el
MENÚ SISTEMA.
3. Utilizando [] o [], seleccione los
parámetros de conguración del sistema y pulse el
botón MENÚ [M].
Los parámetros disponibles en el sistema de
conguración son:
Ajustar reloj: Esta opción permite congurar la
fecha y la hora del sistema.
Ajuste LCD: Esta opción permite congurar el
brillo, el contraste y la pantalla negra en el panel LCD.
Idioma: Esta opción permite congurar el Idioma
de la Interfaz del Usuario.
Desconex.automática: Esta opción permite
congurar el tiempo de apagado y de inactividad.
Modo Repetición:
Modo en línea:
Info de Memoria: Esta opción permite vericar el
uso de la memoria.
Versión Firmware: Esta opción permite vericar
la versión del rmware.
Actualización Firmware:
Esta opción permite actualizar el
rmware.
3.9.1 Ajustar reloj
Esta opción permite
congurar la fecha y la hora del
sistema. Los dígitos superiores
muestran la fecha en formato
Año: Mes: Formato Día y los dígitos inferiores
muestran la Hora en formato Hora: Minutos: Formato
Segundos. Para cambiar de fecha y hora, siga las
siguientes instrucciones:
1. En el MENÚ DE INSTALACIÓN, elija RELOJ
pulsando [] o [] y pulse [M] para conrmar
2. Pulse [VOL+] y [VOL-] para elegir el parámetro
que quiere ajustar
3. Pulse [] o [] para cambiar el valor. Pulse
MENÚ [M] para conrmar.
3.9.2 Congurar Apagado
Esta opción permite congurar el tiempo de
apagado y de inactividad. Al congurar el Tiempo de
apagado, se pueden activar (30s, 60s, 90s y 120s) o
desactivar las funciones de gestión de la energía para
que su reproductor se apague automáticamente si no
lo está utilizando. Al denir el Tiempo de Inactividad,
se puede congurar el reproductor para que se
apague al pasar cierto tiempo (30s, 60s, 90s, 120s)
desde el momento en que conrme esta selección.
Para modicar este parámetro, siga las
siguientes instrucciones:
1. En el MENÚ DE INSTALACIÓN, elija
DESCONEXIÓN AUTOMÁTICA pulsando [] o [] y
pulse PLAY [].
2. Utilizando los botones [] o [], seleccione
INACTIVO (tiempo de apagado) o AUTO APAGADO
(tiempo de inactividad) y pulse el botón [M].
3. Elija el DESCONEXIÓN AUTOMÁTICA o
INACTIVO deseado y pulse [M] para conrmar.
Información de la Memoria
La imagen muestra el volumen total del disco, el
porcentaje utilizado y el porcentaje de espacio
utilizado respecto al espacio total.
Especicaciones
Aviso: No será informado en caso de cambios en el
diseño de producción y en las especicaciones.
Condiciones de Garantía
- Este equipo tiene garantía de 2 años a partir de la
fecha original de compra.
- Serán exentas de la garantía las averías producidas
por un uso incorrecto del aparato, mala instalación o
instalados en lugares inapropiados para su buena
conservación, roturas, actualizaciones de software que
no sean los facilitados por la marca, piezas desgastadas
por su propio uso o por un uso no doméstico o
inadecuado, así como, por manipulación por personas o
talleres ajenos a nuestra empresa.
- Para que la garantía tenga validez, se deberá
adjuntar la factura o tíquet de caja que corrobore la
adquisición y fecha de venta de este producto.
6
Introducción
Enhorabuena por haber adquirido el
Reproductor THORN Su elevada integración reduce el
peso del dispositivo y sus dimensiones, haciendo que
sea muy fácil de utilizar. La gran pantalla con
tecnología TFT ofrece una información clara y nítida y
la interfaz USB 2.0 Alta Velocidad facilita las
operaciones de transferencia al ordenador y viceversa.
El Reproductor EM820 MP3 cuenta con una batería
recargable a través del puerto USB de su ordenador. A
través del micrófono integrado, se pueden grabar
mensajes de voz y reproducirlos directamente en el
dispositivo o en el ordenador.
Antes de utilizar este producto, lea este manual y
conserve las instrucciones para futuras consultas.
Descripción
Abajo encontrará una descripción del producto
1. Interruptor de encendido
ON/OFF
2. Play [] / Pause []
3. Anterior [] / Rebobinar []
4. Menú
5. Conexión de Auriculares
6. Conexión USB
7. VOL – (Bajar el Volumen)
8. Siguiente [] / Avanzar []
9. VOL + (Subir el Volumen)
10. Entrada tarjeta MICRO SD
1. Pantalla
Abajo encontrará una descripción de la pantalla
1. Número Total de Canciones
2. Localización de la Canción
Actual
3. Volumen
4. Formato del Fichero
5. Tiempo Transcurrido
6. Tiempo Total
7. Animación EQ
8. Nombre de la Canción
9. Modo Repetición
10. Batería restante
11. Modo EQ
12. Índice de Reproducción
2. Utilización
2.1 Interruptor de encendido ON/OFF
El reproductor MP3 cuenta con una batería
recargable. Antes de la primera utilización, se
recomienda cargar la batería durante un largo periodo
de tiempo (en torno a 8 horas). Para cargar la batería,
conecte el reproductor MP3 al puerto USB de su
ordenador.
Encender:
1. Coloque el botón On/O en posición On
Apagar:
1. Mantener pulsada la tecla Play [] / Pause []
hasta que comience la animación que precede al
apagado
2. Entonces, coloque el botón On/O en posición
O.
2.2 Cargar el Reproductor
El reproductor se puede cargar a través del cable
USB suministrado, conectándolo al PC. Mientras se
esté cargando, se encenderá un indicador en la parte
derecha. Primero debe encender
su PC y, luego, conectar el
reproductor al PC a través del cable
USB. El reproductor se habrá
cargado por completo al cabo de 2
o 3 horas.
3. Menú Principal
Al encender el reproductor
MP3, aparecerá el menú principal con submenús
(opcional), que le permitirá seleccionar diferentes
funciones y opciones.
Utilizando los botones [] o [], puede
seleccionar la opción deseada y a continuación pulsar
el botón M para conrmar su selección.
Para acceder al menú principal cuando esté
dentro de uno de esos submenús, pulse y mantenga
pulsada la tecla MENÚ [M] durante unos segundos.
(Pulsando brevemente la tecla MENÚ [M] se abre el
submenú de opciones de cada submenú).
Las opciones disponibles son:
Música: Seleccione esta opción para reproducir
música.
Vídeo: Seleccione esta opción para reproducir
vídeo AMV.
Grabación: Seleccione esta opción para grabar
mensajes de voz a través del micrófono interno.
Play: Seleccione esta opción para reproducir
mensajes de voz.
Radio: Seleccione esta opción para utilizar la
radio FM.
Texto: Seleccione esta opción para leer textos.
Juegos: Seleccione esta opción para jugar.
Imágenes: Seleccione esta opción para examinar
y ver fotos.
Ajustes: Seleccione esta opción para acceder a
la conguración del sistema.
3.1 Modo Música
La opción del reproductor de música permite
reproducir canciones. Para activar esta opción, siga las
siguientes instrucciones:
1. Encienda el Reproductor MP3 y en la pantalla
aparecerá el menú principal
2. Utilizando los botones [] o [], seleccione la
opción REPRODUCIR MÚSICA y pulse el botón [M].
3. Pulse el botón PLAY [] para iniciar la
reproducción de la primera canción disponible.
4. Pulse y mantenga pulsada la tecla M para
regresar al menú anterior.
3.1.1 Tecla de Función en
Modo Música
Durante la reproducción
de música, se pueden activar los
siguientes controles.
PLAY [Ź]: Pulse el botón
PLAY [] para empezar a
reproducir una canción. Pulse el botón PLAY de nuevo
para pausar la canción. Para reiniciar la reproducción
de la canción, pulse de nuevo el botón PLAY.
Si mantiene pulsado el botón PLAY durante más
tiempo, apagará el reproductor
REW & FFWD [] Pulsar [] o [] para
seleccionar la canción anterior o la siguiente.
Pulsar y Mantener pulsados los botones [] o
[] para rebobinar o avanzar de canción.
Volumen (VOL+ y VOL-): Pulse el botón [VOL+]
para subir el volumen y pulse el botón [VOL-] para
bajar el volumen.
3.1.2 Modo Música
Pulsando brevemente el botón MENÚ [M], se
entra en cada submenú. Pulse [] o [] para elegir y
luego pulse la tecla MENÚ [M] para conrmar cada
submenú. Siga los mismos pasos para navegar dentro
de cada submenú.
En ambos modos (modo reproducción y modo
stop), encontrará los siguientes submenús:
l En reproducción
l Todas las canciones
l Álbum
l Artistas
l Género: Normal, Rock, Pop, Clásico, Soft, Jazz y
DBB
l Carpeta Local
l Crear lista de reproducción
l Ajustes
- Modo repetición: Normal, Repetir1, Carpeta,
Repetir Carpeta, Repetir Todo, Aleatorio, Intro
- Ecualizador: Natural, Rock, Pop, Clásica, Soft,
Jazz, DBB
- Velocidad de reproducción: Velocidad ASS,
Velocidad FFREV
- Modo Repetición
- Selección etiqueta: Selección etiqueta, borrar
etiqueta, añadir etiqueta, Salir
l Borrar archivo
l Borrar todo
3.2 Vídeo
El MODO Vídeo permite reproducir vídeos en
formato AMV. Para activar esta opción, siga las
siguientes instrucciones:
Encienda el Reproductor MP3 y en la pantalla
aparecerá el menú principal.
1. Utilizando los botones [] o [], seleccione la
opción Vídeo y pulse el botón [M].
2. Pulse el botón PLAY [] para iniciar la
reproducción del primer video disponible.
3. Pulse y mantenga pulsada la tecla M para
regresar al menú anterior.
Nota: El Reproductor de Vídeo solo lee archivos
AMV, necesita convertir el resto de los formatos para
ver el vídeo deseado.
3.2.1 Tecla de Función en Modo Vídeo
Durante la reproducción de
música, se pueden activar los
siguientes controles.
PLAY [Ź]: Pulse el botón
PLAY [] para empezar a
reproducir un vídeo. Pulse el
botón PLAY de nuevo para pausar
el vídeo. Para reiniciar la
reproducción del vídeo, pulse el botón PLAY de
nuevo.
Si mantiene pulsado el botón PLAY durante más
tiempo, apagará el reproductor
REW & FFWD []: Pulsar [] o [] para
seleccionar el vídeo anterior o el siguiente.
Pulsar y Mantener pulsados los botones [] o
[] para rebobinar o avanzar de vídeo.
Volumen (VOL+ y VOL-): Pulse el botón [VOL+]
para subir el volumen y pulse el botón [VOL-] para
bajar el volumen.
3.2.2 Submenú AMV
Pulsando brevemente el botón MENÚ [M],
desplegará los siguientes submenús AMV. Pulse [] o
[] para elegir y luego pulse la tecla MENÚ [M] para
conrmar cada submenú. Siga los mismos pasos para
navegar dentro de cada submenú.
l Reproduciendo
l Carpeta Local: En este directorio, puede elegir
subir un nivel de carpeta pulsando la tecla MENÚ [M]
para conrmar. Y luego puede elegir la carpeta que
quiere reproducir
l Repetición
l Borrar archivo:Eliminar vídeo especíco.
l Borrar todo: Eliminar todos los vídeos utilizando
esta opción.
3.3 Grabar (grabador de mensajes de voz)
Esta opción permite grabar mensajes de voz
utilizando el micrófono integrado. Para grabar
mensajes, siga las siguientes instrucciones:
1. Encienda el Reproductor MP3 y en la pantalla
aparecerá el menú principal.
2. Utilizando los botones [] o [], seleccione la
opción RECORD y pulse el botón [M].
3. Pulse el botón PLAY [] para iniciar la
grabación.
4. Puede escuchar su chero wav en el submenú
VOZ.
Durante la grabación, Pulse el botón PLAY []
para iniciar la grabación. Pulsar el
botón PLAY de nuevo para pausar la
grabación. Si mantiene el botón PLAY
[] / M pulsado durante más
tiempo, detendrá la grabación.
Pulsando brevemente el botón
MENÚ [M], encontrará la CARPETA
LOCAL y el TIPO DE GRABACIÓN. Pulse [] o [] para
elegir y luego pulse la tecla MENÚ [M] para conrmar
cada submenú. Siga los mismos pasos para navegar
dentro de cada submenú.
1. En el submenú CARPETA LOCAL, puede elegir
subir un nivel de carpeta pulsando [M] para conrmar.
Y luego puede elegir la carpeta que quiere reproducir
2. En el submenú formato GRABACIÓN, puede
elegir el formato de grabación, que incluye
ACT/MP3/WAV/WMA.
3.4 Play (Reproductor de Mensajes de Voz)
La opción play permite reproducir mensajes de
voz grabados por el Reproductor MP3. Para activar
esta opción, siga las siguientes instrucciones:
1. Encienda el Reproductor MP3 y en la pantalla
aparecerá el menú principal.
2. Utilizando los botones [] o [], seleccione la
opción VOZ y pulse el botón [M].
3. Pulse el botón PLAY [] para iniciar la
reproducción de la primera grabación disponible.
3.4.1 Función Clave del Modo PLAY
Durante la reproducción de la grabación, se
pueden activar los siguientes controles.
PLAY [Ź]: Pulse el botón PLAY [] para
empezar a reproducir una grabación. Pulse el botón
PLAY de nuevo para pausar la grabación. Para reiniciar
la reproducción, pulse el botón PLAY de nuevo.
Si mantiene pulsado el botón PLAY durante más
tiempo, apagará el reproductor
REW & FFWD []: Pulsar []
o [] para seleccionar la grabación
anterior o la siguiente.
Pulsar y Mantener pulsados los
botones [] o [] para rebobinar o
avanzar de grabación.
Volumen (VOL+ y VOL-): Pulse
el botón [VOL+] para subir el volumen y pulse el
botón [VOL-] para bajar el volumen.
3.4.2 Submenú PLAY
Pulsando brevemente el botón MENÚ [M],
desplegará los submenús de música siguientes. Pulse
[] y [] para elegir y luego pulse la tecla MENÚ [M]
para conrmar cada submenú. Siga los mismos pasos
para navegar dentro de cada submenú.
l Carpeta Local: En este directorio, puede elegir
subir un nivel de carpeta pulsando la tecla MENÚ [M]
para conrmar. Y luego puede elegir la carpeta que
quiere reproducir
l Conguración:
- Modo repetición: Normal, Repetir1, Carpeta,
Repetir carpeta, Repetir todas, Aleatorio, Intro
- Velocidad de reproducción: Puede alterar el
Tempo de la Canción.
- Modo repetición
l Borrar archivo: Eliminar cheros de voz
especícos.
l Borrar Todos:
Eliminar todos los cheros de voz utilizando esta
opción.
3.5 FM (FM Radio)
Cuando está activado el modo Radio FM, se
pueden escuchar programas de radio.
Esta opción permite disfrutar de programas de
radio FM. Para utilizarla, siga las siguientes
instrucciones:
1. Encienda el Reproductor MP3 y en la pantalla
aparecerá el menú principal
2. Utilizando los botones [] o [], seleccione la
opción FM y luego pulse el botón [M] para conrmar.
3. Si hay frecuencias predenidas, pulse el botón
PLAY [] para reproducir la primera frecuencia,
pulse de nuevo para pasar a la siguiente frecuencia.
3.5.1 Submenú FM
Pulsando brevemente el botón MENÚ [M],
desplegará los siguientes submenús FM. Pulse [] y
[] para elegir y luego pulse la tecla MENÚ [M] para
conrmar cada submenú. Siga los mismos pasos para
navegar dentro de cada submenú.
Abajo encontrará la lista de opciones de radio
FM.
GUARDAR EMISORA: Seleccione esta opción
para memorizar frecuencias de radio
BORRAR EMISORA: Seleccione esta opción para
eliminar frecuencias de radio.
BORRAR TODAS: Seleccionar esta opción para
eliminar todas las frecuencias de radio.
BÚSQUEDA AUTOMÁTICA: Seleccione esta
opción para iniciar la búsqueda automática de
frecuencias de radio.
FRECUENCIA NORMAL: Seleccione esta opción
para activar la banda normal FM.
3.5.2 Búsqueda Automática
Para activar la búsqueda automática de las
frecuencias disponibles, siga las siguientes
instrucciones:
1. Cuando esté activado el Modo FM, pulse el
botón MENÚ [M] para seleccionar la opción
BÚSQUEDA AUTOMÁTICA.
2. Pulse el botón [M] para iniciar la búsqueda
automática. El Reproductor
MP3 almacenará las 20
primeras emisoras de radio
disponibles.
3.5.3 B ú s q u e d a
Manual y Memorización de
Frecuencias
Para buscar
manualmente las frecuencias,
siga las siguientes instrucciones:
1. Cuando esté activado el Modo FM, pulse
prolongadamente los botones [] o [] para iniciar
la búsqueda automática. La sintonización se detendrá
al encontrar una frecuencia disponible.
2. Pulsando brevemente los botones [] o [],
congurará la búsqueda.
3. Pulse el botón MENÚ [M] para seleccionar la
opción GUARDAR.
4. Pulse PLAY [] y esa emisora especíca se
memorizará como último canal.
5. Repita los pasos 1 al 4 para sintonizar cada
emisora teniendo en cuenta que el Reproductor MP3
puede memorizar 20 frecuencias.
3.5.4 Grabación de Radio FM (REC)
Para grabar un programa de radio FM, siga las
siguientes instrucciones:
1. Cuando esté activado el Modo Radio FM, pulse
el botón MENÚ [M] para seleccionar la opción
GRABACIÓN DE CALIDAD
2. Pulse el botón PLAY [] para iniciar la
grabación.
3. Pulse el botón PLAY [] para pausar la
grabación y púlselo de nuevo para reiniciar la
grabación.
4. Para detener la grabación y memorizarla,
pulse prolongadamente el botón [M] y regresará al
modo FM.
3.6 E-Book
La opción E-Book permite leer archivos de texto.
Para activar esta opción, siga las siguientes
instrucciones:
1. Encienda el Reproductor MP3 y en la pantalla
aparecerá el menú principal.
2. Utilizando los botones [] o [], seleccione
E-Book y pulse el botón [M] para conrmar.
3. Utilice los botones [] o [] para elegir el
archivo
4. Pulse el botón PLAY [] para empezar a leer
el archivo.
3.6.1 Submenú E-Book
Pulsando brevemente el botón MENÚ [M],
desplegará los submenús de música siguientes. Pulse
[] o [] para elegir y luego pulse la tecla [M] para
conrmar cada submenú. Siga los mismos pasos para
navegar dentro de cada submenú.
Antes de abrir un archivo, si pulsa M, aparecerá el
siguiente submenú:
l Carpeta Local: En este directorio, puede elegir
subir un nivel de carpeta pulsando la tecla MENÚ [M]
para conrmar. Y entonces podrá elegir la carpeta que
quiere reproducir
l Ajustes de reproducción:
Puede elegir entre reproducción
manual y reproducción
automática. Para la reproducción
automática, puede congurar el
tiempo de reproducción entre 1 y
10 segundos por página del E-Book.
l Borrar archivo: Eliminar archivos de texto
especícos.
l Borrar Todo: Eliminar todos los archivos de
texto utilizando esta opción.
Durante la lectura, si pulsa y mantiene pulsada la
tecla M, podrá seleccionar entre:
- Selección etiqueta
- Borrar etiqueta
- Añadir etiqueta
3.7 FOTO
La opción Foto permite visualizar cheros JPG.
Para activar esta opción, siga las siguientes
instrucciones:
1. Encienda el Reproductor MP3 y en la pantalla
aparecerá el menú principal.
2. Utilizando los botones [] o [], seleccione
FOTO y pulse el botón [M] para conrmar.
3. Utilice los botones [] o [] para elegir el
archivo
4. Pulse el botón PLAY [] para iniciar la
presentación del archivo
3.7.1 Submenú FOTO
Pulsando brevemente el botón MENÚ [M],
desplegará los submenús de música siguientes. Pulse
[] o [] para elegir y luego pulse la tecla –[M] para
conrmar cada submenú. Siga los mismos pasos para
navegar dentro de cada submenú.
l Carpeta Local: En este directorio, puede elegir
subir un nivel de carpeta pulsando PLAY [] para
conrmar. Y entonces podrá elegir la carpeta que
quiere reproducir
l Ajustes de reproducción: Puede elegir entre
reproducción manual y reproducción automática.
Para la reproducción
automática, puede denir el
tiempo de reproducción
entre 1 y 10 segundos por
fotografía.
l Borrar archivo:
Eliminar cheros de fotos
especícos.
l Borrar Todo: Eliminar
Todas las Fotos utilizando
esta opción
3.8 JUEGOS
La opción JUEGOS permite jugar a juegos. Para
activar esta opción, siga las siguientes instrucciones:
1. Encienda el Reproductor MP3 y en la pantalla
aparecerá el menú principal.
2. Utilizando los botones [] o [] para
seleccionar JUEGOS, pulse el botón [M] para entrar en
el MENÚ JUEGOS.
Dentro del menú Juegos, solo hay un juego que
puede utilizar, el Russia Brick, pulse el botón [M] para
conrmar
3.9 Ajustes
Las opciones de AJUSTES permiten acceder al
sistema de conguración del Reproductor. Para
acceder al sistema de conguración, siga las
instrucciones:
1. Encienda el reproductor MP3 y en la pantalla
aparecerá el menú principal.
2. Utilizando [] o [], seleccione la opción de
SISTEMA y luego pulse el botón [M] para entrar en el
MENÚ SISTEMA.
3. Utilizando [] o [], seleccione los
parámetros de conguración del sistema y pulse el
botón MENÚ [M].
Los parámetros disponibles en el sistema de
conguración son:
Ajustar reloj: Esta opción permite congurar la
fecha y la hora del sistema.
Ajuste LCD: Esta opción permite congurar el
brillo, el contraste y la pantalla negra en el panel LCD.
Idioma: Esta opción permite congurar el Idioma
de la Interfaz del Usuario.
Desconex.automática: Esta opción permite
congurar el tiempo de apagado y de inactividad.
Modo Repetición:
Modo en línea:
Info de Memoria: Esta opción permite vericar el
uso de la memoria.
Versión Firmware: Esta opción permite vericar
la versión del rmware.
Actualización Firmware:
Esta opción permite actualizar el
rmware.
3.9.1 Ajustar reloj
Esta opción permite
congurar la fecha y la hora del
sistema. Los dígitos superiores
muestr
an la fecha en formato
Año: Mes: Formato Día y los dígitos inferiores
muestran la Hora en formato Hora: Minutos: Formato
Segundos. Para cambiar de fecha y hora, siga las
siguientes instrucciones:
1. En el MENÚ DE INSTALACIÓN, elija RELOJ
pulsando [] o [] y pulse [M] para conrmar
2. Pulse [VOL+] y [VOL-] para elegir el parámetro
que quiere ajustar
3. Pulse [] o [] para cambiar el valor. Pulse
MENÚ [M] para conrmar.
3.9.2 Congurar Apagado
Esta opción permite congurar el tiempo de
apagado y de inactividad. Al congurar el Tiempo de
apagado, se pueden activar (30s, 60s, 90s y 120s) o
desactivar las funciones de gestión de la energía para
que su reproductor se apague automáticamente si no
lo está utilizando. Al denir el Tiempo de Inactividad,
se puede congurar el reproductor para que se
apague al pasar cierto tiempo (30s, 60s, 90s, 120s)
desde el momento en que conrme esta selección.
Para modicar este parámetro, siga las
siguientes instrucciones:
1. En el MENÚ DE INSTALACIÓN, elija
DESCONEXIÓN AUTOMÁTICA pulsando [] o [] y
pulse PLAY [].
2. Utilizando los botones [] o [], seleccione
INACTIVO (tiempo de apagado) o AUTO APAGADO
(tiempo de inactividad) y pulse el botón [M].
3. Elija el DESCONEXIÓN AUTOMÁTICA o
INACTIVO deseado y pulse [M] para conrmar.
Información de la Memoria
La imagen muestra el volumen total del disco, el
porcentaje utilizado y el porcentaje de espacio
utilizado respecto al espacio total.
Especicaciones
Aviso: No será informado en caso de cambios en el
diseño de producción y en las especicaciones.
Condiciones de Garantía
- Este equipo tiene garantía de 2 años a partir de la
fecha original de compra.
- Serán exentas de la garantía las averías producidas
por un uso incorrecto del aparato, mala instalación o
instalados en lugares inapropiados para su buena
conservación, roturas, actualizaciones de software que
no sean los facilitados por la marca, piezas desgastadas
por su propio uso o por un uso no doméstico o
inadecuado, así como, por manipulación por personas o
talleres ajenos a nuestra empresa.
- Para que la garantía tenga validez, se deberá
adjuntar la factura o tíquet de caja que corrobore la
adquisición y fecha de venta de este producto.
7
6

Brauchen Sie Hilfe? Stellen Sie Ihre Frage.

Forenregeln

Missbrauch melden von Frage und/oder Antwort

Libble nimmt den Missbrauch seiner Dienste sehr ernst. Wir setzen uns dafür ein, derartige Missbrauchsfälle gemäß den Gesetzen Ihres Heimatlandes zu behandeln. Wenn Sie eine Meldung übermitteln, überprüfen wir Ihre Informationen und ergreifen entsprechende Maßnahmen. Wir melden uns nur dann wieder bei Ihnen, wenn wir weitere Einzelheiten wissen müssen oder weitere Informationen für Sie haben.

Art des Missbrauchs:

Zum Beispiel antisemitische Inhalte, rassistische Inhalte oder Material, das zu einer Gewalttat führen könnte.

Beispielsweise eine Kreditkartennummer, persönliche Identifikationsnummer oder unveröffentlichte Privatadresse. Beachten Sie, dass E-Mail-Adressen und der vollständige Name nicht als private Informationen angesehen werden.

Forenregeln

Um zu sinnvolle Fragen zu kommen halten Sie sich bitte an folgende Spielregeln:

Neu registrieren

Registrieren auf E - Mails für Sunstech Thorn wenn:


Sie erhalten eine E-Mail, um sich für eine oder beide Optionen anzumelden.


Das Handbuch wird per E-Mail gesendet. Überprüfen Sie ihre E-Mail.

Wenn Sie innerhalb von 15 Minuten keine E-Mail mit dem Handbuch erhalten haben, kann es sein, dass Sie eine falsche E-Mail-Adresse eingegeben haben oder dass Ihr ISP eine maximale Größe eingestellt hat, um E-Mails zu erhalten, die kleiner als die Größe des Handbuchs sind.

Ihre Frage wurde zu diesem Forum hinzugefügt

Möchten Sie eine E-Mail erhalten, wenn neue Antworten und Fragen veröffentlicht werden? Geben Sie bitte Ihre Email-Adresse ein.



Info